Psr2000e1 PDF

OWNER’S
OWNER’S MANUAL
MANUAL
Introduction
SPECIAL MESSAGE SECTION
This product utilizes batteries or an external power supply Battery Notice:
(adapter). DO NOT connect this product to any power sup- This product MAY contain a small non-rechargeable
ply or adapter other than one described in the manual, on battery which (if applicable) is soldered in place. The
the name plate, or specifically recommended by Yamaha. average life span of this type of battery is approxi-
mately five years. When replacement becomes neces-
WARNING: Do not place this product in a position where sary, contact a qualified service representative to
anyone could walk on, trip over ,or roll anything over perform the replacement.
power or connecting cords of any kind. The use of an
extension cord is not recommended! IF you must use an This product may also use “household” type batteries.
extension cord, the minimum wire size for a 25' cord (or Some of these may be rechargeable. Make sure that the
less ) is 18 AWG. NOTE: The smaller the AWG number battery being charged is a rechargeable type and that
,the larger the current handling capacity. For longer exten- the charger is intended for the battery being charged.
sion cords, consult a local electrician. When installing batteries, do not mix batteries with new,
or with batteries of a different type. Batteries MUST be
This product should be used only with the components installed correctly. Mismatches or incorrect installation
supplied or; a cart, rack, or stand that is recommended by may result in overheating and battery case rupture.
Yamaha. If a cart, etc., is used, please observe all safety
markings and instructions that accompany the accessory Warning:
product. Do not attempt to disassemble, or incinerate any battery.
Keep all batteries away from children. Dispose of used
SPECIFICATIONS SUBJECT TO CHANGE: batteries promptly and as regulated by the laws in your
The information contained in this manual is believed to be area. Note: Check with any retailer of household type
correct at the time of printing. However, Yamaha reserves batteries in your area for battery disposal information.
the right to change or modify any of the specifications
without notice or obligation to update existing units. Disposal Notice:
Should this product become damaged beyond repair,
This product, either alone or in combination with an ampli-
or for some reason its useful life is considered to be at
fier and headphones or speaker/s, may be capable of pro-
an end, please observe all local, state, and federal reg-
ducing sound levels that could cause permanent hearing
ulations that relate to the disposal of products that con-
loss. DO NOT operate for long periods of time at a high
tain lead, batteries, plastics, etc. If your dealer is
volume level or at a level that is uncomfortable. If you
unable to assist you, please contact Yamaha directly.
experience any hearing loss or ringing in the ears, you
should consult an audiologist. NAME PLATE LOCATION:
IMPORTANT: The louder the sound, the shorter the time The name plate is located on the bottom of the prod-
period before damage occurs. uct. The model number, serial number, power require-
ments, etc., are located on this plate. You should
Some Yamaha products may have benches and / or
record the model number, serial number, and the date
accessory mounting fixtures that are either supplied with
of purchase in the spaces provided below and retain
the product or as optional accessories. Some of these
this manual as a permanent record of your purchase.
items are designed to be dealer assembled or installed.
Please make sure that benches are stable and any
optional fixtures (where applicable) are well secured
BEFORE using.
Benches supplied by Yamaha are designed for seating
only. No other uses are recommended.
NOTICE:
Service charges incurred due to a lack of knowledge relat-
ing to how a function or effect works (when the unit is
operating as designed) are not covered by the manufac-
turer’s warranty, and are therefore the owners responsibil-
ity. Please study this manual carefully and consult your
dealer before requesting service.
ENVIRONMENTAL ISSUES:
Yamaha strives to produce products that are both user Model
safe and environmentally friendly. We sincerely believe
that our products and the production methods used to pro-
duce them, meet these goals. In keeping with both the let- Serial No.
ter and the spirit of the law, we want you to be aware of the
following: Purchase Date
92-BP (bottom) PLEASE KEEP THIS MANUAL

PRECAUTIONS
PLEASE READ CAREFULLY BEFORE PROCEEDING
* Please keep this manual in a safe place for future reference.
WARNING
Always follow the basic precautions listed below to avoid the possibility of serious injury or even
death from electrical shock, short-circuiting, damages, fire or other hazards. These precautions
include, but are not limited to, the following:
Power supply/AC power adaptor Water warning
• Only use the voltage specified as correct for the instrument. The • Do not expose the instrument to rain, use it near water or in
required voltage is printed on the name plate of the instrument. damp or wet conditions, or place containers on it containing liq-
• Use the specified adaptor (PA-300 or an equivalent recom- uids which might spill into any openings.
mended by Yamaha) only. Using the wrong adaptor can result in • Never insert or remove an electric plug with wet hands.
damage to the instrument or overheating.
• Check the electric plug periodically and remove any dirt or dust Fire warning
which may have accumulated on it.
• Do not put burning items, such as candles, on the unit.
• Do not place the AC adaptor cord near heat sources such as
A burning item may fall over and cause a fire.
heaters or radiators, and do not excessively bend or otherwise
damage the cord, place heavy objects on it, or place it in a posi-
If you notice any abnormality
tion where anyone could walk on, trip over, or roll anything over it.
• If the AC adaptor cord or plug becomes frayed or damaged, or if
Do not open there is a sudden loss of sound during use of the instrument, or if
any unusual smells or smoke should appear to be caused by it,
• Do not open the instrument or attempt to disassemble the inter- immediately turn off the power switch, disconnect the adaptor
nal parts or modify them in any way. The instrument contains no plug from the outlet, and have the instrument inspected by quali-
user-serviceable parts. If it should appear to be malfunctioning, fied Yamaha service personnel.
discontinue use immediately and have it inspected by qualified
Yamaha service personnel.
CAUTION
Always follow the basic precautions listed below to avoid the possibility of physical injury to you or
others, or damage to the instrument or other property. These precautions include, but are not limited
to, the following:
Power supply/AC power adaptor Location
• When removing the electric plug from the instrument or an outlet, • Do not expose the instrument to excessive dust or vibrations, or
always hold the plug itself and not the cord. extreme cold or heat (such as in direct sunlight, near a heater, or
• Unplug the AC power adaptor when not using the instrument, or in a car during the day) to prevent the possibility of panel disfigu-
during electrical storms. ration or damage to the internal components.
• Do not connect the instrument to an electrical outlet using a mul- • Do not use the instrument in the vicinity of a TV, radio, stereo
tiple-connector. Doing so can result in lower sound quality, or equipment, mobile phone, or other electric devices. Otherwise,
possibly cause overheating in the outlet. the instrument, TV, or radio may generate noise.
• Do not place the instrument in an unstable position where it
might accidentally fall over.
• Before moving the instrument, remove all connected adaptor and
other cables.
• Use only the stand specified for the instrument. When attaching
the stand, use the provided screws only. Failure to do so could
cause damage to the internal components or result in the instru-
ment falling over.
(3)-7 1/2
PSR-2000/1000 3
Connections Saving data
• Before connecting the instrument to other electronic compo- Saving and backing up your data
nents, turn off the power for all components. Before turning the
• Current memory data (see page 39) is lost when you turn off the
power on or off for all components, set all volume levels to mini-
power to the instrument. Save the data to a floppy disk/the User
mum. Also, be sure to set the volumes of all components at their
Drive (see page 39).
minimum levels and gradually raise the volume controls while
Saved data may be lost due to malfunction or incorrect opera-
playing the instrument to set the desired listening level.
tion. Save important data to a floppy disk.
Maintenance When you change settings in a display page and then exit
from that page, System Setup data (listed in the Parameter
• When cleaning the instrument, use a soft, dry cloth. Do not use Chart of the separate Data List booklet) is automatically
paint thinners, solvents, cleaning fluids, or chemical-impregnated stored. However, this edited data is lost if you turn off the
wiping cloths. power without properly exiting from the relevant display.
Handling caution
Backing up the floppy disk
• Do not insert a finger or hand in any gaps on the instrument. • To protect against data loss through media damage, we recom-
• Never insert or drop paper, metallic, or other objects into the
mend that you save your important data onto two floppy disks.
gaps on the panel or keyboard. If this happens, turn off the
power immediately and unplug the power cord from the AC out-
let. Then have the instrument inspected by qualified Yamaha ser-
vice personnel.
• Do not place vinyl, plastic or rubber objects on the instrument,
since this might discolor the panel or keyboard.
• Do not rest your weight on, or place heavy objects on the instru-
ment, and do not use excessive force on the buttons, switches or
connectors.
• Do not operate the instrument for a long period of time at a high
or uncomfortable volume level, since this can cause permanent
hearing loss. If you experience any hearing loss or ringing in the
ears, consult a physician.
Yamaha cannot be held responsible for damage caused by improper use or modifications to the instrument, or data that is lost or destroyed.
Always turn the power off when the instrument is not in use.
Even when the power switch is in the “STANDBY” position, electricity is still flowing to the instrument at the minimum level. When you are not
using the instrument for a long time, make sure you unplug the AC power adaptor from the wall AC outlet.
(3)-7 2/2
4 PSR-2000/1000
Thank you for purchasing the Yamaha PSR-2000/1000!
We recommend that you read this manual carefully
so that you can fully take advantage of the advanced
and convenient functions of the PSR-2000/1000.
We also recommend that you keep this manual
in a safe and handy place for future reference.
PSR-2000/1000 5
Accessories
■ PA-300 AC Adaptor*
■ Floppy Disk [includes accompaniment style files (pages 28 and 59), and MIDI Driver (page 154)]
■ Music Stand (page 17)
■ Data List
■ Owner’s Manual
* May not be included in your area. Please check with your Yamaha dealer.
About this Owner’s Manual and Data List

This manual consists of four main sections: Introduction, Quick Guide, Basic Operation, and Reference.
Also, a separate Data List is provided.
Introduction (page 2): Please read this section first.

Quick Guide (page 20): This section explains how to use the basic functions.
Basic Operation (page 38): This section explains how to use the basic operations including display-based controls.
Reference (page 52): This section explains how to make detailed settings for the PSR-2000/1000’s various
functions.
Data List : Voice List, MIDI Data Format, etc.
* The illustrations and LCD screens as shown in this owner’s manual are for instructional purposes only, and may appear
somewhat different from those on your instrument.
* The example Operation Guide displays shown in this Manual are taken from the PSR-2000, and in English.
* This product (PSR-2000) is manufactured under license of U.S. Patents No.5231671, No.5301259, No.5428708, and
No.5567901 from IVL Technologies Ltd.
* The bitmap fonts used in this instrument have been provided by and are the property of Ricoh Co., Ltd.
* Copying of the commercially available software is strictly prohibited except for your personal use.
COPYRIGHT NOTICE
This product incorporates and bundles computer programs and contents in which Yamaha owns copyrights or with respect to which it has
license to use others' copyrights. Such copyrighted materials include, without limitation, all computer software, styles files, MIDI files, WAVE
data and sound recordings. Any unauthorized use of such programs and contents outside of personal use is not permitted under relevant
laws. Any violation of copyright has legal consequences. DON'T MAKE, DISTRIBUTE OR USE ILLEGAL COPIES.
Trademarks:
• Apple and Macintosh are trademarks of Apple Computer, Inc.
• IBM-PC/AT is a trademark of International Business Machines Corporation.
• Windows is the registered trademark of Microsoft® Corporation.
• All other trademarks are the property of their respective holders.
6 PSR-2000/1000
Handling the Floppy Disk Drive (FDD) and
Floppy Disk
Be sure to handle floppy disks and treat the disk drive with care. Follow the important precautions below.
• Never attempt to remove the disk or turn the power off

Compatible Disk Type when the data is being written to the floppy disk.
• 3.5" 2DD and 2HD type floppy disks can be used. Doing so can damage the disk and possibly the disk
drive. Press the eject button slowly as far as it will go;
the disk will automatically pop out. When the disk is
fully ejected, carefully remove it by hand.
Inserting/Ejecting Floppy Disks • If the eject button is pressed too quickly, or if it is not
pressed in as far as it will go, the disk may not eject
To insert a floppy disk into the disk drive: properly. The eject button may become stuck in a half-
• Hold the disk so that the label of the disk is facing pressed position with the disk extending from the
upward and the sliding shutter is facing forward, drive slot by only a few millimeters. If this happens, do
towards the disk slot. Carefully insert the disk into the not attempt to pull out the partially ejected disk, since
slot, slowly pushing it all the way in until it clicks into using force in this situation can damage the disk drive
place and the eject button pops out. mechanism or the floppy disk. To remove a partially
ejected disk, try pressing the eject button once again,
or push the disk back into the slot and then repeat the
Drive lamp eject procedure.
When the power is turned on, the drive lamp (at • Be sure to remove the floppy disk from the disk drive
the bottom left of the drive) lights to indicate the
drive can be used.
before turning off the power. A floppy disk left in the
drive for extended periods can easily pick up dust and
dirt that can cause data read and write errors.
Cleaning the Disk Drive Read/Write Head
• Clean the read/write head regularly. This instrument

employs a precision magnetic read/write head which,
after an extended period of use, will pick up a layer of
magnetic particles from the disks used that will
To eject a floppy disk:
eventually cause read and write errors.
Before ejecting the disk, be sure to confirm that data
• To maintain the disk drive in optimum working order
is not being written to the floppy disk.
Yamaha recommends that you use a commercially-
If data is currently being written to the floppy disk in
available dry-type head cleaning disk to clean the
the following operations, the messages “Now
head about once a month. Ask your Yamaha dealer
executing,” “Now copying,” and “Now formatting”
about the availability of proper head-cleaning disks.
appears in the display.
• Never insert anything but floppy disks into the disk
• Moving, copying, pasting, saving, or deleting data
drive. Other objects may cause damage to the disk
(page 42 - 44).
drive or floppy disks.
• Naming files and folders (page 41); creating a new
folder (page 44).
• Copying a disk to an another disk (page 150);
formatting the disk (page 150).
Eject button
PSR-2000/1000 7
To protect your data (Write-protect Tab):
About the Floppy Disks
• To prevent accidental erasure of important data, slide
the disk’s write-protect tab to the “protect” position
To handle floppy disks with care: (tab open).
• Do not place heavy objects on a disk or bend or apply
pressure to the disk in any way. Always keep floppy
disks in their protective cases when they are not in
use.
• Do not expose the disk to direct sunlight, extremely
high or low temperatures, or excessive humidity, dust
write-protect tab open
or liquids. (protect position)
• Do not open the sliding shutter and touch the exposed
surface of the floppy disk inside.
• Do not expose the disk to magnetic fields, such as
those produced by televisions, speakers, motors, etc.,
since magnetic fields can partially or completely erase Data backup
data on the disk, rendering it unreadable. • For maximum data security Yamaha recommends that
• Never use a floppy disk with a deformed shutter or you keep two copies of important data on separate
housing. floppy disks. This gives you a backup if one disk is lost
• Do not attach anything other than the provided labels or damaged. To make a backup disk use the Disk to
to a floppy disk. Also make sure that labels are Disk function on page 150.
attached in the proper location.
About the Display Messages

A message (information or confirmation dialog) sometimes appears on the screen to facilitate operation.
When such messages appear, simply follow the instructions as shown by pressing the corresponding button.
F You can select the desired

language from the Help dis-
G
play (page 49).
H
For this example, press the

[G] (YES) button to
execute formatting.
8 PSR-2000/1000
Table of Contents
Introduction ............................ 2 Reference
PRECAUTIONS .......................................................... 3 Playing the Demos .................52
Accessories ............................................................... 6
About this Owner’s Manual and Data List .............. 6
Handling the Floppy Disk Drive (FDD)
Voices.....................................54
and Floppy Disk..................................................... 7 Selecting a Voice .................................................... 54
About the Display Messages.................................... 8 Layer/Left — Playing Several Sounds
Application Index ................................................... 12 Simultaneously .................................................... 56
What can you do with the PSR-2000/1000?.......... 14 Layer — Layering Two Different Voices ................... 56
Setting Up the PSR-2000/1000.............................. 16 Left — Setting Separate Voices for the Left
Panel Controls and Terminals................................ 18 and Right Sections of the Keyboard ..................... 57
Applying Voice Effects ........................................... 57
PITCH BEND Wheel & MODULATION Wheel........ 58
Quick Guide ........................... 20 Adjusting the Octave setting ................................. 58
Playing the Demos ................................................. 20
Song Playback ........................................................ 21 Styles......................................59
Playback of Songs ....................................................21
Playing a style ........................................................ 59
Playing Voices ........................................................ 25
Playing a Style’s Rhythm Channels only .................. 61
Playing a Voice ........................................................25
Adjusting the Volume Balance/Channel Muting ...... 61
Playing Two Voices Simultaneously ..........................26
Chord Fingerings.................................................... 62
Playing Different Voices with the Left
and Right Hands ...................................................27 Arranging the Style Pattern (SECTIONS:
Playing Styles ......................................................... 28 MAIN A/B/C/D, INTRO, ENDING, BREAK) ......... 64
Playing a style ..........................................................28 Stopping the Style Playback While Releasing Keys
Style Sections...........................................................30 (SYNC. STOP) ...................................................... 65
One Touch Setting...................................................32 Selecting Intro and Ending Types (INTRO/ENDING) ... 66
Music Finder........................................................... 33 Playing Fill-in patterns automatically when changing
accompaniment sections — Auto Fill In................ 66
Using the Music Finder ............................................33
Searching the Music Finder Records.........................34 Appropriate Panel Setting for the Selected Style
Playing with the Songs .......................................... 36 (ONE TOUCH SETTING) ...................................... 67
Playing Along with the PSR-2000/1000....................36 Automatically Changing One Touch Settings
Recording ................................................................37 with the Sections — OTS Link .............................. 68
Registering the Panel Controls in One Touch Setting
(ONE TOUCH SETTING) ...................................... 68
Basic Operations Calling Up Ideal Setups for Your Music
— Music Finder.................................................... 69
— Organizing Your Data ....... 38 Searching the Ideal Setups — Music Finder Search ... 70
Example — Open/Save display for Voice..................39 Editing Records — Music Finder Record Edit ........... 71
Selecting Files and Folders..................................... 40
File/Folder-related Operations .............................. 41 The Multi Pads .......................73
Naming Files/Folders ...............................................41
Moving Files/Folders ................................................42 Playing the Multi Pads ........................................... 73
Copying Files/Folders...............................................43 Chord Match .......................................................... 73
Deleting Files/Folders...............................................43 Multi Pad Edit......................................................... 74
Saving Files ..............................................................44
Organizing Files by Creating a New Folder ..............44
Displaying Upper Level pages ..................................44
Song Playback........................75
Entering Characters and Changing Icons .................44 Compatible Song Types ......................................... 75
Using the [DATA ENTRY] Dial................................ 46 Song Playback ........................................................ 76
Direct Access — Instant Selection of Displays....... 47 Playing the Internal Songs....................................... 76
Help Messages ....................................................... 49 Playing Back Songs on Disk ..................................... 78
Using the Metronome............................................ 50 Other Playback-related Operations.......................... 78
Adjusting the Tempo ............................................. 50 Muting Specific Parts
Tap Tempo ..............................................................51 — Track1/Track2/Extra Tracks ............................ 79
PSR-2000/1000 9
Repeat Playback of a Specific Range ..................... 79 Editing the Channel Data ...................................... 115
Displaying Music Notation Making Style File Format Settings —Parameter ..... 116
— Score (PSR-2000 only) .................................... 80
Displaying the Lyrics .............................................. 83
Creating Multi Pad
— Multi Pad Creator ............118
Saving and Recalling
Operation ............................................................. 118
Custom Panel Setups Multi Pad Realtime Recording — Record ............ 119
— Registration Memory ........ 84 Start recording...................................................... 119
Stop recording...................................................... 119
Registering Panel Setups — Registration Memory .. 84 Step Recording or Editing Multi Pads — Edit...... 120
Saving Your Registration Memory Setups .................85
Recalling a Registration Memory Setup ................ 86
Adjust the Volume Balance
Editing Voices and Changing Voices
— Sound Creator ................... 87 — Mixing Console ................121
Operation ............................................................... 87 Operation ............................................................. 121
Regular Voice Parameters...................................... 88 Setting the Level Balance and Voice
Organ Flutes (PSR-2000 only)................................ 91 — Volume/Voice ............................................... 122
Changing the Tone of the Voice — Filter............ 123
Changing Pitch-related Settings — Tune ............ 123
Recording Your Performances Adjusting the Effects ............................................ 124
and Creating Songs Effect Structure ..................................................... 126
Setting the Equalizer—EQ (PSR-2000 only) ........ 127
— Song Creator ..................... 92
About Song Recording........................................... 92
Quick Recording..................................................... 93
Using a Microphone
Multi Recording ..................................................... 94 — MIC. (PSR-2000)...............128
Recording Individual Notes — Step Record .......... 96 Selecting a Vocal Harmony Type ......................... 129
Operation ................................................................96
Adjusting the Vocal Harmony Settings
Recording Melodies — Step Record (Note) ..............98
and Microphone Effects — OVERALL SETTING ... 130
Recording Chord Changes for the Auto Accompani-
Making Settings for the Vocal Harmony
ment — Step Record (Chord) ...............................99
and Microphone — MICROPHONE SETTING ... 130
Select the Recording Options: Starting,
Setting the Microphone Volume and Related Effects
Stopping, Punching In/Out — Rec Mode......... 101
— TALK SETTING............................................... 132
Editing a Recorded Song ..................................... 102
Editing Channel-related Parameters — Channel .....102
Editing Note Events — 1 - 16.................................105 Making Global and
Editing Chord Events — CHD.................................106
Editing System Events Other Important Settings
— SYS/EX. (System Exclusive) .............................106 — Function...........................133
Inputting and Editing Lyrics ...................................107
Customizing the Event List — Filter........................107 Operation ............................................................. 133
Fine Tuning the Pitch/Selecting a Scale
— Master Tune/Scale Tune............................... 135
Creating Accompaniment Styles Tuning the Overall Pitch — Master Tune............... 135
— Style Creator ................... 108 Selecting a Scale — Scale Tune ............................. 135
Setting Song-related Parameters
About Creating Accompaniment Styles .............. 108 — Song Settings................................................ 137
Style File Format .................................................. 109 Setting Auto Accompaniment-related Parameters
Operation ............................................................. 109 — Style Setting, Split Point,
Realtime Recording — Basic ................................ 110 and Chord Fingering......................................... 138
Step Recording..................................................... 111 Setting Auto Accompaniment-related Parameters
Assembling an Accompaniment Style — Style Setting and Split Point .......................... 138
—Assembly ........................................................ 112 Setting the Fingering Method — Chord Fingering ... 139
Edit the Created Accompaniment Style .............. 113 Making Settings for the Pedals and Keyboard
Change the Rhythmic Feel — Groove and Dynamics ..113 — Controller...................................................... 139
10 PSR-2000/1000
Making Settings for the Pedals ...............................139
Changing the Touch Sensitivity Modulation
and Transpose — Keyboard/Panel ......................141
Setting the Registration Sequence, Freeze,
and Voice Set .................................................... 142
Specifying the Order for Calling Up Registration
Memory Presets — Registration Sequence ..........142 Introduction
Maintaining Panel Settings — Freeze .....................142
Changing the Automatically Selected Voice Settings
— Voice Set ........................................................143 Quick Guide
Setting Harmony and Echo.................................. 143
Setting the MIDI Parameters ............................... 145
Making Overall System Settings (Local Control, Basic Operations - Organizing Your Data
Clock, etc.) — System.........................................145
Transmitting MIDI Data — Transmit ......................146
Receiving MIDI Data — Receive .............................147 Playing the Demos
Setting Root Note Channels — Root ......................147
Setting Chord Channels — Chord Detect ..............147
Other Settings — Utility ...................................... 148 Voices
Making Settings for Fade In/Out, Metronome,
Parameter Lock, and Tap — CONFIG 1...............148
Making Settings for the Display Styles
and Voice Number Indication — CONFIG 2........149
Copying and Formatting Disks — Disk ...................150
Entering Your Name and Language Preference The Multi Pad
— Owner............................................................151
Restoring the Factory-programmed Settings
of the PSR-2000/1000 — System Reset...............151 Song Playback
Using Your PSR-2000/1000 Saving and Recalling Custom Panel Setups

- Registration Memory
with Other Devices.............. 152
Using the Headphones (PHONES jack). ..................152 Editing Voices - Sound Creator
Connecting the Microphone or Guitar
(MIC./LINE IN jack) (PSR-2000 only)...................152
Playing the sounds of the PSR-2000/1000 through an Recording Your Performances and Creating Songs
external audio system, and recording the sounds to - Song Creator
an external recorder (AUX OUT/OUTPUT jacks) .....153
Using the Pedal (footswitch) or Foot Controller Creating Accompaniment Styles
(FOOT PEDAL 1/2 jack).......................................153 - Style Creator
Connecting external MIDI devices
(MIDI terminals) .................................................153 Creating Multi Pad - Multi Pad Creator
Connecting to a Computer
(MIDI terminals/TO HOST terminal)....................154
What’s MIDI? .........................................................155 Adjust the Volume Balance and Changing Voices
What You Can Do With MIDI .................................158 - Mixing Console
Data Compatibility.................................................158
Disk format ............................................................158
Sequence Format...................................................159 Using a Microphone - MIC. (PSR-2000)
Voice Allocation Format .........................................159
Making Global and Other Important Settings
- Function
Troubleshooting.................. 160
Using Your PSR-2000/1000 with Other Devices
Specifications ...................... 162
Appendix
Index ................................... 164
PSR-2000/1000 11
Application Index
Use this index to find reference pages that may be helpful for your particular
application and situation.
Listening
Listening to the internal songs ................................................................................................................ page 76
Listening to disk songs ....................................................................... “Playing Back Songs on Disk” on page 78
Listening to demo songs......................................................................................................................... page 52
Listening to the demo of the selected voices .......................................................................................... page 54
Listening to songs with the special voices of the PSR-2000/1000 ......................................................... page 122
Playing
Playing an accompaniment that matches pitch..................................................“Transpose Assign” on page 141
Combining two voices ...................................................... “Layer — Layering Two Different Voices” on page 56
Playing separate voices with the right and left hands
...........................“Left — Setting Separate Voices for the Left and Right Sections of the Keyboard” on page 57
Changing the sound

Enhancing the sound with touch and other effects ......................................“Applying Voice Effects” on page 57
.................................................................................................................“Adjusting the Effects” on page 124
Adjusting the Level Balance ................................................................................................................. page 122
Combining two voices ...................................................... “Layer — Layering Two Different Voices” on page 56
Playing separate voices with the right and left hands
...........................“Left — Setting Separate Voices for the Left and Right Sections of the Keyboard” on page 57
Creating voices ...................................................................................................................................... page 87
Playing the auto accompaniment

Playing the accompaniment automatically ............................................................................................. page 59
Calling up ideal panel settings for your music ........................................................................................ page 69
Practicing
Practicing with an accurate and steady tempo............................................. “Using the Metronome” on page 50
Recording
Recording your performance...........................................................................................................pages 93, 94
Creating a song by entering notes .......................................................................................................... page 96
Creating your original settings

Creating voices ...................................................................................................................................... page 87
Creating accompaniment styles............................................................................................................ page 108
Creating multi pads.............................................................................................................................. page 118
12 PSR-2000/1000
Application Index
Using a microphone (PSR-2000 only)

Connecting the microphone.............. ”Connecting the Microphone or Guitar (MIC./LINE IN jack)” on page 152
Adding automatic harmonies to your singing ....................................................................................... page 129
Settings
Registering Panel Setups......................................................................................................................... page 84
Tuning the pitch/Selecting a scale ........................................................................................................ page 135
Making detailed settings for playing back songs ................................................................................... page 137
Making detailed settings for the auto accompaniment.......................................................................... page 138
Making detailed settings for the keyboard voices ................................................................................. page 141
Making detailed settings for MIDI ........................................................................................................ page 145
Connecting the PSR-2000/1000 to other devices

Basic information on MIDI..................................................................................... “What’s MIDI?” on page 155
Recording your performance........”Playing the sounds of the PSR-2000/1000 through an external audio system,
and recording the sounds to an external recorder (AUX OUT/OUTPUT jacks)” on page 153
Raising the volume ......................”Playing the sounds of the PSR-2000/1000 through an external audio system,
and recording the sounds to an external recorder (AUX OUT/OUTPUT jacks)” on page 153
Connecting a computer........... .”Connecting to a Computer (MIDI terminals/TO HOST terminals)” on page 154
Quick solution
Basic functions of the PSR-2000/1000 and how you can best use it ................................................pages 12, 14
Resetting the PSR-2000/1000 to the default setting
................. “Restoring the Factory-programmed Settings of the PSR-2000/1000 — System Reset” on page 151
Displaying the Messages ......................................................................“About the Display Messages” on page 8
Troubleshooting ................................................................................................................................... page 160
PSR-2000/1000 13
What can you do with the PSR-2000/1000?
SONG Multi Pads DEMO

Playback previously recorded Add spice to your performance Explore the Demos
songs (page 21, 36, 75) with special dynamic phrases (page 20, 52)
Enjoy a wide variety of preset songs (page 73, 118) These not only showcase the
as well as songs on commercially By simply pressing one of the Multi stunning voices and styles of
available disks. Pads, you can play short rhythmic or the instrument, they
melodic phrases. You can also create introduce you to the various
your original Multi Pad phrases by functions and features — and
recording them directly from the give you hands-on
keyboard. experience using the PSR-
2000/1000!
SONG EXTRA TRACK TRACK METRO-

TRACKS 2 1 REPEAT NOME
(STYLE) (L) (R)
REC TOP START/STOP REW FF DIGITAL

STUDIO
SOUND CREATOR
NEW SONG SYNC. START A

DIGITAL RECORDING
STYLE
SWING & MARCH & B
POP & ROCK JAZZ BALLROOM WALTZ
MIXING CONSOLE
C
BALLAD DANCE LATIN USER

PART D
MENU
DEMO E
TAP TEMPO
TRANSPOSE TEMPO
HELP
RESET RESET
MASTER VOLUME
STOP FUNCTION
BALANCE
MULTI PAD DIRECT
FADE ACCESS
IN/OUT
MIN MAX CHANNEL ON/OFF 1 2 3 4
STYLE CONTROL PART

MAIN ENDING SYNC. SYNC.
ACMP BREAK INTRO / rit. STOP START START/STOP
AUTO OTS
STANDBY FILL IN LINK
ON
STYLE DIGITAL RECORDING

Back up your performance with Auto Record your performances
Accompaniment (page 28, 59) (page 92, 108)
Playing a chord with your left hand automatically With the powerful and easy-to-use song
plays the auto accompaniment backing. Select an recording features, you can record your
accompaniment style — such as pop, jazz, Latin, own keyboard performances, and create
etc. — and let the PSR-2000/1000 be your backing your own complete, fully orchestrated
band! compositions — which you can then save to
the USER drive or a floppy disk for future
recall.
14 PSR-2000/1000
LCD MUSIC FINDER VOICE
The large LCD (together Call up the perfect accompaniment Enjoy a huge variety of
with the various panel style (page 33, 69) realistic voices (page 25, 54)
buttons) provides If you know what song you want to play, The PSR-2000/1000 features a
comprehensive and easy- but you don’t know which style or voice wealth of exceptionally authentic
to-understand control of would be right for it, let the Music Finder and dynamic voices — including
the PSR-2000/1000’s help you. Just select the song title, and piano, strings, woodwinds, and
operations. the PSR-2000/1000 automatically calls more!
up the most appropriate style and voice.
LEFT
VOICE EFFECT HARMONY/ DSP
HOLD TOUCH SUSTAIN ECHO MONO VARIATION
BACK NEXT
VOICE ORGAN &

PIANO & HARPSI. E.PIANO ACCORDION PERCUSSION
MAIN
F GUITAR BASS BRASS WOODWIND

LAYER
G
LEFT STRINGS CHOIR & PAD SYNTH. XG

H
I
Organ Flutes (PSR-2000)
USER ORGAN FLUTES
UPPER OCTAVE
J
MUSIC Craft your own organ voices
FINDER
MIC. VH TYPE MIC. VOCAL
RESET
(page 91)
SELECT SETTING HARMONY TALK EFFECT
OVER This special function not only gives
SIGNAL
you a full set of rich and luscious
ONE TOUCH SETTING
ENTER organ sounds, it also lets you create
EXIT
your own original organ voices, just
5 6 7 8
as on a traditional organ, by
increasing and decreasing the flute
REGISTRATION MEMORY
FREEZE MEMORY
footages, and adding percussive
DATA ENTRY
sounds.
TO HOST terminal
Vocal Harmony (PSR-2000)
Make music with a computer — quickly and
easily (page 154) Add automatic vocal backing to your singing (page 128)
Dive in and take advantage of the wide world of The amazing Vocal Harmony feature (on the PSR-2000)
computer music software. Connections and setup automatically produces backup vocal harmonies for lead vocals
are exceptionally easy, and you can play back that you sing into a microphone. You can even change the
your computer recorded parts with different gender of the harmony voices — for example, letting you add
instrument sounds — all from a single PSR-2000/ female backup to your own male voice (or vice versa).
1000!
LCD TO HOST Mac MIDI IN OUT 2 MIC. LINE INPUT MIC./ R L R L/L+R DC IN 16V
PC1 PC2
CONTRAST HOST SELECT MIDI FOOT PEDAL VOLUME LINE IN AUX OUT OUTPUT
(LEVEL FIXED)
PSR-2000/1000 15
Setting Up the PSR-2000/1000
Power Supply Power-on Procedure
1 Make sure that the PSR-2000/1000’s STANDBY/ON
switch is at the STANDBY (off) position.
When you have made all the necessary connections
(page 152) between your PSR-2000/1000 and any other
devices, make sure that all volume settings are turned
2 Connect one end of the AC cable to the PA-300. down all the way to zero. Then turn on every device in
your setup in the order of MIDI masters (senders), MIDI
slaves (receivers), then the audio equipment (mixers,
amplifiers, speakers, etc.). This ensures smooth MIDI
operation and prevents speaker damage.
When powering down the setup, first turn down the
volume for each audio device, then switch off each
3 Connect the PA-300’s DC plug to the PSR-2000/
1000’s DC IN terminal on the instrument’s rear
device in the reverse order (first audio devices, then
MIDI).
panel.
MIDI master (transmitting device)
R L/L+R DC IN 16V
)
OUTPUT POWER
ON!!
DC IN
PSR-2000/1000 as MIDI slave (MIDI receiving device)

To electrical outlet
4 Connect the other end (normal AC plug) to the

nearest electrical outlet.
WARNING 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 L R
Do not attempt to use an AC adaptor other than the Yamaha PA-

Audio equipment (first mixer, then amplifier)
300 or an equivalent recommended by Yamaha. The use of an
incompatible adaptor may cause irreparable damage to the PSR-
2000/1000, and may even pose a serious shock hazard! ALWAYS
UNPLUG THE AC ADAPTOR FROM THE AC POWER OUTLET
WHEN THE PSR-2000/1000 IS NOT IN USE.
CAUTION
Never interrupt the power supply (e.g. unplug the AC adaptor)
during any PSR-2000/1000 record operation! Doing so can result
in a loss of data.
CAUTION
Even when the switch is in the “STANDBY” position, electricity
is still flowing to the instrument at a minimum level. When not
using the PSR-2000/1000 for an extended period of time, be sure
to unplug the AC power adaptor from the wall AC outlet.
16 PSR-2000/1000
Powering Up Music Stand
CAUTION
In order to avoid possible damage to the speakers or other connected
electronic equipment, always switch on the power of the 2000/1000
before switching on the power of the amplified speakers or mixer and
amplifier. Likewise,always switch off the power of the 2000/1000 after
switching off the power of the amplified speakers or mixer and ampli-
fier.
CAUTION
Even when the switch is in the "STANDBY" position,electricity is still
flowing to the instrument at a minimum level. When not using the The PSR-2000/1000 is supplied with a music stand
PSR-2000/1000 for an extended period of time, be sure to unplug the that can be attached to the instrument by inserting it
AC power adaptor from the wall AC outlet. into the slot at the rear of the control panel.
n
Before you switch your 2000/1000 on or off, first turn down the vol-
ume of any connected audio equipment.
The Panel Logos
The logos printed on the PSR-2000/1000 panel indicate
standards/formats it supports and special features it includes.
1 Press the [STANDBY/ON] switch.
→ The main display appears in the display. GM System Level 1
“GM System Level 1” is an addition to the MIDI standard
which guarantees that any data conforming to the standard will
play accurately on any GM-compatible tone generator or
synthesizer from any manufacturer.
XG Format
XG is a new Yamaha MIDI specification which significantly
expands and improves on the “GM System Level 1” standard
with greater voice handling capacity, expressive control, and
STANDBY effect capability while retaining full compatibility with GM. By
ON
BACK NEXT
using the PSR-2000/1000 XG voices, it is possible to record
MAIN XG-compatible song files.
A F
LAYER
B G
C H LEFT
D I XF Format
E J
MUSIC
FINDER
The Yamaha XF format enhances the SMF (Standard MIDI File)
standard with greater functionality and open-ended
expandability for the future. The PSR-2000/1000 is capable of
displaying lyrics when an XF file containing lyric data is played.
(SMF is the most common format used for MIDI sequence files.
The PSR-2000/1000 is compatible with SMF Formats 0 and 1,
When you’re ready to turn off the power, press the and records “song” data using SMF Format 0.)
[STANDBY/ON] switch again.
→ Both the display and the drive lamp (at the Vocal Harmony (PSR-2000 only)
bottom left of the drive) will turn off. Vocal Harmony employs state-of-the-art digital signal
processing technology to automatically add appropriate vocal
harmony to a lead vocal line sung by the user. Vocal Harmony
can even change the character and gender of the lead voice as
2 Adjusting the display contrast
well as the added voices to produce a wide range of vocal
If the LCD is difficult to read, adjust the harmony effects.
contrast with the [LCD CONTRAST]
knob on the rear panel. LCD
Disk Orchestra Collection
CONTRAST The DOC voice allocation format provides data playback
compatibility with a wide range of Yamaha instruments and
3 Setting the volume MIDI devices.
Use the [MASTER VOLUME] MASTER VOLUME Style File Format
dial to adjust the volume to The Style File Format (SFF) is Yamaha’s original style file format,
an appropriate level. which uses a unique conversion system to provide high-quality
FADE automatic accompaniment based on a wide range of chord
IN/OUT
types. The PSR-2000/1000 uses the SFF internally, reads
MIN MAX optional SFF style disks, and creates SFF styles using the Style
Creator feature.
PSR-2000/1000
17
Panel Controls and Terminals
55 74 75 76
LCD TO HOST Mac MIDI IN OUT
PC1 PC2
CONTRAST HOST SELECT MIDI

6
(STYLE)
79 (L)
10
8(R)
9 5
STUDIO
SOUND CREATOR
42
10
NEW SONG
11
SYNC. START
12 13 14 36 A
DIGITAL RECORDING
STYLE
POP & ROCK
SWING &
JAZZ BALLROOM
MARCH &
WALTZ 37 B
15 MIXING CONSOLE
C

38 PART D
MENU
DEMO E
TAP TEMPO
TRANSPOSE TEMPO
39 HELP
16
RESET 17RESET 18 40
MASTER VOLUME
STOP FUNCTION
21 MULTI PAD 22 41 BALANCE

DIRECT
FADE
IN/OUT
ACCESS
44
MIN
19 MAX
20
CHANNEL ON/OFF
STYLE CONTROL
43 45
PART
STANDBY
ACMP BREAK INTRO / rit.
AUTO
FILL IN
OTS
LINK
STOP START START/STOP
46
ON
23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35
1
PITCH BEND MODULATION
2 3
4
PHONES
C1 D1 E1 F1 G1 A1 B1 C2 D2 E2 F2 G2 A2 B2 C3 D3 E3 F3 G3
CLICK 36 T 37 38 S 39 40 R 41 42 L 43 44 L 45 46 M 47 H 48 49 M 50 51 H 52 L 53 54 H 55 56 L 57 58 M 59 M 60 C 61 H 62 R 63 64 R 65 66 S 67
L H 1 1
POWER MASTER VOLUME

1 [STANDBY/ON] switch ......................................................... P. 17 19 [MASTER VOLUME] dial ..................................................... P. 17
20 [FADE IN / OUT] button ....................................................... P. 65
WHEEL
2 PITCH BEND ....................................................................... P. 58 MULTI PAD
3 MODULATION (PSR-2000 only).......................................... P. 58 21 [1] - [4] buttons ..................................................................... P. 73
22 [STOP] button ...................................................................... P. 73
PHONES
4 [PHONES] jack .................................................................. P. 152 STYLE CONTROL
23 [ACMP] button...................................................................... P. 60
METRONOME 24 [BREAK] button.................................................................... P. 64
5 [METRONOME] button ........................................................ P. 50 25 [INTRO] button............................................................... P. 31, 66
SONG 26 MAIN [A] button.................................................................... P. 64
27 MAIN [B] button.................................................................... P. 64
6 [EXTRA TRACKS (STYLE)] button ...................................... P. 79
28 MAIN [C] button ................................................................... P. 64
7 [TRACK 2 (L)] button............................................................ P. 79
29 MAIN [D] button ................................................................... P. 64
8 [TRACK 1 (R)] button ........................................................... P. 79
30 [ENDING / rit.] button..................................................... P. 31, 66
9 [REPEAT] button .................................................................. P. 79
31 [AUTO FILL IN] button ......................................................... P. 66
10 [REC] button ........................................................................ P. 92
32 [OTS LINK] button................................................................ P. 68
11 [TOP] button......................................................................... P. 78
33 [SYNC.STOP] button ........................................................... P. 65
12 [START / STOP] button ........................................................ P. 76
34 [SYNC.START] button.......................................................... P. 60
13 [REW] button........................................................................ P. 78
35 [START / STOP] button ........................................................ P. 60
14 [FF] button............................................................................ P. 78
STYLE DIGITAL STUDIO
36 [SOUND CREATOR] button ................................................. P. 87
15 STYLE buttons..................................................................... P. 59
37 [DIGITAL RECORDING] button ................................... P. 92, 108
TRANSPOSE 38 [MIXING CONSOLE] button............................................... P. 121
16 [E] [F] buttons ............................................................. P. 141
MENU
TEMPO 39 [DEMO] button ..................................................................... P. 52
17 [E] [F] buttons ............................................................... P. 50 40 [HELP] button ...................................................................... P. 49
18 [TAP TEMPO] button ............................................................ P. 51 41 [FUNCTION] button ........................................................... P. 133
18 PSR-2000/1000
77 78 72 79 80 81
2 MIC. LINE INPUT MIC./ R L R L/L+R DC IN 16V
FOOT PEDAL VOLUME LINE IN AUX OUT OUTPUT
73 (LEVEL FIXED)
LEFT
BACK NEXT
47 48 56 57 58 59 60 61 62
VOICE ORGAN &
42 MAIN 63 PIANO & HARPSI. E.PIANO ACCORDION PERCUSSION
F
49 GUITAR BASS BRASS WOODWIND 71
LAYER
G
H LEFT
50 STRINGS CHOIR & PAD SYNTH. XG
I 51 USER ORGAN FLUTES

UPPER OCTAVE
J
MUSIC
FINDER
64
RESET
65 MIC. VH TYPE
SELECT
MIC.
SETTING
VOCAL
HARMONY TALK EFFECT
66 OVER
SIGNAL
ENTER
67 ONE TOUCH SETTING
EXIT
53 52
54
REGISTRATION MEMORY
FREEZE MEMORY
DATA ENTRY
68 69 70
A3 B3 C4 D4 E4 F4 G4 A4 B4 C5 D5 E5 F5 G5 A5 B5 C6
S 67 68 C 69
2
70 R 71
2 H 72 L 73 74 H 75 L 76 H 77 L 78 H 79 L 80 81 82 H 83 L 84 S 85 L 86 87 H 88 L 89 M 90 O 91 92 93 94 95 96
DISPLAY CONTROL MIC.

42 [A] - [J] buttons..................................................................... P. 40 65 MIC. buttons (PSR-2000 only) ........................................... P. 128
43 [DIRECT ACCESS] button ................................................... P. 47
44 [BALANCE] button ............................................................... P. 61
MUSIC FINDER
45 [CHANNEL ON / OFF] button ........................................ P. 61, 78 66 [MUSIC FINDER] button ...................................................... P. 69
46 [1▲▼] - [8▲▼] buttons ................................................. P. 38 - 45 ONE TOUCH SETTING
47 [BACK] button ................................................................ P. 40, 46
67 [1] - [4] buttons ..................................................................... P. 67
48 [NEXT] button ................................................................ P. 40, 46
49 VOICE PART ON / OFF [MAIN] button ................................ P. 56 REGISTRATION MEMORY
50 VOICE PART ON / OFF [LAYER] button .............................. P. 56 68 [FREEZE] button.................................................................. P. 86
51 VOICE PART ON / OFF [LEFT] button................................. P. 56 69 [1] – [8] buttons .................................................................... P. 84
52 [ENTER] button.................................................................... P. 46 70 [MEMORY] button ................................................................ P. 84
53 [DATA ENTRY] dial............................................................... P. 46
54 [EXIT] button ........................................................................ P. 40 FLOPPY DISK
55 [LCD CONTRAST] knob ...................................................... P. 17 71 Floppy disk drive (3.5”) .......................................................... P. 7
VOICE EFFECT Microphone (PSR-2000 only)

56 [LEFT HOLD] button ............................................................ P. 58 72 [INPUT VOLUME] knob ..................................................... P. 152
57 [TOUCH] button ................................................................... P. 57 73 [MIC. LINE IN] jack............................................................. P. 152
58 [SUSUTAIN] button .............................................................. P. 57 Connectors
59 [HARMONY / ECHO] button ................................................ P. 58
74 [TO HOST] terminal ........................................................... P. 154
60 [MONO] button ..................................................................... P. 58
75 [HOST SELECT] switch ..................................................... P. 154
61 [DSP] button......................................................................... P. 57
76 MIDI [OUT] [IN] terminals .................................................. P. 153
62 [VARIATION] button ............................................................. P. 58
77 [FOOT PEDAL 1 (SWITCH) ] jack ..................................... P. 153
VOICE 78 [FOOT PEDAL 2] jack ........................................................ P. 153
63 VOICE buttons ..................................................................... P. 54 79 AUX OUT (LEVEL FIXED) [L] [R] jacks ............................. P. 153
80 OUTPUT [L / L+R] [R] jacks............................................... P. 153
UPPER OCTAVE 81 DC IN terminal ................................................................... P. 153
64 [UPPER OCTAVE] button..................................................... P. 58
PSR-2000/1000 19
Quick Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Playing the Demos Reference
on page 52
The PSR-2000/1000 features an extensive variety of

Demo button
Demo songs, that showcase its rich, authentic voices and
its dynamic rhythms and styles.
What’s more, there’s a special selection of Demo
functions. These take you through a hands-on journey of
all the important features and functions of the instrument
— letting you see firsthand how to effectively use the
PSR-2000/1000 in your own music.
1 Press the [DEMO] button

automatically plays
2 Press the [BACK]/[NEXT] button to select the Demo
categories. BACK NEXT
MENU
back the Demo DEMO
songs at random.
HELP
FUNCTION
Voice Demos showcase the

For this example, FUNCTION voices of the PSR-2000/
is selected. Function Demos 1000. Style Demos intro-
demonstrate each of the duce you to the rhythms and
different functions on the accompaniment styles of the
PSR-2000/1000. PSR-2000/1000 (page 52).
3 Press any of the [A] to [J] buttons or [8▼] (AUTO) button (FUNCTION page only) to select the Demo songs.
For this example, press the [8▼] (AUTO) button.
All of the function demos are played back in sequence.
MAIN
For details about the Demos,
A F refer to page 52.
LAYER
B G
C H LEFT
D I
E J
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Press the [EXIT] button to exit from the demo mode and return to the MAIN display when you’ve finished playing the
demo songs.
When you’re done with the Demos, you can get to know your PSR-2000/1000 even better with these functions:
• Song playback (page 21)
• Short demo playback of the selected voice (in the Voice Open display; page 26).
20 Quick Guide
Song Playback
Song Playback Reference

on page 75
Here’s where all of the amazing voices, effects, rhythms, styles and other sophisticated features of
the PSR-2000/1000 come together — in songs!
Song related buttons Make sure that the Lan-

guage setting for the instru-
ment (page 151) is the same
as that of the file name of the
song that you are playing
back.
BALANCE and
CHANNEL buttons
Floppy disk drive
The following songs are compatible for playback on the PSR-2000/1000. Refer to pages 75, 158 for more details on
the logos.
Disks bearing this logo contain song data for voices defined in the GM standard. Songs containing a large
amount of data may not be
Disks bearing this logo contain song data using the XG format, an extension of the GM able to be read properly by
standard that provides a wider variety of voices and more comprehensive sonic control. the instrument, and as such
you may not be able to
Disks bearing this logo contain song data for voices defined in Yamaha’s DOC format. select them. The maximum
capacity is about 200–
300KB, however this may
differ depending on the data
contents of each song.
Playback of Songs
1 If you want to play back a disk song, insert an appropriate disk containing song data into the disk drive.
CAUTION
• Make sure to read the
section “Using the Floppy
Disk Drive (FDD) and
Floppy Disks” on page 7.
Quick Guide 21
Song Playback
2 Press the [A] button to call up the Song Open display.

If the MAIN screen is not displayed, press the [DIRECT ACCESS] button followed by the [EXIT] button.
From the MAIN display (the

A display shown when the
power is turned on), you can
B
select songs, voices, accom-
C
paniment styles, etc.
FLOPPY DISK (commercially available

PRESET (Songs for Demos) songs, your own songs, etc.)
Press the [BACK]/[NEXT] button to select the drive.

In the example display at left, the PRESET page is
selected; at right, FLOPPY DISK is selected.
3 Press the [A] - [C] button to select the Voice/Style/Function folder.
22 Quick Guide
Song Playback
4 Press one of the [A] to [J] buttons to select the song file.
5 Press the SONG [START/STOP] button to start playback.

REC TOP START/STOP
• To rewind or fast forward to the playback point of the song, press the [REW] or [FF] button.
• With song data software (Standard MIDI format 0) that includes lyrics, you can view the lyr-
NEW SONG SYNC. START ics on the display during playback. You can also view the score (PSR-2000 only). See
pages 80 and 83 for details.
6 While the song is playing, try using the Mute function to turn certain instrument channels off or on —
letting you craft dynamic arrangements on the fly!
1) Press the [CHANNEL ON/OFF] button.
2) Press the [1 - 8▲▼] button corresponding to the channel you wish to turn on or off.
CHANNEL ON/OFF
PART
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
If the STYLE tab is

selected, press this button
again.
Quick Guide 23
Song Playback
7 Finally, take the producer’s seat and try your hand at mixing. These Balance controls let you adjust the levels
of the individual parts — the song, the style, your singing (PSR-2000 only), and your playing.
1) Press the [BALANCE] button.
2) Press the [1 - 8▲▼] button corresponding to the part of which the volume you wish to adjust.
BALANCE
You can call up a full set of

mixing controls by pressing
the [MIXING CONSOLE]
button (page 121).
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
8 Press the SONG [START/STOP] button to stop playback.
REC TOP START/STOP

• The [FADE IN/OUT] but-
ton (page 65) can be used
NEW SONG SYNC. START to produce smooth fade-
ins and fade-outs when
starting and stopping the
song, as well as the
accompaniment.
24 Quick Guide
Playing Voices
Playing Voices Reference

The PSR-2000/1000 features a stunning variety of over 700 dynamic, rich and realistic voices. Try on page 54
playing some of these voices now and hear what they can do for your music. Here, you’ll learn how
to select individual voices, combine two voices in a layer, and split two voices between your left and right hands.
Voice related buttons
Playing a Voice
1 Press the [MAIN] button to turn the MAIN part on, then press the [F] button to call up the menu for
selecting MAIN voice.
Turn MAIN on. The voice you’re selecting

MAIN
here belongs to the MAIN
part, and is called the MAIN
F voice. (See page 56 for more
LAYER
information.)
G
H LEFT
You’ll want to hear the MAIN

voice all by itself — so make sure
that the LAYER and LEFT parts
are turned off.
2 Select a voice group.

Press the [BACK]/[NEXT]
button to select the memory
location of the voice. For this
For this example, STRINGS
example, PRESET is
is selected.
selected.
VOICE ORGAN &

GUITAR BASS BRASS WOODWIND
STRINGS CHOIR & PAD SYNTH. XG
USER ORGAN FLUTES
Quick Guide 25
Playing Voices
3 Select a voice.
• You can instantly jump

back to the Main display
A
by “double-clicking” on
B one of the [A] - [J] buttons.
• The voices displayed on
C
the PSR-1000 are differ-
D ent from the example dis-
play at left; however, the
E operations are identical.
For this example,
”Strings” is
selected. Press the [8▲] button to start the
Demo for the selected voice. To stop
the Demo, press this button again.
Press the corresponding buttons to select the There’s more to the Demo features
other pages — and discover even more voices. than just voices, though–for more
information, see page 52.
4 Play the voices.

Naturally, you can play the voice yourself from the keyboard, but you can also
have the PSR-2000/1000 demonstrate the voice for you. Simply press the [8▲]
button from the display above, and a Demo of the voice plays automatically.
Playing Two Voices Simultaneously
1 Press the VOICE PART ON/OFF [LAYER] button to turn

the LAYER part on.
MAIN
LAYER
2 Press the [G] button to select the LAYER part. LEFT

Here, we’ll select a lush pad to fill out the sound. Call up
VOICE
PIANO & HARPSI. E.PIANO
ORGAN &
ACCORDION PERCUSSION
the “CHOIR & PAD” group.

4 Select a voice.
For example, select “Gothic Vox.”
USER ORGAN FLUTES
5 Play the voices.

Now, you can play two different voices together in a rich
sounding layer — the MAIN voice you selected in the
previous section, plus the new LAYER voice you’ve
selected here.
And that’s just the beginning. Check out these other voice-related features:
• Create your own original voices — quickly and easily — by changing the settings of existing voices (page 87).
• Set up your favorite panel settings — including voices, styles, and more — and call them up whenever you need
them (page 84).
26 Quick Guide
Playing Voices
Playing Different Voices with the Left and Right Hands
1 Press the VOICE PART ON/OFF [LEFT] button to turn the LEFT
part on.
MAIN
LAYER
LEFT
2 Press the [H] button to select the LEFT part.

Here, we’ll select the “STRINGS” group — so that you can play
VOICE
ORGAN &
ACCORDION PERCUSSION
rich, orchestral chords with your left hand.

4 Select a voice, then press the [EXIT] button to return to the MAIN
display.
USER ORGAN FLUTES
For example, select “Symphon. Str.”
5 Call up the SPLIT POINT display (page 138). From here, you can set the particular key on the keyboard that
separates the two voices — called the Split Point. To do this, simultaneously hold down the [F] or [G] button
and press the desired key on the keyboard. (For more information, see page 138.)
MENU A
DEMO
B
HELP C
D
FUNCTION
6 Play the voices.

The notes you play with your left hand sound one voice, while
the notes you play with your right sound a different voice (or
voices).
MAIN and LAYER voices are meant to be played with the right
Split Point
hand. The LEFT voice is played with the left hand.
LEFT MAIN/LAYER
7 Press the [EXIT] button to return to the MAIN display. EXIT
Quick Guide 27
Playing Styles
Playing Styles Reference

The PSR-2000/1000 has a huge variety of musical “styles” that you can call upon to back up your on page 59
own performance. They give you anything from a simple, yet effective piano backing or percussion
accompaniment to a full band or orchestra.
Style related buttons
Playing a style
1 Select a style group and a style.
A
STYLE
SWING & MARCH &
POP & ROCK JAZZ BALLROOM WALTZ B
C
D
For this example, Dance is Press the [BACK]/[NEXT] button to

For this example,
selected. select the memory location of the
EuroTrance is selected.
style. For this example, PRESET is
selected.
2 Turn ACMP on.

The specified left-hand section of the keyboard becomes the “Auto Accompaniment” section, and chords
played in this section are automatically detected and used as a basis for fully automatic accompaniment with
the selected style.
Split Point • The point on the keyboard

that separates the auto
ACMP accompaniment section
and the right-hand sec-
tion of the keyboard is
called the “split point.”
Auto Accompaniment Refer to page 138 for
section instructions on setting the
split point.
28 Quick Guide
Playing Styles
3 Turn SYNC.START on.

SYNC.
START
4 As soon as you play a chord with your left hand, the style starts.
For this example, play a C major chord (as shown below).
Split Point
Auto Accompaniment
section
5 Change the tempo by using the TEMPO[ ] [ ] buttons if necessary.

Simultaneously press the TEMPO [ ] [ ] buttons to return the tempo to its The Tempo can also be
original setting. Press the [EXIT] button to leave the TEMPO display. adjusted by using the [TAP
TEMPO] button (page 51).
6 Try playing other chords with your left hand.

For information on how to enter chords, see “Chord Fingerings” on page 62.
7 Press the STYLE [START/STOP] button to stop the style.
And there’s much more. Check out these other style-related features:
• Easily create your own original styles (page 87).
• Set up your favorite panel settings — including styles, voices, and more — and call them up whenever you need
them (page 84).
Embellish and enhance your melodies — with the automatic Harmony and Echo effects
This powerful performance feature lets you automatically add harmony notes to the melodies you play with your
right hand — based on the chords you play with your left. Tremolo, Echo, and other effects are available, too.
1 Turn HARMONY/ECHO on. VOICE EFFECT
LEFT HARMONY/ DSP
2 Turn ACMP on (page 28).

3 Play a chord with your left hand and play some notes in the right-hand range of the
keyboard. For details about Harmony/
The PSR-2000/1000 has various Harmony/Echo types (page 143). Echo types, refer to the sep-
The Harmony/Echo type may change according to the selected MAIN voice. arate Data List.
• Harmony/Echo is just one of the many Voice Effects you can use. Try out some of
the other effects and see how they can enhance your performance (page 57).
Quick Guide 29
Playing Styles
Style Sections
Each style in the auto accompaniment is made up of “sections.” Since each section is a rhythmic variation of the basic
style, you can use them to add spice to your performance and mix up the beats — while you’re playing. Intros, Endings,
Main patterns, and Breaks — they’re all here, giving you the dynamic elements you need to create professional-
sounding arrangements.
INTRO This is used for the beginning of the song. When the intro finishes playing, accompaniment shifts to the
main section.
MAIN This is used for playing the main part of the song. It plays an accompaniment pattern of several measures,
and repeats indefinitely until another section’s button is pressed.
BREAK This lets you add dynamic variations and breaks in the rhythm of the accompaniment, to make your
performance sound even more professional.
ENDING This is used for the ending of the song. When the ending is finished, the auto accompaniment stops
automatically.
1-3 Use the same operations as in “Playing a style” on pages 28 and 29.
4 Press the [INTRO] button.

BREAK INTRO
MAIN ENDING
/ rit.
5 As soon as you play a chord with your left hand, the Intro starts.
For this example, play a C major chord (as shown below).
Split Point
Auto Accompaniment
section
When the playback of the intro is finished, it automatically leads into main section.
6 Press any of the MAIN [A] to [D] buttons or [BREAK]

button as desired. (See the Accompaniment Structure BREAK INTRO
MAIN ENDING
/ rit.
on the next page.) or
7 Press the [AUTO FILL IN] button to add a fill-in, if

necessary.
AUTO
FILL IN
OTS
LINK
Fill-in patterns play automatically between each change in

the Main sections.
8 Press the [ENDING] button.

This switches to the ending section. When the ending is
BREAK INTRO
MAIN ENDING
/ rit.
finished, the style automatically stops.
30 Quick Guide
Playing Styles
■ Accompaniment Structure
INTRO (page
(page 66)
xx) INTRO A INTRO B INTRO C INTRO D
(max. four patterns)
MAIN VARIATION
via BREAK
MAIN
VARIATION
B
MAIN MAIN
VARIATION VARIATION
A C via BREAK
via BREAK
MAIN
VARIATION
D
via BREAK
Press the [ENDING] button.
You can have the

ending gradually slow
ENDING down (ritardando) by
ENDING(page
(page xx)
66) ENDING A ENDING B ENDING C ENDING D
pressing the [ENDING]
button again while the
ending is playing back.
(max. four patterns)
• An Intro doesn’t necessarily have to be at the beginning! If you want, you can play an Intro section in the middle of your performance by
simply pressing the [INTRO] button at the desired point.
• Watch your timing with the Break sections. If you press a [BREAK] button too close to the end of the measure (i.e., after the final eighth
note), the Break section starts playing from the next measure. This also applies to the Auto Fill-in.
• Mix up your intros and use any of the other sections to start the style, if you want.
• If you want to come back into the style right away after an Ending, simply press the [INTRO] button while the Ending section is playing.
• If you press the [BREAK] button while the ending is playing, the break will immediately start playing, continuing with the main section.
Other Controls
FADE IN/OUT The [FADE IN/OUT] button can be used to produce smooth fade-ins and fade-outs (page 65)when starting and stopping
FADE
IN/OUT the style.
TAP TEMPO The style can be started at any tempo you desire by “tapping” out the tempo with the [TAP/TEMPO] button. For details,
TAP TEMPO see page 51.
SYNC.STOP When Synchro Stop is on, you can stop and start the style anytime you want by simply releasing or playing the keys (in
SYNC.
STOP
the Auto Accompaniment section of the keyboard). This is a great way to add dramatic breaks and accents to your
performance. For details, see page 65.
Quick Guide 31
Playing Styles
ONE TOUCH SETTING

buttons
One Touch Setting

One Touch Setting is a powerful and convenient feature that automatically calls up the most appropriate panel settings
(voice number, etc.) for the currently selected style, with the touch of a single button. This is a wonderful way to
instantly reconfigure all the settings on the PSR-2000/1000 to match the style you want to play.
1 Select a style (page 28).
2 Press one of the [ONE TOUCH SETTING] buttons.

Not only does this instantly call up all the settings
ONE TOUCH SETTING
(voices, effects, etc.) that match the current style (see

page 67) — it also automatically turns on ACMP and
SYNC. START, so that you can immediately start playing
the style.
3 As soon as you play a chord with your left hand, the auto
accompaniment starts.
4 Play melodies with your right hand and play various chords
with your left hand.
Split Point
Auto Accompaniment
section
5 Try out other One Touch Setting setups.

You can also create your own One Touch Setting
ONE TOUCH SETTING
setups.
For details, refer to page 68.
• Here’s another way to further automate musical changes and spice up your performance: Use the convenient OTS
(One Touch Setting) Link function to automatically change One Touch Settings when you select a different Main
section (page 68).
32 Quick Guide
Music Finder
Music Finder Reference

on page 69
MUSIC FINDER button
If you want to play in a certain song but don’t know which style and voice settings would be appropriate, the
convenient Music Finder can help you out. Simply select the song name from the Music Finder and the PSR-2000/
1000 automatically makes all appropriate panel settings to let you play in that music style!
Using the Music Finder
1 Press the [MUSIC FINDER] button.

MUSIC
FINDER
2 Select a record.
Press the [BACK]/[NEXT]

button to select the desired
page of records. For this
example, ALL is selected.
Select the desired

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
record.
For this example, press the [1▲▼] - [3▲▼] buttons to select a record by song title.
3 Play along with the style playback.
You can also have the voice

and other important settings
change automatically with
Split Point the style changes. To do this,
turn on OTS LINK (page 68)
and set the OTS LINK TIM-
ING (page 138) to “REAL.”
Auto Accompaniment
section
Press the [EXIT] button to return to the MAIN display.
Quick Guide 33
Music Finder
Searching the Music Finder Records

The Music Finder is also equipped with a convenient search function that lets you enter a song title or keyword — and
instantly call up all the records that match your search criteria.
1 Press the [MUSIC FINDER] button.

MUSIC
FINDER
2 Press the [I] button to call up the MUSIC FINDER SEARCH 1 display.
The results of Search 1 and
2 appear in the correspond-
ingly numbered SEARCH 1/
2 displays.
Refer to page 45 for instruc-

tions on entering characters.
A F
4 For this example,

press the [A] B G
button to call up C H
the display for D I
inputting the song

3
E J
title. Press the [F], [G]
and [H] to clear
For this example, the previous
ANY is selected. conditions, if
necessary.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
5 Enter the song title,

then press the [8▲]
(OK) button.
For this example,
Press the [8▲] (START SEARCH)
ALL is selected.
6 button.
The search function calls up all
records that contain the entered
word or words.
34 Quick Guide
Music Finder
7 Select a record (see step #2 on page 33) and play along with the style playback.
Split Point
Auto Accompaniment
section
Press the [EXIT] button to return to the MAIN display.

You can also create your own Music Finder setups and save them to floppy disk (pages 38 and 44). In this
way, you can expand your Music Finder collection by exchanging them with other PSR-2000/1000 users.
For details, refer to page 71.
Saving and Recalling Music Finder Data

To save your Music Finder data, call up the MUSIC FINDER Open/Save window from
the SYSTEM RESET page (page 151) of the UTILITY display, and follow the same Music Finder data is compat-
procedure as that in the Open/Save window for Voice (page 40, 44). To recall the saved ible for both the PSR-2000
data, execute the appropriate operation from the MUSIC FINDER’s Open/Save window. and the PSR-1000.
Records can be replaced or added (page 71).
In the instructions above, all Music Finder data is handled together. Besides this, when
you save or load style files, the Music Finder data that uses the relevant style file(s) is
stored or added automatically. When you copy or move a style file on a floppy disk to
the USER drive (page 42, 43), the record which was recorded when storing the relevant
style is automatically added to the PSR-2000/1000.
• In the example above, you specified a song title, but you can also look for relevant records by keyword or music
genre — for example, Latin, 8-beat, etc. (page 70).
Quick Guide 35
Playing with the Songs
Playing with the Songs Reference

on page 75
Song related
buttons
Playing Along with the PSR-2000/1000

In this section, try using the PSR-2000/1000’s song playback features to cancel or mute the right-hand melody while
you play the part yourself. It’s like having a very talented and versatile playing partner accompany you while you
perform.
1-4 Use the same operations as in “Song Playback” on pages 21 - 23.
5 Press the [TRACK 1] button to cancel the right hand melody part.
TRACK
1
To cancel the left hand part,
(R)
press the [TRACK 2] button.
6 If you want to have the notation displayed as you play (PSR-2000 only), press the [C] button. If you want to
see the lyrics, press the [B] button.
If the selected song does not

contain lyric data, lyrics are
A not displayed.
B
7 Press the SONG [START/STOP] button and play the part.

If you want, you can adjust the tempo by pressing the TEMPO[ ][ ] • If you want to start the song right
buttons. away without an intro, use the Sync
Start function. To set Sync Start to
REC TOP START/STOP
standby, simultaneously hold down
the [TOP] button and press the
NEW SONG SYNC. START
SONG [START/STOP] button. Song
playback starts automatically the
moment you start playing the melody.
• If you can hear the PSR-2000/1000
playing the melody part as well,
8 Press the SONG [START/STOP] button to stop playback.

REC TOP START/STOP
check the channel setting for the
melody part in the song data, and
change the channel assigned to
Track 1 (page 137). You can also
change the song channel itself per-
NEW SONG SYNC. START manently (page 103).
36 Quick Guide
Playing with the Songs
Recording
The PSR-2000/1000 lets you record, too — quickly and easily. Try out the Quick Recording feature now and capture
your keyboard performance.
1-3 Select a voice for recording. Use the same operations as in “Playing a Voice” on pages 25, 26.
4 Press the [REC] and [TOP] buttons simultaneously to select “New Song” for recording.
REC TOP START/STOP REW FF
5 Simultaneously hold down the [REC] button and press the [TRACK1] button.
REC SONG EXTRA TRACK TRACK

TRACKS 2 1
(STYLE) (L) (R)
6 Recording starts as soon as you start playing the keyboard.
7 When you’ve finished recording, press the [REC] button.

REC
8 To hear your newly recorded performance, return the song to the beginning by
using the [TOP] button and press the SONG [START/STOP] button. CAUTION
The recorded data will be
REC TOP START/STOP lost if you turn off the power.
To keep your important
recordings, you’ll need to
NEW SONG SYNC. START save them to the User drive
or floppy disk.
9 Save the recorded data as required (pages 38, 44).
Quick Guide 37
Basic Operations — Organizing Your Data
The PSR-2000/1000 utilizes a variety of data types — including voices, accompaniment styles, songs, multi pads and
registration memory settings. Much of this data is already programmed and contained in the PSR-2000/1000; you can
also create and edit your own data with some of the functions on the instrument.
All this data is stored in separate files — just as is done on a computer.
Here, we’ll show you how to use the basic operations of the display controls in handling and organizing the data of the
PSR-2000/1000 in files and folders.
Files can be opened, saved, named, moved, or deleted in their respective Open/Save displays. You can select these
displays according to their respective file types, as well: Song, Voice, Style, etc. Moreover, you can organize your data
efficiently by putting various files of the same type into a single folder.
The Open/Save displays for Song, Voice, Style, Multi Pad Bank and Registration Bank can be called up from the MAIN
display (the display shown when the power is turned on) by pressing the appropriate [A] - [J] button.
Open/Save display for Open/Save display for Open/Save display for

Song (page 76) Voice (page 54) Multi Pads (page 73, 118)
handles the Song files. handles the Voice files. handles the Multi Pad Bank
files.
The following Open/

Save display types are
A F
also available; however,
B G these are selected from
displays other than the
C H
MAIN display
D I
(page 151).
• SYSTEM SETUP
E J • MIDI SETUP
• USER EFFECT
• MUSIC FINDER
If the MAIN screen is

not displayed, press the
[DIRECT ACCESS]
button followed by the
Open/Save display for Style (page 59) Open/Save display for Registration [EXIT] button.
Bank (page 85)
handles the Registration Bank files.

handles the Style files.
38 PSR-2000/1000
Example — Open/Save display for Voice

Each Open/Save display consists of PRESET, USER, and FLOPPY DISK drive pages.
PRESET drive USER drive FLOPPY DISK drive

The files that are pre- Files kept here are those You can also store your original
programmed and installed containing your own original data to floppy disk.
internally to the PSR-2000/1000 data, created or edited using the Commercially available disk
are kept here. Preset files can be various functions of the PSR- software can also be called up
loaded but cannot be re-written. 2000/1000. They are stored here. Naturally, these files are
However, you can use a preset internally to the PSR-2000/1000. available only when the
file as a basis for creating your appropriate disk is inserted in
own original file (which can be the floppy disk drive.
saved in the USER or FLOPPY
DISK drive).
BACK NEXT
Changes drives among

PRESET, USER and
FLOPPY DISK.
Calls up the upper

level directory page.
In this example, the
voice folder selection
page can be called
up.
File
All data, both pre- Current Memory
programmed and your own “Current Memory” is the area where the voice is called up when you
original, are stored as “files.” select a voice. Also it is the area where you edit your voice using the
SOUND CREATOR function. Your edited voice should then be saved
as a file in the USER or FLOPPY DISK drive.
Recording songs (page 92) and creating accompaniment styles
(page 108) are done within the current memory. Please make sure to
properly save this data to the USER/FLOPPY DISK drive as a file or
files. The data will be lost if you turn off the power without saving.
PSR-2000/1000 39
Selecting Files and Folders

Select a file shown in the display. In this example, we’ll select a voice file.
First, press the VOICE [PIANO & HARPSI.] button to call up the display containing the files.
This display (“Open/Save” display) is typical of those used to call up and store files (voice files).
The PSR-2000/1000 already contains a variety of voices in the PRESET section. You can store your own original voices
created with the Sound Creator function to the USER or FLOPPY DISK section.
1 Select “PRESET,” “USER,” or “FLOPPY

DISK” by using the [BACK][NEXT]
When “JAPANESE” is selected for the Lan-
guage parameter (pages 45, 151), and you
button. BACK NEXT change this to one of the western lan-
guages, the kanji and kana characters of the
file name stored in the disk drive are
changed to western characters. In the oppo-
site case, special Latin characters and
marks are changed into normal characters.
A F Also, in the case of floppy disk data, text in
B G
the files are changed to characters that can-
not be read by the instrument.
C H Keep in mind that similar problems may
occur when trying to access files originating
D I
or edited by a computer having a different
E J language operating system. In general, be
careful when switching languages — you risk
not being able to access the data properly.
Double-clicking the
ENTER appropriate [A] -[J] button
calls up the corresponding
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 file and returns to the MAIN
display.
DATA ENTRY
Highlighting the desired file
and double-clicking the
the [1▲] ~ [7▲] buttons to
2 Use
turn the pages.
3 Select the file/folder.
There are two ways to select the file/folder:
[ENTER] button calls up the
corresponding file and
returns to the MAIN display.
When the amount of available files or • Press the [A] - [J] button.
folders exceeds ten, the bottom of the Press the letter button corresponding to the
display changes as shown below. file/folder you wish to call up. (In the example
display shown above, the voice files are
shown.)
• Use the [DATA ENTRY] dial and the
Press Next Press Prev.(previous) [ENTER] button.
When you turn the [DATA ENTRY] dial, the
highlight moves among the available files/
folders. Highlight the desired file or folder
(voice files are shown in the example above)
and press the [ENTER] button to call up the
selected item.
END
Press the [EXIT] button
to go back to the MAIN Exiting from small pop-up
display. windows
You can go back to the You can also exit from small
previous display by pop-up windows (such as in the
pressing the [EXIT] illustration below) by pressing
button. the [EXIT] button.
40 PSR-2000/1000
File/Folder-related Operations
Naming Files/Folders
You can assign names to files and folders. Any file/folder in the USER and FLOPPY DISK sections can be named or
renamed. Execute the following steps when there is data in the User drive. If there are Preset files/folders you wish to
rename, copy them beforehand (page 43) and use them as User files/folders.
1 Press the [1▼] (NAME) button (page 38).

The NAME display appears.
A file/folder name can con-
tain up to 50 half size letters
(or 25 Hiragana and kanji let-
ters), including the Icon ID
(see the note below) and the
extension.
The file name will appear on

2 Select the appropriate file/folder and press the [7▼](OK) button.
The currently selected file/folder is highlighted. To select another file/folder, press one of the [A] -
your computer as follows. If
you change the Icon ID or
[J] buttons. the extension, the icon may
To cancel, press the [8▼] (CANCEL) button. change or the file may not be
properly recognized.
ABCDE.S002.MID
A F File ID Icon ID
B G Extension
C H
D I
E J
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Input the new name (page 45).

END
Press the [8▲] (OK) button.

To cancel, press the [8▼] (CANCEL) button.
PSR-2000/1000 41
Moving Files/Folders
You can move files and folders as desired, for organizing your data. Any file/folder in the USER and FLOPPY DISK
sections can be moved, using the cut-and-paste operation described below.
1 Press the [2▼] (CUT) button (page 38).

The CUT display appears.
This operation cannot be
used to directly move a file/
folder from one floppy disk to
another. If you want to do
this, cut and paste the file or
folder from the first floppy
disk to the USER page, then
change disks and paste it to
the FLOPPY DISK page.
2 Select the desired file/folder for moving.

Select the appropriate file/folder and press the [7▼](OK) button.
The currently selected file/folder is highlighted. To select another file/folder, press one of the [A] -
All files/folders in a floppy
[J] buttons.
disk can be copied to
Several files/folders can be selected together, even those from other pages. To release or cancel
another disk in one batch
the selection, press the button of the selected file/folder again.
(page 150).
Press the [6▼] (ALL) button to select all the files/folders in the displayed page (USER/FLOPPY
DISK). When the [6▼] (ALL) button is pressed the [6▼] button changes to “ALL OFF” button to
release or cancel the selection.
After being pasted, the files

are automatically re-ordered
in alphabetical order and
displayed.
3 Press the [7▼] (OK) button.

To stop the operation, press the [8▼] (CANCEL) button.
About files/folders in a
floppy disk
In the FLOPPY DISK page
of the Open/Save display,
only the files which can be
4 Call up the destination display.

Only the USER and FLOPPY DISK pages can be selected as the destination.
handled in that Open/Save
display will appear — even
though a folder in a floppy
disk can contain different
kinds of files.
In the case of a folder cut-
and-paste operation (for
floppy disk), an entire folder
Press the [4▼] (PASTE) button. can be cut; however, only the
END The file/folder you cut is now pasted at the destination.

specific files which can be
handled in the current Open/
Save display will be pasted.
42 PSR-2000/1000
Copying Files/Folders
You can also copy files and folders as desired, for organizing your data. Any file/folder in the PRESET, USER and
FLOPPY DISK sections can be copied, using the copy-and-paste operation described below.
1 Press the [3▼] (COPY) button (page 38).

The COPY display appears. Please note that the copy
functions are intended for
your personal use only.
This operation cannot be

2 Select the desired file/folder.
Select the appropriate file/folder and press the [7▼](OK) button.
used to directly copy a file/
folder from one floppy disk to
The currently selected file/folder is highlighted. To select another file/folder, press one of the [A] - [J] another. If you want to do
buttons. this, copy and paste the file
Several files/folders can be selected together, even those from other pages. To release or cancel the or folder from the first floppy
selection, press the button of the selected file/folder again. disk to the User page, then
Press the [6▼] (ALL) button to select all the files/folders in the displayed page (PRESET/USER/ change disks and paste it to
FLOPPY DISK). When the [6▼] (ALL) button is pressed, the [6▼] (ALL) button changes to “ALL the Floppy Disk page.
OFF,” letting you release or cancel the selection.
the [7▼] (OK)

3 Press
button. 4 Call up the destination
display.
END
Press the [4▼]
(PASTE) button.
To stop the operation, Only the USER and FLOPPY The file/folder you copied
press the [8▼] (CANCEL) DISK pages can be selected is now pasted at the
button. as the destination. destination.
Deleting Files/Folders
You can also delete files and folders as desired, for organizing your data. Any file/folder in the USER and FLOPPY DISK
sections can be deleted, using the operation described below.
1 Press the [5▼] (DELETE) button (page 38).

The DELETE display appears.
Press the [7▼] (OK) button.

2 Select the desired file/folder.
Select the appropriate file/folder and press the [7▼](OK) END To cancel the operation, press the [8▼] (CANCEL)
button.
button.
The currently selected file/folder is highlighted. To select
another file/folder, press one of the [A] - [J] buttons. The message “Are you sure you want to delete the
Several files/folders can be selected together, even “******” file (or data/folder)? YES/NO” appears.
those from other pages. To release or cancel the YES ..........Deletes the highlighted item.
selection, press the button of the selected file/folder NO............Exits from the prompt without deleting.
again.
Press the [6▼] (ALL) button to select all the files/folders When several files have been selected, the message
in the displayed page (USER/FLOPPY DISK). When the “Are you sure you want to delete the “******” file (or
[6▼] (ALL) button is pressed, the [6▼] (ALL) button data/folder)? YES/YES ALL/NO/CANCEL” appears.
changes to “ALL OFF,” letting you release or cancel the YES/NO...... Deletes the highlighted item (YES), or
selection. skips the highlighted item without deleting
(NO).
YES ALL .... Deletes all selected items at once.
CANCEL .... Exits from the prompt without deleting.
PSR-2000/1000 43
Saving Files
This operation lets you save the data (such as song and voice) you created in current
memory (page 39) to files. The files can be saved only to the USER and FLOPPY DISK The internal memory capac-
drives. ity of the PSR-2000/1000 is
If the Open/Save display for the type of data you wish to save is not shown, first return to about 580KB (PSR-2000) /
260KB (PSR-1000). Memory
the MAIN display by pressing the [DIRECT ACCESS] button followed by the [EXIT] button. capacity for 2DD and 2HD
Then, press the appropriate button [A]–[J] from the MAIN display to call up the respective floppy disks is about 720KB
Open/Save display. Finally, call up the USER or FLOPPY DISK page (pages 38, 39). and 1440KB, respectively.
When you store data to these
locations, all file types of the
the [6▼] PSR-2000/1000 (Voice,
1 Press
(SAVE) button.
Enter a name for the new file (page 45).
Style, Song, Registration,
etc.) are stored together.
The files of commercially

Press the [8▲] (OK) button. available DOC software and
To stop the operation, press the [8▼] (CANCEL) button. Yamaha Disklavier software,
and their edited files on the
PSR-2000/1000, can be
stored in the USER page,
but cannot be copied to
another floppy disk.
Organizing Files by Creating a New Folder
This operation lets you easily organize your various files into categories by creating a new Folder directories can con-
folder for each category. Folders can only be created in the USER and FLOPPY DISK tain up to four levels.
sections. The maximum total number
of files and folders which can
be stored is 800 (PSR-2000)
Enter the name of the new folder (page 45). / 400 (PSR-1000), but this
1 Call up the page to
which you wish to
may differ depending on the
length of the file names.
The maximum number of
create a new folder files which can be stored in a
and press the [7▼] folder will be 250.
(NEW) button Press the [8▲](OK) button.
(page 38). To cancel the operation, press the [8▼] (CANCEL) button.
Displaying Upper Level pages

Press the [8▼] (UP) button to call up the upper level pages. For example, you can call up the folder level pages from
the file level pages.
Entering Characters and Changing Icons
the [1▼]
1 Press
(NAME), [6▼]
Change the type of character by using the [1▲] button.
If you select Japanese as the Language in the
FUNCTION display (page 151), the following
(SAVE), or [7▼] different types of characters and sizes can be
(NEW) button entered:
(page 38). (kana-kan)
Hiragana and kanji, marks (full size) Call up the ICON SELECT display by pressing
(kana) the [1▼] button. This lets you change the icon
Katakana (normal size), marks (full size) at the left of the file name.
(kana)
Katakana (half size), marks (half size)
A B C — Alphabet (capital and small letters, full size), numbers (full size), marks (full size)
ABC — Alphabet (capital and small letters, half size), numbers (half size), marks (half size)
If you’ve selected a language other than Japanese in the FUNCTION display (page 151), the
following types of characters are available:
CASE — Alphabet (capital letters, half size), numbers (half size), marks (half size)
case — Alphabet (lowercase letters, half size), numbers (half size), marks (half size)
44 PSR-2000/1000
Entering Characters
The instructions that follow show you how to enter characters in naming your files and folders. The method is much the
same as inputting names and numbers to your cell phone.
1 Move the cursor to the desired position by using the [DATA ENTRY] dial.
Press the appropriate button, [2▲] - [7▲] and [2▼]- [6▼], corresponding to the character you wish to enter.
2 Several different characters are assigned to each button, and the characters change each time you press the button.
To actually enter the selected character, move the cursor or press another letter-input button.
If you’ve entered a character by mistake, move the cursor to the character letter you wish to erase and press the
[7▼] (DELETE) button. If you want to delete all of the characters on the line at once, press and hold down the
[7▼] (DELETE) button for a while. When the cursor appears in reverse display (highlight), only the reversed area is
deleted.
To actually enter the new name, press the [8▲] (OK) button.
3 To cancel the operation, press the [8▼] (CANCEL) button.
The following half-size
marks cannot be used in
■ Converting into Kanji (Japanese language) naming files and folders:
¥\/:*?“<> |
This applies only if you are using the “ (kana-kan)” button (in Japanese). When
the input “hiragana” characters are shown in reverse display (highlighted), press the
[ENTER] button one or several times to convert the characters into the appropriate
kanji. The reversed area can be changed by the [DATA ENTRY] dial. The converted
area can be changed back to “hiragana” by the [7▼] (DELETE) button. The reversed
area can be cleared at once by the [8▼] (CANCEL) button. To actually enter the
change, press the [8▲] (OK) button or enter the next character. To enter the
“hiragana” itself (without converting it), press the [8▲] (OK) button.
■ Entering special character marks (umlaut, accent, Japanese “ ” and “ ”)

Select a character to which a character mark is to be added and press the [6▼] button
(before actual entry of the character.)
■ Entering miscellaneous characters (marks)

You can call up the mark list by pressing the [6▼] button, after actually entering a
character by moving the cursor. In the case of characters
which are not accompanied
by special character marks
(with the exception of kana-
kan and half-size katakana),
you can call up the mark list
Move the cursor to the desired mark by using the [DATA ENTRY] dial, then press the by pressing the [6▼] button
[8▲] (OK) or [ENTER] button. after selecting a character
(before actual entry of a
character).
■ Entering numbers
First, select one of the following: “A B C” (full-size alphabet), “ABC” “CASE” (half-size
capital alphabet) and “case” (half-size lowercase alphabet). Then, press and hold
down the appropriate button, [2▲] - [7▲] and [2▼] - [5▼], for a while, or press it
repeatedly until the desired number is selected.
PSR-2000/1000 45
Changing the Icon

You can also change the icon that BACK NEXT
appears at the left of the file name.

Call up the ICON SELECT display by
pressing the [1▼] (ICON) button from Turns pages
the character input display (page 45). A F
for icon
selection.
Select the desired icon by using the B G
[A] - [J] buttons, or by using the C H
[3▲▼] - [5▲▼] buttons, then enter D I

the selected icon by pressing the [8▲]
E J
(OK) button.
Enters the
selected icon.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Cancels the icon selection operation.
Using the [DATA ENTRY] Dial

This convenient control lets you easily select items in the display or quickly change parameter values. The actual
function of the [DATA ENTRY] dial differs depending on the selected display.
■ Adjusting values
You can change parameter values by
rotating the [DATA ENTRY] dial. In the
example [BALANCE] display, turning
the dial adjusts the volume of the part
in reverse display (highlight). To adjust
the volume of another part, first select
the part by pressing the [▲▼] button
corresponding to the part, then rotate
the [DATA ENTRY] dial.
DATA ENTRY
■ Selecting items
You can select the desired item or
function in the display by rotating the
[DATA ENTRY] dial. The selected item
can then be called up or executed by
using the [ENTER] button.
In the example VOICE display, you ENTER
can select the desired voice file with

the [DATA ENTRY] dial, and call up
the selected item by pressing the
[ENTER] button on the panel.
DATA ENTRY
46 PSR-2000/1000
Direct Access — Instant Selection of Displays

DIRECT
ACCESS
SONG EXTRA TRACK TRACK METRO- LEFT

TRACKS 2 1 REPEAT NOME HOLD TOUCH SUSTAIN ECHO MONO VARIATION
BACK NEXT
(STYLE) (L) (R)
DIGITAL
VOICE ORGAN &
STUDIO PIANO & HARPSI. E.PIANO ACCORDION PERCUSSION
SOUND CREATOR MAIN
NEW SONG SYNC. START A F GUITAR BASS BRASS WOODWIND

DIGITAL RECORDING LAYER
STYLE
SWING & MARCH & B G
MIXING CONSOLE LEFT STRINGS CHOIR & PAD SYNTH. XG
C H

PART D I
USER ORGAN FLUTES
MENU UPPER OCTAVE
DEMO E J
MUSIC
TAP TEMPO FINDER
TRANSPOSE TEMPO RESET
HELP
RESET RESET OVER
MASTER VOLUME SIGNAL
STOP FUNCTION
BALANCE ONE TOUCH SETTING

MULTI PAD DIRECT ENTER
FADE ACCESS EXIT
IN/OUT
MIN MAX CHANNEL ON/OFF 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
STYLE CONTROL
MAIN ENDING SYNC. SYNC. PART REGISTRATION MEMORY
ACMP BREAK INTRO / rit. STOP START START/STOP FREEZE MEMORY
AUTO OTS DATA ENTRY
ON
With the convenient Direct Access function, you can instantly call up the desired display — with just a single additional
button press. Press the [DIRECT ACCESS] button and a message appears in the display prompting you to press the
appropriate button. Then, simply press the button corresponding to the desired setting display to instantly call up that
display. In the example below, Direct Access is used to call up the display for selecting the Chord Fingering (page 139).
DIRECT ACMP
ACCESS
Refer to the Direct Access Chart (page 48) for a list of the displays that can be called up
with the Direct Access function. Here’s a convenient way to
return to the MAIN display
from any other display:
Simply press the [DIRECT
ACCESS] button, then the
[EXIT] button.
PSR-2000/1000 47
Direct Access Chart

Operation: [DIRECT ACCESS] button + button listed below Corresponding LCD display and function See pages
SONG [TRACK1] TRACK1 CHANNEL selection 137
[TRACK2] TRACK2 CHANNEL selection 137
SONG SETTING
[EXTRA TRACKS] FUNCTION
137
[REPEAT]
[METRONOME] UTILITY METRONOME settings 148
[REC] —
[TOP] —
[START/STOP] —
[REW] —
[FF] —
STYLE [POP & ROCK]
[SWING & JAZZ]
[BALLROOM]
[MARCH & WALTZ]
STYLE SETTING/SPLIT POINT SPLIT POINT (ACMP) setting 138
[BALLAD] FUNCTION
[DANCE]
[LATIN]
[USER]
TRANSPOSE [E ] CONTROLLER TRANSPOSE assignment 141
E
[ ] MIXING CONSOLE TUNE TRANSPOSE settings 123
TEMPO [E ]
E MIDI MIDI CLOCK setting 145
[ ]
FUNCTION
[TAP TEMPO] TAP settings 149
UTILITY
[FADE IN/OUT] FADE IN/OUT settings 148
MULTI PAD [1]
[2]
MULTI PAD MULTI PAD EDIT 74
[3]
[4]
[STOP] DIGITAL RECORDING MULTI PAD CREATOR REPEAT/CHORD MATCH settings 119
STYLE CONTROL [ACMP] FUNCTION CHORD FINGERING FINGERING TYPE selection 138
[BREAK] VOICE settings
[INTRO] VOLUME/VOICE PANPOT settings 122
MAIN [A] VOLUME settings
MAIN [B] HARMONIC CONTENT settings
MIXING CONSOLE (STYLE PART) FILTER 123
MAIN [C] BRIGHTNESS settings
MAIN [D] REVERB settings
[ENDING/rit.] EFFECT CHORUS settings 124
[AUTO FILL IN] DSP settings
[OTS LINK]
FUNCTION STYLE SETTING/SPLIT POINT 138
[SYNC. STOP] SYNC. STOP WINDOW setting
[SYNC. START] —
[START/STOP] —
DIGITAL STUDIO [SOUND CREATOR] MASTER TUNING setting
FUNCTION MASTER TUNE/SCALE TUNE 135
[DIGITAL RECORDING] SCALE TUNING setting
[MIXING CONSOLE] PSR-2000 MIXING CONSOLE EQ settings 127
PSR-1000 —
MENU [DEMO] LANGUAGE selection 151
UTILITY
[HELP] FUNCTION LCD BRIGHTNESS settings 149
[FUNCTION] MIDI MIDI settings 145
[DIRECT ACCESS] Exit from the Direct Access mode
[BALANCE] VOLUME settings
MIXING CONSOLE (SONG PART) VOLUME/VOICE 122
[CHANNEL ON/OFF] VOICE settings
[NEXT] —
[BACK] —
VOICE PART [MAIN]
[LAYER] MIXING CONSOLE TUNE OCTAVE settings 123
[LEFT]
[MUSIC FINDER] MUSIC FINDER MUSIC FINDER SEARCH1 (Searching the records) 34
[EXIT] Return to the MAIN display
[ENTER] —
VOICE EFFECT [LEFT HOLD] STYLE SETTING/SPLIT POINT SPLIT POINT (LEFT) setting 138
FUNCTION
[TOUCH] CONTROLLER KEYBOARD TOUCH assignment 141
[SUSTAIN] MIXING CONSOLE EFFECT REVERB settings 124
[HARMONY/ECHO] FUNCTION HARMONY/ECHO 143
[MONO] TUNE PORTAMENTO TIME settings 123
[DSP] MIXING CONSOLE DSP settings
EFFECT 124
[VARIATION] EFFECT TYPE selection
VOICE [PIANO & HARPSI]
[E.PIANO]
[ORGAN & ACCORDION]
[PERCUSSION]
[GUITAR]
[BASS]
[BRASS] FUNCTION VOICE SET settings 143
[WOODWIND]
[STRINGS]
[CHOIR&PAD]
[SYNTH.]
[XG]
[USER]
[ORGAN FLUTES] (PSR-2000 only) MIXING CONSOLE EQ settings 127
UPPER OCTAVE [E ] —
E
[ ] —
MIC. (PSR-2000 only) [VH TYPE SELECT] VOCAL HARMONY VOCAL HARMONY EDIT (Editing the VOCAL HARMONY parameters) 129
[MIC. SETTING] MIC. EFFECT TYPE selection
[VOCAL HARMONY] MIXING CONSOLE EFFECT MIC. REVERB setting 124
[EFFECT] MIC. DSP setting
[TALK] MIC. SETTING TALK SETTING 132
ONE TOUCH SETTING [1] —
[2] —
[3] —
[4] —
REGISTRATION MEMORY [FREEZE] FUNCTION FREEZE 142
[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
REGISTRATION BANK REGISTRATION EDIT (Editing the RAGISTRATION) 85
[5]
[6]
[7]
[8]
[MEMORY] REGISTRATION SEQUENCE (Creating the REGISTRATION SEQUENCE) 142
PEDAL [PEDAL1] FUNCTION PEDAL1 function assignment
CONTROLLER 139
[PEDAL2] PEDAL2 function assignment
WHEEL [PITCH BEND] MIXING CONSOLE TUNE PITCH BEND RANGE settings 123
[MODULATION] (PSR-2000 only) FUNCTION CONTROLLER MODULATION WHEEL settings 141
48 PSR-2000/1000
Help Messages
The Help messages give you explanations and descriptions of all the main functions and features of the PSR-2000/1000.
HELP

BACK NEXT
(STYLE) (L) (R)
DIGITAL
VOICE ORGAN &
SOUND CREATOR MAIN

STYLE
SWING & MARCH & B G
C H

PART D I
USER ORGAN FLUTES
MENU UPPER OCTAVE
DEMO E J
MUSIC
TAP TEMPO FINDER
HELP
RESET RESET OVER
STOP FUNCTION

FADE ACCESS EXIT
IN/OUT
STYLE CONTROL
AUTO OTS DATA ENTRY
ON
1
MENU
DEMO
HELP
2 Help messages can be displayed in
any one of the following languages:
ENGLISH
JAPANESE
FUNCTION GERMAN
FRENCH
SPANISH
ITALIAN
The language can also be selected in

the FUNCTION “LANGUAGE”
(page 151) display.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 When “JAPANESE” is selected for the

Language parameter, and you
change this to one of the western lan-
guages, the kanji and kana charac-
ters of the file name stored in the disk
2-1 Select the desired 2-2 Call up the
drive are changed to western charac-
Help topic. topic.
ters. In the opposite case, special
Latin characters and marks are
Select the Language, if necessary. The
changed into normal characters.
language selected here are also used for
Also, in the case of floppy disk data,
various “Messages” shown during operations.
text in the files are changed to char-
acters that cannot be read by the
instrument.
Keep in mind that similar problems
may occur when trying to access files
originating or edited by a computer
3 BACK NEXT
having a different language operating
system. In general, be careful when
switching languages — you risk not
being able to access the data properly.
When two or more pages available,

use this to select different pages.
ENTER END
Press this to return
to the previous
display. EXIT
DATA ENTRY
Help messages also feature links to the detailed explanation or actual
setting display of the selected topic. Simply select the underlined word
(using the [DATA ENTRY] dial), and press the [ENTER] button to jump to
the detailed explanation or actual setting display of the selected topic.
PSR-2000/1000 49
Using the Metronome

The metronome provides a click sound, giving you an accurate tempo guide when you practice, or letting you hear and
check how a specific tempo sounds.
METRO-
NOME

BACK NEXT
(STYLE) (L) (R)
DIGITAL
VOICE ORGAN &
SOUND CREATOR MAIN

STYLE
SWING & MARCH & B G
C H

PART D I
USER ORGAN FLUTES
MENU UPPER OCTAVE
DEMO E J
MUSIC
TAP TEMPO FINDER
HELP
RESET RESET OVER
STOP FUNCTION

FADE ACCESS EXIT
IN/OUT
STYLE CONTROL
AUTO OTS DATA ENTRY
ON
The metronome starts by pressing the [METRONOME] button. Adjust the

tempo by using the TEMPO[ ] [ ] buttons (see below).
The sound, volume level,
To stop the metronome, press the [METRONOME] button again.
and the beat (time signature)
of the metronome can all be
changed (page 148).
Adjusting the Tempo

This section shows you to adjust the playback tempo — which not only affects the metronome, but also the playback of
a song or an accompaniment style.
TAP TEMPO
TEMPO
RESET

BACK NEXT
(STYLE) (L) (R)
DIGITAL
VOICE ORGAN &
SOUND CREATOR MAIN

STYLE
SWING & MARCH & B G
C H

PART D I
USER ORGAN FLUTES
MENU UPPER OCTAVE
DEMO E J
MUSIC
TAP TEMPO FINDER
HELP
RESET RESET OVER
STOP FUNCTION

FADE ACCESS EXIT
IN/OUT
STYLE CONTROL
AUTO OTS DATA ENTRY
ON
1 TEMPO
TAP TEMPO
2 Songs and accompaniment
styles have been given
default (initial) tempo
RESET
settings, designed to best
suit the song/style.
Adjust the tempo by using either the TEMPO [ ]
[ ] buttons or the [DATA ENTRY] dial.
Press either the TEMPO [ ] The number in the display indicates how many
button or the [ ] button. quarter-note beats there are in one minute. The
range is between 5 and 500. The higher the value,
the faster the tempo.
Press this to
EXIT When you change the tempo, both tempos of the
current song and style will be changed to the same
E ND close the
TEMPO display.
tempo. To restore their respective default (initial)
tempo settings, press both the TEMPO [ ] [ ]
buttons simultaneously. Also refer to the “Tempo
Indications — MAIN display” (page 51) for more
about tempo.
50 PSR-2000/1000
Tap Tempo
This useful feature lets you tap out the tempo for a song or an accompaniment style.
Simply tap the [TAP TEMPO] button at the desired speed, and the tempo of the song or Hitting the [TAP TEMPO]
the accompaniment style changes to match your tapping. button produces a tapping
sound. You can change this
sound, if desired (page 149).
1 Playback the song or the

accompaniment style 2 TEMPO
TAP TEMPO
n
You can also use Tap Tempo
(page 59, 76). RESET
to automatically start the
song or accompaniment
style at the desired tempo.
While both the song and
Tap the [TAP TEMPO] button twice accompaniment style are
to change the tempo. stopped, tap the [TAP
TEMPO] button several
times, and the selected
accompaniment style starts
automatically at the tempo
■ Tempo Indications — MAIN Display you tapped. While a song is
set to Sync. Start stand-by
There are three different tempo indications in the Main display, as shown below. (page 60, 76), tapping the
[TAP TEMPO] button starts
the song playback in the
Indicates the default (initial) tempo
same manner. For songs
setting for the currently selected
and styles in 2/4 and 4/4
song (unless the tempo has been
time, tap four times; for 3/4
changed manually).
time, tap three times; for 5/4
Indicates the current tempo for the time, tap five times.
selected song, accompaniment
style or the metronome which is
now playing back. When nothing is
playing back (stopped), this
indicates the tempo for the selected
style. When the song and style are
played back simultaneously, the
tempo of the style is automatically
changed to match the tempo of the
song, and is displayed here. This
tempo is used for recording when
recording a song or
accompaniment style.
Indicates the default (initial) tempo

setting for the currently selected
accompaniment style (unless the
tempo has been changed
manually).
PSR-2000/1000 51
Playing the Demos
The PSR-2000/1000 is an extraordinarily versatile and sophisticated instrument, featuring a wide variety of dynamic
Reference
voices and rhythms, plus a wealth of advanced functions. Three different types of Demo songs have been specially
prepared showcasing the stunning sound and features of the PSR-2000/1000.
MENU
SONG
DEMO VOICE EFFECT
EXTRA TRACK TRACK METRO- LEFT HARMONY/ DSP
BACK NEXT
(STYLE) (L) (R)
DIGITAL
VOICE ORGAN &
SOUND CREATOR MAIN
STYLE
NEW SONG
HELP
SYNC. START
DIGITAL RECORDING
A F
LAYER
SWING & MARCH & B G

C H

PART D I
USER ORGAN FLUTES
MENU UPPER OCTAVE
DEMO E J
MUSIC
TAP TEMPO FINDER
FUNCTION TRANSPOSE TEMPO
HELP
RESET

RESET RESET OVER
STOP FUNCTION

FADE ACCESS EXIT
IN/OUT
STYLE CONTROL
AUTO OTS DATA ENTRY
ON
1
MENU
Pressing the [DEMO] button DEMO
automatically plays back the Demo songs

at random. HELP
FUNCTION
2 2-1 Use the [BACK][NEXT] buttons to select the desired Demo category.
Function Demos ....... These demonstrate each of the different functions on the PSR-2000/1000.
Voice Demos ............. These showcase the voices of the PSR-2000/1000.
Style Demos .............. These introduce you to the rhythms and accompaniment styles of the PSR-2000/1000.
BACK NEXT
A F
B G
C H
D I
E J
2-3 Press one of these buttons

twice — once to select the
desired demo, and once
again to start it.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
2-2 Use these to select Press this to play back all Demo songs/items continuously, starting
different display pages. from the first item at the top left of the display. This is available only
from the FUNCTION page.
All of the available demos are played back in sequence, starting from the one
at top left. The VOICE and STYLE pages do not have the [AUTO] button;
however, all demo songs are played back in sequence.
Pressing this button cancels the interactive features of the Function Demos
(otherwise available in step 3 below).
52 PSR-2000/1000
Playing the Demos
3 For the Function demos, an introduction screen appears in the display and
the Demo starts playing.
Use the [BACK][NEXT]
buttons in the introduction
screen to call up the previ-
ous or next page.
BACK NEXT
This example shows the Sound System
in the FUNCTION demo. n
Press the SONG [START/
STOP] button to stop the
MAIN
Demo song. To start the
F Demo again from the point
LAYER at which it was stopped,
G
press the SONG [START/
H LEFT STOP] button again.
Rewind and fast-forward
I
can also be used with the
J
Demo songs (page 78).
Select the desired word or item by using the ENTER
[DATAENTRY] dial, then press the [ENTER]

button or number buttons ([1▼], [2▼], etc.)
to call it up.
EXIT
END
Return to the MAIN screen.
PSR-2000/1000 53
Voices
The PSR-2000/1000 gives you an enormous selection of authentic voices, including various keyboard instruments,
strings and brass — and many, many more.
VOICE ORGAN &


BACK NEXT
STRINGS CHOIR & PAD

(STYLE) (L) (R) SYNTH. DIGITAL
XG VOICE ORGAN &
SOUND CREATOR MAIN

STYLE
SWING & MARCH & B G
C H
USER ORGAN FLUTES PART
MENU
D I
USER ORGAN FLUTES
UPPER OCTAVE
DEMO E J
MUSIC
TAP TEMPO FINDER
HELP
RESET RESET OVER
STOP FUNCTION

FADE ACCESS EXIT
IN/OUT
STYLE CONTROL
AUTO OTS DATA ENTRY
ON
Selecting a Voice
1 Press the [MAIN] button to turn the MAIN part on, then press [F] button to call
up the menu for selecting the MAIN voice.
The voice you’re selecting
here belongs to the MAIN
part, and is called the MAIN
voice. (See page 56 for more
MAIN
Turn MAIN on. information.)
F
LAYER
G You’ll want to hear the
MAIN voice all by itself —
H LEFT
so make sure that the
I
LAYER and LEFT parts
are turned off.
J
2 Select the desired voice group.

When you select a voice
group, the last selected
VOICE ORGAN &
PIANO & HARPSI. E.PIANO ACCORDION PERCUSSION voice will automatically be
selected.
USER ORGAN FLUTES
54 PSR-2000/1000
Voices
3 Indicates that the display is for

selecting the MAIN voice (page 25).
BACK NEXT
Selecting a voice automati-
cally selects the best-suited
effect and other settings for
that particular voice. You can
3-1 Select the disable this so that settings
memory are not automatically
location of selected (page 143).
A F
the voice
B G (PRESET/ n
USER/ You can set how much the
C H
FLOPPY volume of the voice changes
D I
DISK). according to your playing
strength (page 141).
E J
n
For a list of the available
voices, refer to the separate
3-3 Select the voice. Data List.
n
You can set whether the
3-2 Select the voice bank and program
various pages Press this to start the change numbers (“MSB-
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
in the current demo of the selected LSB-Program Change num-
voice group. voice. To stop the demo ber” at the right above the
at any time, press this voice name) are displayed or
button again. not (page 149).
Press this to call up the display for selecting the voice group.
n
XG is a major enhancement
of the GM System level 1 for-
mat, and was developed by
Yamaha specially to provide
4 Play the keyboard to hear the
selected END
Press this to return
to the MAIN EXIT
more voices and variations,
as well as greater expressive
display. control over voices and
voice.
effects, and to ensure com-
patibility of data well into the
future.
Voice Characteristics
The voice type and its defining characteristics are indicated above the voice name.
Live! (PSR-2000 only)
These acoustic instrument sounds were sampled in stereo, to produce a truly authentic, rich sound — full of
atmosphere and ambience.
Cool!
These voices capture the dynamic textures and subtle nuances of electric instruments — thanks to a huge amount
of memory and some very sophisticated programming.
Sweet!
These acoustic instrument sounds also benefit from Yamaha’s sophisticated technology — and feature a sound so
finely detailed and natural, you’ll swear you’re playing the real thing!
Drum
Various drum and percussion sounds are assigned to individual keys, letting you play the sounds from the
keyboard.
SFX
Various special effect sounds are assigned to individual keys, letting you play the sounds from the keyboard.
Organ Flutes! (PSR-2000 only)
This authentic organ voice lets you use the Sound Creator to adjust the various footages and craft your own
original organ sounds.
Keyboard Percussion
When one of the drum of SFX kits is selected in the PERCUSSION voice group, various drum, percussion, and special
effect sounds are assigned to individual keys, letting you play the sounds from the keyboard. The various drums and
percussion instruments of the Standard Kit are indicated by symbols below the assigned keys. Keep in mind that even
though different kits feature different sounds, some same-named sounds in different kits are identical.
Refer to the separate Data List (Drum/key Assignment List) for a listing of the sounds in each drum/SFX kit.
PSR-2000/1000 55
Voices
Layer/Left — Playing Several Sounds Simultaneously

The PSR-2000/1000 lets you set three voices for simultaneous play: MAIN, LAYER, and LEFT. By effectively combining
these three, you can create richly textured, multi-instrument setups for your performance.
MAIN
LAYER
BACK NEXT
(STYLE) (L) (R)
DIGITAL
VOICE ORGAN &
SOUND CREATOR MAIN
LEFT
STYLE
SWING & MARCH & B G
C H

PART D I
USER ORGAN FLUTES
MENU UPPER OCTAVE
DEMO E J
MUSIC
TAP TEMPO FINDER
HELP
RESET RESET OVER
STOP FUNCTION

FADE ACCESS EXIT
IN/OUT
STYLE CONTROL
AUTO OTS DATA ENTRY
ON
Playing a layer of two voices
LAYER part
MAIN part
Playing two voices separately — on the left Split point

and right sections of the keyboard
LEFT part
MAIN part
Left range Right range
Playing three different voices — one on the Split point

LAYER part
left section of the keyboard, plus a layer of
two on the right
LEFT part
MAIN part
Left range Right range
Layer — Layering Two Different Voices
1 Press this to
turn the LAYER
function on. To
2 Select Layer with the [G] button. Press the same
button to call up the VOICE display, from which you
There is an alternate way for
quickly selecting both the
MAIN and LAYER voices
turn it off, press can select the specific voice you want to play in a from the panel: While hold-
the button again. layer with the Main voice. The method of selecting a ing down one panel voice
voice here is the same as that in VOICE (MAIN) button, press a second
MAIN
voice button. The first
display (page 54). selected voice becomes the
LAYER MAIN voice, and the second
becomes the LAYER.
LEFT
F
Press this to
E
I
J
ND return to the
MAIN
display.
EXIT
56 PSR-2000/1000
Voices
Left — Setting Separate Voices for the Left and Right Sections of the Keyboard
1 Set the LEFT to

ON. Press this
button again to
2 Select LEFT with the [H] button. Press the same
button to call up the VOICE display, from which
The split point can be freely
set to any key on the key-
you can select the specific voice you want to play board. (page 138).
set it to OFF.
in a left. How to select the voice is the same as the n
MAIN way of VOICE (MAIN) screen (page 54). Each part (MAIN, LAYER,
and LEFT) can have its own
volume setting (page 61).
LAYER
n
LEFT You can also use the LAYER
F
and LEFT functions
G together, to create a combi-
nation layer/split. To do this,
H
set separate voices for the
I left and right sections of the
keyboard (as indicated), and
J
EXIT
set up a layer of two different
END voices on the right.
Press this to
return to the
MAIN display.
Applying Voice Effects

This section of the panel lets you add a variety of effects to the voices you play on the keyboard.
LEFT

BACK NEXT
(STYLE) (L) (R)
DIGITAL
VOICE ORGAN &
SOUND CREATOR MAIN

STYLE
SWING & MARCH & B G
C H

PART D I
USER ORGAN FLUTES
MENU UPPER OCTAVE
DEMO E J
MUSIC
TAP TEMPO FINDER
HELP
RESET RESET OVER
STOP FUNCTION

FADE ACCESS EXIT
IN/OUT
STYLE CONTROL
AUTO OTS DATA ENTRY
ON
Press one of the effect buttons to turn the corresponding effects on. Press it again to turn the effect off.
For explanations on each of the effects, see below.
■ TOUCH
This button turns the touch response of the keyboard on or off. When this is set to off, the same volume is produced no
matter how strongly or softly you play the keyboard.
■ SUSTAIN
When this Sustain feature is on, all notes played on the keyboard (MAIN/LAYER parts only) have a longer sustain. You
can also set the Sustain depth (page 90).
■ DSP
The PSR-2000/1000 features a variety of dynamic built-in digital effects, letting you The DSP and VARIATION
process the sound in various ways. You can use DSP to enhance the voices in subtle ways effect types and the their
— such as by applying chorus to add animation and depth, or using a symphonic effect to depth can be selected and
adjusted in the MIXING CON-
give the sound warmth and richness. DSP also has effects such as distortion that can SOLE display (page 124).
completely change the character of the sound. DSP is set for the currently selected part
(MAIN/LAYER/LEFT).
PSR-2000/1000 57
Voices
■ VARIATION
This control changes the Variation effect settings, letting you alter some aspect of the effect, depending on the selected
type. For example, when the Rotary Speaker effect is selected (page 124), this lets you switch the rotor speed between
slow and fast.
■ HARMONY/ECHO
This control adds Harmony or Echo effects to the voices played on the right hand section The Portamento effect creates
a smooth pitch glide between
of the keyboard (page 143).
successively played notes.
■ MONO
This control determines whether the voice is played monophonically (only one note at a You can add special empha-
time) or polyphonically for each part (MAIN/LAYER/LEFT). This is set to MONO when the sis to melody lines you play
lamp is lit, and set to polyphonic when the lamp is off. When set to MONO, only the last over chords by using the
Layer function with a mono-
note played will sound. This lets you play wind instrument voices more realistically. phonic voice. Set the Main
Depending on the selected voice, the MONO setting also lets you effectively use the voice to play polyphonically
Portamento effect, when playing in legato. and set the Layer voice to
play monophonically
(MONO). In this case, the
■ LEFT HOLD melody you play — including
This function causes the left part voice to be held even when the keys are released — the the top notes of any chords
— sounds monophonically.
same effect as when the sustain pedal is pressed. This function is especially effective when Try this using the following
used with the auto accompaniment. For example, if you play and release a chord in the voices.
auto accompaniment section of the keyboard (with the left part on and the Left voice set MAIN voice: Brass Section
(polyphonic) + LAYER voice:
to Strings), the strings part sustains, adding a natural richness to the overall Sweet Trump (monophonic)
accompaniment sound.
PITCH BEND Wheel & MODULATION Wheel

Use the PSR-2000/1000 PITCH BEND PITCH BEND
wheel to bend notes up (roll the wheel away The maximum pitch bend
from you) or down (roll the wheel toward range can be changed
(page 123).
you) while playing the keyboard. The PITCH
BEND wheel is self-centering and will
automatically return to normal pitch when
released.
The Modulation function applies a vibrato MODULATION
effect to notes played on the keyboard (PSR- In order to avoid accidentally

2000). Moving the MODULATION wheel applying modulation set the
depth to its minimum setting.
all the way towards yourself minimizes the
depth of the effect, while rotating it away
from yourself increases it.
Adjusting the Octave setting

The [UPPER OCTAVE] button allows the MAIN and LAYER parts to be simultaneously
transposed up or down by one octave. More detailed octave-related
settings for each part can be
UPPER OCTAVE made by using the Mixing
Console function
RESET (page 123).
58 PSR-2000/1000
Styles
The PSR-2000/1000 features styles (accompaniment patterns) in a variety of different musical genres including pops,
jazz, Latin and dance. To use it, all you have to do is play the chords with your left hand as you perform and the
selected Accompaniment Style (style) matching your music will automatically play along, instantly following the chords
you play. Try selecting some of the different styles (refer to separate Data List (Style List) ) and play them.
STYLE CONTROL
AUTO OTS
FILL IN LINK

BACK NEXT
(STYLE) (L) (R)
DIGITAL
VOICE ORGAN &
SOUND CREATOR MAIN

STYLE
SWING & MARCH & B G
C H

PART D I
USER ORGAN FLUTES
MENU UPPER OCTAVE
DEMO E J
MUSIC
TAP TEMPO FINDER
HELP
RESET RESET OVER
STOP FUNCTION

FADE ACCESS EXIT
IN/OUT
STYLE CONTROL
AUTO OTS DATA ENTRY
ON
Playing a style
1
BACK NEXT
(STYLE) (L) (R) STYLE

STUDIO
SOUND CREATOR
SWING & VOICE
ORGAN &
ACCORDION PERCUSSION MARCH &
A
POP & ROCK F
MAIN
JAZZ BALLROOM WALTZ
NEW SONG SYNC. START GUITAR BASS BRASS WOODWIND
STYLE
SWING & MARCH & B G
C H

PART D I
USER ORGAN FLUTES
MENU UPPER OCTAVE
TRANSPOSE TEMPO
TAP TEMPO
DEMO E
BALLAD J
MUSICDANCE
FINDER LATIN RESET
USER
HELP
RESET RESET OVER
STOP FUNCTION

FADE ACCESS EXIT
IN/OUT
STYLE CONTROL
AUTO OTS DATA ENTRY
ON
2 BACK NEXT
For a list of the available
accompaniment styles,
refer to the separate
Data List.
2-1 Select a location
(Preset, User,
A F
Floppy Disk) for
B G saving the style.
C H
D I
E J 2-2 Select a Style.
When you've opened a lower directory's

display, this button (UP) lets you call up
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
the next higher directory, from which you
can select Style groups.
PSR-2000/1000 59
Styles
3 When the [ACMP] button is set to on, you can play/indicate chords from the auto
accompaniment section of the keyboard. (Depending on the settings, this may be
the range of the Left voice, or the entire keyboard.)
You can set the key range
for auto accompaniment
(page 138).
STYLE CONTROL
AUTO OTS
FILL IN LINK
4 Turn SYNC. (SYNCHRONIZED) START on.

Sync. Start
STYLE CONTROL Enabling this lets you start
AUTO OTS the style simply by playing
FILL IN LINK
the keyboard.
• You can begin the rhythm

channels (tracks) of the
Style by pressing the
5 As soon as you play a chord with the auto accompaniment section, the style starts.
For details about chord fingerings, refer to page 62.
[START/STOP] button.
• The rhythm channels of
Split point the style can also be
The Tempo can be adjusted
started by tapping the
using the TEMPO [ ][ ] or
[TAP TEMPO] button.
[TAP TEMPO] button.
With the style stopped,
If you tap the [TAP TEMPO]
tap the [TAP TEMPO]
button, the tempo will adjust to
button three, four or five
the same speed that you tapped.
times (three for 3/4 time,
Auto Accompaniment section four for 2/4 or 4/4 time,
five for 5/4 time).
When you simultaneously

6 Stop the style.
END Turn ACMP off.
play back accompaniment
styles with a song, the
SYNC. SYNC.
accompaniment parts
STYLE CONTROL recorded to the song (chan-
ACMP BREAK INTRO nels 9 - 16) are temporarily
replaced by the selected
accompaniment style — let-
ting you try out and use dif-
ferent accompaniment with
the song (page 77).
Accompaniment Style Characteristics

The defining characteristics of some of the accompaniment styles are indicated above the relevant style names in the Open/Save display.
Session!
These styles provide even greater realism and authentic backing by mixing in original chord types and changes, as well as special riffs with
chord changes, with the Main sections. These have been programmed to add “spice” and a professional touch to your performances of
certain songs and in certain genres. As a result, the styles may not necessarily be appropriate — or even harmonically correct — for all
songs and for all chord playing. In some cases for example, playing a simple major triad may result in a seventh chord, or playing an on-bass
chord may result in incorrect or unexpected accompaniment.
Piano Combo! (Floppy Disk)

These accompaniment styles feature a basic piano trio (piano, bass, and drums), augmented in some cases with other instruments. Since
this is a small combo sound, the accompaniment backing is appropriately sparse, making it useful and effective for a wide variety of songs.
60 PSR-2000/1000
Styles
Playing a Style’s Rhythm Channels only
1 Select a style (page 59). The Rhythm channels are

part of the styles. Each style
has different rhythm pat-
terns.
You can also start the

2 Rhythm starts. rhythm simply by playing a
key on the keyboard, if Sync
STYLE CONTROL Start is enabled (turn on the
MAIN
ACMP BREAK INTRO
ENDING
/ rit.
SYNC.
STOP
SYNC.
START START/STOP
[SYNC.START] button).
AUTO OTS
FILL IN LINK
Set to off.
3 Play along with the rhythm playback.

The Tempo can be adjusted using the TEMPO [ ][ ] or [TAP TEMPO] buttons.
If you tap the [TAP TEMPO] button, the tempo will adjust to the same speed that
you tapped.
Press the STYLE [START/STOP] button

END again to stop the rhythm playback.
Adjusting the Volume Balance/Channel Muting

BALANCE display
MULTI PAD part
MIC part
Call up the
BALANCE STYLE part (Auto
Accompaniment section) Parts played from the
display.
keyboard (MAIN/LAYER/
SONG part LEFT)
BALANCE
Adjust the output level of the Part.
CHANNEL ON/OFF
CHANNEL ON/OFF display Channel

PART
Refers to the MIDI channel
in the song data (page 157).
Call up the The channels are assigned
Channel ON/ as shown below.
OFF display. Song
Call up the STYLE display by pressing the [CHANNEL ON/OFF] 1 - 16
button, then turn the instrument you want to cancel off. To listen to Accompaniment Style
9 - 16
only one instrument by itself, hold down the appropriate button for
the channel to set the channel to SOLO. To cancel SOLO, simply
press the appropriate channel button again.
PSR-2000/1000 61
Styles
Chord Fingerings
The style playback can be controlled by the chords you play in the keys to the left of the split point. There are 7 types of
fingerings as described below. Go to the CHORD FINGERING page (page 139), and select the Chord Fingerings. The
page shows how to play chords with your left hand.
SINGLE FINGER
Single Finger accompaniment makes it simple to produce beautifully orchestrated accompaniment using major,
seventh, minor and minor-seventh chords by pressing a minimum number of keys on the auto accompaniment section
of the keyboard. The abbreviated chord fingerings described below are used.
For a major chord, press the root key only. For a minor chord, simultaneously press the root key
and a black key to its left.
For a seventh chord, simultaneously press the root For a minor-seventh chord, simultaneously press the
key and a white key to its left. root key and both a white and black key to its left.
MULTI FINGER
The Multi Finger mode automatically detects Single Finger or Fingered chord fingerings, Chord detection in the AI
so you can use either type of fingering without having to switch fingering modes. If you Full Keyboard mode occurs
at approximately 8th-note
want to play minor, seventh, or minor-seventh chords using the SINGLE FINGER intervals. Extremely short
operation in the MULTI FINGER Mode, always press the closest white/black key(s) to the chords — less than an 8th
root of the chord. note in length — may not be
detected.
FINGERED
This mode lets you produce accompaniment by playing full chords on the auto
accompaniment section of the keyboard. The Fingered mode recognizes the various In Full Keyboard mode,
chord types listed on the next page. chords are detected based
on the lowest and second
FINGERED ON BASS lowest notes you play. If the
This mode accepts the same fingerings as the FINGERED mode, but the lowest note two lowest notes fall within a
single octave, those two
played in the auto accompaniment section of the keyboard is used as the bass note, notes determine the chord. If
allowing you to play “on bass” chords. For example, to indicate a C-on-E chord, play a C the lowest note and the sec-
major chord with E as the lowest note (E, G, C). ond lowest note are sepa-
rated by more than one
FULL KEYBOARD octave, the lowest note
becomes the bass and the
This method detects chords in the entire key range. Chords are detected in a way similar
chord is determined from the
to Fingered, even if you split the notes between your left and right hands — for example, second lowest note and the
playing a bass note with your left hand and a chord with your right, or by playing a chord other notes played in the
with your left hand and a melody note with your right. same octave.
AI FINGERED
This mode is basically the same as FINGERED, with the exception that less than three AI
notes can be played to indicate the chords (based on the previously played chord, etc.). Artificial Intelligence
AI FULL KEYBOARD
When this advanced auto accompaniment mode is engaged, the PSR-2000/1000 will automatically create appropriate
accompaniment while you play just about anything, anywhere on the keyboard using both hands. You don’t have to
worry about specifying the accompaniment chords. Although the AI Full Keyboard mode is designed to work with many
songs, some arrangements may not be suitable for use with this feature.
This mode is similarto FULL KEYBOARD, with the exception that less than three notes can be played to indicate the
chords (based on the previously played chord, etc.). 9th and 11th chords cannot be played.
62 PSR-2000/1000
Styles
Chord Types Recognized in the Fingered Mode (Example for “C” chords)
11
C C9 C6 C6 9 CM7 CM7 9 CM7 C5 CM7 5
)
)
)
)
(
(
(
(
Csus4 Caug CM7aug Cm Cm9 Cm6 Cm7 Cm7 9 Cm7 11
)
(
)
)
(
(
CmM7 CmM7 9 Cm7 5 CmM7 5 Cdim Cdim7 C7 C7 9 C7 13
)
)
(
(
(
11 9
C7 9 C7 C7 13 C7 C7 5 C7aug C7sus4 Csus2
)
)
)
(
(
(
Chord Name [Abbreviation] Normal Voicing Display for root “C”

• Notes in parentheses can
Major [M] 1-3-5 C be omitted.
Ninth [9] 1-2-3-5 C9 • For FINGERED, FIN-
GERED ON BASS, and AI
Sixth [6] 1 - (3) - 5 - 6 C6 FINGERED, if you play
Sixth ninth [69] 1 - 2 - 3 - (5) - 6 or 3 - 6 - 2* C69 any three adjacent keys
(including black keys), the
Major seventh [M7] 1 - 3 - (5) - 7 CM7 chord sound will be can-
Major seventh ninth [M79] 1 - 2 - 3 - (5)j - 7 CM79 celed and only the rhythm
11 instruments will continue
Major seventh add sharp eleventh [M7 ] 1 - (2) - 3 - 4 - 5 - 7 or 1 - 2 - 3 - 4 - (5) - 7 CM7 11
playing (Chord Cancel
Flatted fifth [ 5] 1 - 3 - 5 C 5 function). This let you play
Major seventh flatted fifth [M7 5] CM7 5
back only the rhythm.
1-3- 5-7
• Playing two same root
Suspended fourth [sus4] 1-4-5 Csus4 keys in the adjacent
octaves produces accom-
Augmented [aug] 1-3- 5 Caug
paniment based only on

Major seventh augmented [M7aug] 1 - (3) - 5 - 7 CM7aug the root.
Minor [m]
1- 3-5 Cm • A perfect fifth (1 + 5) pro-
duces accompaniment
Minor ninth [m9] 1 - 2 - 3 - 5 Cm9 based on the root and the
Minor sixth [m6] 1 - 3 - 5 - 6 Cm6 fifth.
• The auto accompaniment
Minor seventh [m7] 1 - 3 - (5) - 7 Cm7 Style will sometimes not
Minor seventh ninth [m79] 1 - 2 - 3 - (5) - 7 or 3 - 7 - 2 Cm79 change when related
chords are played in
Minor seventh eleventh [m711] 1 - (2) - 3 - 4 - 5 - ( 7) Cm711 sequence (e.g. some
Minor major seventh [mM7] 1 - 3 - (5) - 7 CmM7 minor chords followed by
the minor seventh).
Minor major seventh ninth [mM79] 1 - 2 - 3 - (5) - 7 CmM79 • You can also have the
Minor seventh flatted fifth [m7 5] 1 - 3 - 5 - 7 Cm7 5 PSR-2000/1000 “teach”
you how to play Fingered
Minor major seventh flatted fifth [mM7 5] 1 - 3 - 5 - 7 CmM7 5 chords. From the CHORD
Diminished [dim] 1 - 3 - 5 Cdim FINGERING display
(page 139), specify the
Diminished seventh [dim7] 1 - 3 - 5 - 6 Cdim7 chord you want to learn,
Seventh [7] 1 - 3 - (5) - 7 or 1 - (3) - 5 - 7 C7 and the notes you should
press are indicated in the
Seventh flatted ninth [7 9] 1 - 2 - 3 - (5) - 7 C7 9
display.
Seventh add flatted thirteenth [7 13] 1 - 3 - 5 - 6 - 7 C7 13
Seventh ninth [79] 1 - 2 - 3 - (5) - 7 or 3 - 7 - 2* C79
11
Seventh add sharp eleventh [7 ] 1 - (2) - 3 - 4 - 5 - 7 or 1 - 2 - 3 - 4 - (5) - 7 C7 11
Seventh add thirteenth [713] 1 - 3 - (5) - 6 - 7 or 3 - 6 - 7 C713
9
Seventh sharp ninth [7 ] 1 - 2 - 3 - (5) - 7 C7 9
Seventh flatted fifth [7 5] 1 - 3 - 5 - 7 C7 5

Seventh augmented [7aug] 1 - 3 - 5 - 7 C7aug
Seventh suspended fourth [7sus4] 1 - 4 - 5 - 7 C7sus4
Suspended second [sus2] 1-2-5 Csus2
* Only this voicing (inversion) is recognized. Other chords not marked with an asterisk can be played in any inversion.
PSR-2000/1000 63
Styles
Arranging the Style Pattern (SECTIONS: MAIN A/B/C/D, INTRO, ENDING, BREAK)
The PSR-2000/1000 features various types of Auto Accompaniment Sections that allow
you to vary the arrangement of the Style. They are: Intro, Main, Break and Ending. By You can also use this func-
switching among them as you play, you can easily produce the dynamic elements of a tion to play only rhythms
(page 61).
professional-sounding arrangement in your performance.
1 Select a style (page 59). • If you press the [INTRO]

button, you can play back
an Intro section while an
accompaniment is play-
ing.
• Section button indications
— [BREAK], [INTRO],
[MAIN], [ENDING] but-
2 2-1 Turn the ACMP function on.
tons
LED is green
— The section is not
selected.
STYLE CONTROL
MAIN ENDING SYNC. SYNC. LED is red
AUTO OTS — The section is cur-
FILL IN LINK
rently selected.
LED is off
— No section data; the
2-3 Turn the SYNC. START function on. section cannot be
played.
• You can dynamically con-
2-2 Press the [INTRO] button. To cancel the INTRO section trol the level of the
before starting the style, press the [INTRO] button again. accompaniment by how
softly or strongly you play
the keys in the Auto
Accompaniment section
of the keyboard
(page 138).
• If you press the [SYNC.
3 The Intro section starts as soon as you play a key in the Auto
Accompaniment section of the keyboard, and changes to the Main section.
START] button while an
accompaniment is play-
ing, the accompaniment
will stop and the PSR-
2000/1000 will enter Syn-
Split point
chronized Start standby
status.
• You can also change
style sections by using
the pedal (page 139).
• The Break section lets
you add dynamic varia-
Auto Accompaniment section tions and breaks in the
rhythm of the accompani-
ment, to make your per-
formance sound even
more professional. If you
press the [BREAK] but-
ton while an accompani-
ment is playing, the fill-in
4 Main sections can be shifted.
will play back for one
measure.
• The indicator of the desti-
nation section (MAIN A/
STYLE CONTROL B/C/D) will flash while the
AUTO OTS
STOP START START/STOP Break is playing.
FILL IN LINK
• When the [AUTO FILLIN]
button is set to on and the
MAIN [A][B] [C][D] but-
ton is pressed after the
Press this button to add breaks. final half beat (eighth
note) of the measure, the
fill-in will begin from the
next measure.
64 PSR-2000/1000
Styles
This switches to the ending section. When the ending is finished, the Style stops
5 automatically. You can have the ending gradually slow down (ritardando) by
pressing the same [ENDING/rit.] button again while the ending is playing back.
• Styles can also be started
by pressing the STYLE
[START/STOP] button.
• You can select the Intro
STYLE CONTROL
MAIN
and Ending type by press-
ENDING SYNC. SYNC.
AUTO OTS
STOP START START/STOP ing the [E] button in the
FILL IN LINK MAIN window (page 66).
• If you press the [INTRO]
button while the ending is
playing, the Intro section
will begin playing after the
Fade-in/Fade-out ending is finished.
The accompaniment style also include a convenient Fade-in/Fade-out function that • When the [AUTO FILLIN]
gradually fades in and fades out the accompaniment. To start the style with a fade-in, button is set to on and you
press a MAIN button while
press the [FADE IN/OUT] button, then turn SYNC. START on. To cancel the fade-in the ending is playing, fill-in
before starting the style, press the button again. accompaniment will
To fade out and stop the Style, press this button while the style is playing. The time of the immediately start playing,
continuing with the Main
fade-in/fade-out can also be set (page 148). section.
• You can begin the accom-
paniment by using the
Stopping the Style Playback While Releasing Keys (SYNC. STOP) Ending instead of the Intro
section. In this case, the
When the Synchro Stop function is engaged, accompaniment playback will stop auto accompaniment
completely when all keys in the Auto Accompaniment section of the keyboard are released. doesn’t stop when the
ending is finished.
Accompaniment playback will start again as soon as the key in the Auto Accompaniment • If you select a different
section is played. style while the style is not
playing, the “default”
tempo for that style is also
1 Turn ACMP (Accompaniment) on. selected. If the accompa-

niment is playing, the
same tempo is maintained
even if you select a differ-
ent style.
• When STOP ACMP is set
2 Turn SYNC. STOP on. SYNC. START is also automatically set to on when
SYNC. STOP is turned on.
to on and the accompani-
ment is not playing, you
can play both chords and
STYLE CONTROL
bass in the Auto Accom-
AUTO OTS
STOP START START/STOP paniment section in the
FILL IN LINK
keyboard (page 138).
3 As soon as you play a chord with your left hand, the auto accompaniment
starts. Split point
You can also use the SYNC.
STOP function by pressing
the auto accompaniment
section/left-hand range
briefly (page 138).
Auto Accompaniment section
4 The auto accompaniment stops when you release your left hand from the keys.
Synchro Stop cannot be set
to on when the fingering
mode is set to Full Key-
board/AI Full Keyboard or
the auto accompaniment on
5 Playing a chord with your left
hand automatically restarts the
Press the [SYNC. STOP]/
[SYNC. START] button
the panel is set to off.
auto accompaniment. END again to stop the

accompaniment.
PSR-2000/1000 65
Styles
Selecting Intro and Ending Types (INTRO/ENDING)
1 To call up the [MAIN] dis-

play, first press the [DIRECT
A
ACCESS] button, then press
the [EXIT] button.
B
2 D
E
3 Play the style using
the Intro or Ending
Select a Intro
section (page 30, 31).
Select a Ending
Playing Fill-in patterns automatically when

Fill
changing accompaniment sections — Auto Fill In A short phrase used to add
variation to the style.
1 STYLE CONTROL
ACMP BREAK INTRO
MAIN ENDING
/ rit.
AUTO
FILL IN
OTS
LINK
SYNC.
STOP
SYNC.
START START/STOP
You can also add a fill-in by

2 Play the style and switch among the accompaniment sections as they play
(page 30, 31).
pressing the selected MAIN
button again.
Fill-in patterns play automatically between each change in the Main
sections.
You can temporarily disable

Auto Fill In during a perfor-
mance by pressing the next
Main section’s button twice
END To cancel the Auto Fill, press the [AUTO FILLIN] button again. quickly.
66 PSR-2000/1000
Styles
Appropriate Panel Setting for the Selected Style (ONE TOUCH SETTING)
The convenient One Touch Setting function makes it easy for you to select voices and effects that are appropriate to the style
you’re playing. Each preset style has four pre-programmed panel setups that you can select by pressing a single button.

BACK NEXT
(STYLE) (L) (R)
DIGITAL
VOICE ORGAN &
SOUND CREATOR MAIN

STYLE
SWING & MARCH & B G
C H

PART D I
USER ORGAN FLUTES
MENU UPPER OCTAVE
DEMO E J
MUSIC
TAP TEMPO
ONE TOUCH SETTING

TRANSPOSE TEMPO
FINDER
RESET
HELP
RESET RESET OVER
STOP FUNCTION

FADE ACCESS EXIT
IN/OUT
STYLE CONTROL
AUTO OTS DATA ENTRY
ON
1 Select a style (page 59).
2 Press one of the ONE TOUCH SETTING buttons ([1] - [4]).

LED is red — The One Touch Setting is currently selected.
3 As soon as you play a
chord with your left
hand, the auto
ONE TOUCH SETTING accompaniment starts.
LED is off — No One Touch Split point

Setting data. The button is
not available.
LED is green — The One Touch Setting is not selected.
Auto Accompaniment section

Various settings (such as voices, effects, etc.) that match the selected
style can be instantly recalled. When the style is not playing, Auto
Accompaniment and Sync. Start will automatically be turned on.
For details about the One Touch Setting parameters, refer to the
separate Data List (Parameter Chart).
4 Stop the Auto Accompaniment.
STYLE CONTROL
AUTO OTS
FILL IN LINK
5 Try out other One Touch Setting setups. You can also create your own One
Touch Setting setups (page 68).
ONE TOUCH SETTING
PSR-2000/1000 67
Styles
Automatically Changing One Touch Settings with the Sections — OTS Link
The convenient OTS (One Touch Setting) Link function lets you automatically have One Touch Settings change when
you select a different Main section (A - D).
1 AUTO
FILL IN
OTS
LINK
2 When you switch among the Main sections (A
- D), the corresponding One Touch Setting will
The One Touch Settings
can be set to change with
the sections in one of two
be called up automatically. different timings (page 138):
The Main sections A, B, C, and D correspond • Immediately when you
to One Touch Settings 1, 2, 3, and 4, press a section button.
• At the next measure (in
respectively. an accompaniment
style), after you press a
section button.
END To cancel the OTS Link function, press the [OTS LINK] button again.
Registering the Panel Controls in One Touch Setting (ONE TOUCH SETTING)
This section covers how to create your own One Touch Setting setups (four setups per style). For a list of One Touch
Setting setup parameters, refer to the separate Data List (Parameter Chart).
MEMORY
1 Select a style.
2 Set up the panel controls
such as selecting a voice 3 Press the [MEMORY]
button.
as required.
4 Press one of the ONE TOUCH SETTING buttons:[1] through [4].

ONE TOUCH SETTING
The items you can register in a One Touch Setting are Voice, Harmony, Multi Pad and Pedal settings.
Unless you store the panel

settings here, the registered
A message prompting you to save the current style will appear. Select “YES”
END to call up the STYLE display, then save the panel settings (page 38, 44).
settings will be deleted
when you select a different
accompaniment style.
68 PSR-2000/1000
Styles
Calling Up Ideal Setups for Your Music — Music Finder

The Music Finder feature lets you instantly call up the appropriate settings for the
instrument — including voice, style, and One Touch Settings — simply by selecting the The MUSIC FINDER records
desired song title. If you want to play a certain song but don’t know which style and voice and its contents is just one
settings would be appropriate, the convenient Music Finder function will help you out. example of the recom-
The recommended settings, which together make up a “record,” can also be edited and mended panel setups. You
can also create your own
stored. This lets you create and save your own Music Finder records for future recall. Music Finder settings for
your favorite songs and
genres.
MUSIC
SONG EXTRA
TRACKS
TRACK
2
TRACK
1 REPEAT
METRO-
NOME
BACK NEXT
LEFT
HOLD TOUCH FINDER
VOICE EFFECT
SUSTAIN
HARMONY/
ECHO MONO
DSP
VARIATION
(STYLE) (L) (R)
DIGITAL
VOICE ORGAN &
SOUND CREATOR MAIN

STYLE
POP & ROCK
BALLAD
SWING &
JAZZ
DANCE
BALLROOM
LATIN
MARCH &
WALTZ
USER
MIXING CONSOLE
B
C
G
H LEFT STRINGS CHOIR & PAD SYNTH. XG Keep in mind that Music
Finder is a performance aid
PART D I
USER ORGAN FLUTES
MENU UPPER OCTAVE
DEMO E J
MUSIC
TAP TEMPO FINDER
MASTER VOLUME
RESET RESET
STOP
HELP
FUNCTION
MIC.
OVER
SIGNAL
VH TYPE
SELECT
MIC.
SETTING
VOCAL
HARMONY TALK EFFECT
in that it automatically finds
FADE
IN/OUT
MULTI PAD DIRECT
ACCESS
BALANCE
EXIT
ENTER
ONE TOUCH SETTING
appropriate accompaniment
styles and voices for your
STYLE CONTROL
playing. Even though you

AUTO OTS DATA ENTRY
ON
can specify song titles, it

does not actually contain
song data.
1 MUSIC
FINDER
Select a record. For example, select the top

2 record by pressing the [1▲▼] button to call up
the recommended setups.
All .......................... Show all records.
FAVORITE.............. Show the records that have added to the “Favorite” page.
The setting data shown here is referred to as a SEARCH1,2........... Show the results by SEARCH function (page 70).
“record.”
Sorting the records

MUSIC ...... The record is sorted by song title.
STYLE....... The record is sorted by style name.
F
BEAT ........ The record is sorted by beat.
G TEMPO ..... The record is sorted by tempo.
Select a
H
record by
song title. I
Change the order of the records
When sorting (ascending or descending).
J
records by
song title, use Add the selected record to “Favorite (Bookmark)” page
the [1▲▼] but- When you press the [H] button, the “Add selected
Show the
ton to skip up data to the favorite list? YES/NO” message will be
number of
or down displayed. Select [YES] to add the selected page to
records of
through the “FAVORITE” page.
each page.
songs alpha-
betically. Search record(s). Enter the condition of the search in the
Simulta- MUSIC FINDER SEARCH display (page 70). The results of
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
neously press SEARCH 1 or 2 appear in the “SEARCH 1” or “SEARCH 2”
the [▲▼] but- page respectively.
tons to move
the cursor to
Call up the MUSIC FINDER RECORD EDIT (page 71) display
the first Select a record by style name. When (for editing the selected record).
record. sorting the records by style name, press
these buttons to move the cursor to the Turn TEMPO LOCK on/off. TEMPO LOCK function lets you avoid
next /previous style. Simultaneously changing the Tempo during style playback when selecting another
press the [▲▼] buttons to move the record. The on/off setting affects all pages (ALL/FAVORITE/
cursor to the first record. SEARCH 1/SEARCH 2).
3 Play the style (page 60). Records can be selected by

using the [DATA ENTRY]
dial and pressing the
[ENTER] button.
PSR-2000/1000 69
Styles
Searching the Ideal Setups — Music Finder Search

You can search the record by music title or keywords. The results appears in the display.
1 Press the [I]

(SEARCH 1)
2 Enter the
conditions for
button or [J] the search (see A F
(SEARCH 2) below), then B G
button in the start search by C H
MUSIC FINDER using [START D I

display. SEARCH] button.
E J
Start searching the record.

The results that satisfy all
the conditions appear in the
SEARCH page. For details
about the search settings in
this display, see below.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
■ [A] MUSIC
Searches by music or song title. Press this button to call up the display for
inputting the song title.
When you enter the song title (page 45), the search function calls up all
records that contain the entered word or words.
■ [B] KEYWORD
Searches by keyboard. Press this button to call up the display for inputting the
keyword.
When you enter the keyword (page 45), the search function calls up all records that contain the entered word or words.
You can search several different keywords simultaneously by inserting a separator (comma) between each. The search
function finds and displays all records that contain at least one match in the keywords.
■ [C] STYLE
The STYLE FILE SELECT
Searches by style name. Press this button to call up the STYLE FILE SELECT display. Press display can only be used to
the [A] through [J] button in the display to select the desired accompaniment style. This select the style name for
convenient function lets you find all songs that use a certain accompaniment style. searching; it cannot be used
to call up the actual accom-
■ [D] BEAT paniment style.
Searches by beat or rhythmic feel.
■ [E] SEARCH AREA

Selects a specific location for searching. You can further narrow down your search by using the SEARCH 1 and 2
selections.
■ [F]~[H] CLEAR
Clears the entered item at left.
■ [1▲▼] TEMPO FROM

You can also narrow your search by specifying a tempo range. This lets you set the minimum tempo for the search. Press
the [▲▼] buttons simultaneously to instantly reset the tempo value to the minimum.
■ [2▲▼]TEMPO TO
You can also narrow your search by specifying a tempo range. This lets you set the maximum tempo for the search.
Press the [▲▼] buttons simultaneously to instantly reset the tempo value to the maximum.
■ [3▲▼]~[5▲▼] GENRE
Selects the specific music genre for searching. The available range includes all genres (ANY), the preset genres, and any
genres you’ve entered yourself (page 69).
■ [8▼] CANCEL
Press this to cancel the operation and return to the previous display.
70 PSR-2000/1000
Styles
Editing Records — Music Finder Record Edit

From this display, you can call up existing records and edit them to suit your
preferences. You can even use this to create your own Music Finder records. You can also change/clear a
preset record. To avoid chang-
ing/clearing the record, register
Press the [8 ▲▼] (RECORD EDIT) button in the MUSIC FINDER display.
1 the record as a new record
after editing.
All Music Finder records can be

stored together as a single file
2 Change/clear the record data. You can also register new records. For
details about all settings and operations, see below.
(page 151). When calling up a
stored file, a message appears
prompting you to replace or
append the records as desired.
• Replace:
A F
All Music Finder records cur-
rently in the instrument are
B G deleted and replaced with the
records of the selected file.
C H
• Append:
D I The records called up are
added to the vacant record
E J
numbers.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
■ [A] MUSIC
Selects the music or song title for editing. Press the button to call up the
display for inputting the music or song title, then edit the name as desired.
■ [B] KEYWORD
Selects the keyword for editing. Press the button to call up the display for
inputting the keyword, then edit it as desired.
You can enter several different keywords by inserting a separator (comma)
between each.
■ [C] STYLE
The STYLE FILE SELECT
Selects the style name for editing. Always enter the name when a new record is registered. display can only be used to
Press the button to call up the STYLE FILE SELECT display. Press the [A] through [J] button select the style name for
in the display to select the desired file you want to change/clear/register. record editing; it cannot be
used to call up the actual
■ [D] BEAT accompaniment style.
Selects the beat (time signature) for editing. When another file is selected by pressing the
[C] button, the current beat setting is replaced with the beat setting of the selected file.
Keep in mind that the Beat
■ [E] FAVORITE setting made here is only for
the Music Finder search
Adds the selected record to the FAVORITE page (page 69).
function; this does not affect
the actual Beat setting of the
■ [F]~[H] CLEAR accompaniment style itself.
Clears the entered item at left.
■ [I] DELETE RECORD

Clears the selected record. The deleted record number becomes empty. When you press this button, a message appears
prompting you to execute, abort or cancel the operation.
YES .................. Press this to clear the record and close the display.
NO .................. Press this to close the display without clearing the record.
CANCEL........... Press this to close the message box and return to the previous display.
PSR-2000/1000 71
Styles
■ [J] NEW RECORD

Registers a new record. The smallest available empty record number is used for registering. The maximum number of
When you press this button, a message appears prompting you to execute, abort or cancel records is 2500 (PSR-2000)/
1200 (PSR-1000), including
the operation. internal records.
YES .................. Press this to register the record and close the display.
NO .................. Press this to close the display without registering the record.
■ [1▼▲] TEMPO
Determines the tempo for the selected style. When changing the style with the [C] button, the tempo is automatically
changed to that of the changed style.
■ [3▼▲]~[5▼▲] GENRE
Indicates and changes the genre to which the selected record is assigned. The available range includes all preset genres
as well as any you’ve entered yourself.
■ [6▼▲] GENRE NAME

For entering a genre name. Press the button to call up the display for inputting
the genre name, then edit the name as desired. A maximum of 200 genre
names can be stored.
The genre name you input becomes effective when the current record is edited (overwritten) by pressing the [8▲] (OK)
button, or when a new record is registered by pressing the [J] (NEW RECORD) button.
If you exit from the MUSIC FINDER EDIT display without actually editing or registering a record, the input genre name
is deleted.
■ [8▲] OK
Executes all editing and changes to the record. When you press this button, a message appears prompting you to
execute, abort or cancel the operation.
YES .................. Press this to replace the record and close the display.
NO .................. Press this to close the display without replacing the record.
■ [8▼] CANCEL
Press this to cancel the operation and return to the MUSIC FINDER display.
To maintain the edited and registered data, make sure to save all Music Finder records as a file (page 151). If no saved, the data will
be lost when another Music Finder file is called up or the factory-programmed settings are restored (page 151).
72 PSR-2000/1000
The Multi Pads
The PSR-2000/1000 Multi Pads can be used to play a number of short pre-recorded rhythmic and melodic sequences
that can be used to add impact and variety to your keyboard performances.
Multi Pads
Playing the Multi Pads
1 Select the desired bank in the MULTI PAD Bank display (page 38).
• Simply tap any of the Multi
2 Press any of the Multi Pads.

STOP
Pads at any time to play
back the corresponding
phrase at the currently set
tempo.
MULTI PAD
• You can even play two,
three, or four Multi Pads at
the same time.
• Pressing the pad during
its playback will stop play-
The corresponding phrase (in this case, for Pad 4) starts playing back in its entirety as ing and begin playing from
the top again.
soon as the pad is pressed.
The Multi Pad function provides two different ways to stop in the middle of the
phrase :
• To stop all pads, press and release the [STOP] button.
• To stop specific pads, simultaneously hold down the [STOP] button and press the
pad or pads you wish to stop.
Chord Match
1 Turn ACMP on (page 60).
2 Play a chord with your left hand and press any of the Multi Pads.
Split Point
The Chord Match on/off sta-
tus depends on the selected
Multi Pad Bank.
Auto Accompaniment STOP

section
MULTI PAD
In this example, the phrase for Pad 1 will be transposed into F major before playing back.
Try playing other chords and pressing the pads. Keep in mind that you can also change chords while a pad is playing back.
PSR-2000/1000 73
The Multi Pad
Multi Pad Edit

This function lets you copy individual Multi Pad settings from one Multi Pad bank to another.
Select the desired Multi Pad(s).

Open/Save display for Multi Pads (page 38)
A F
B G
C H
D I
E J
The same as the Open/Save Calls up the upper

display on pages 41 and 44. level directory page.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
74 PSR-2000/1000
Song Playback
Here you’ll learn how to play back songs. Songs include the internal songs of the instrument, performances you’ve
recorded yourself using the recording functions (page 92), and commercially available song data. You can use this
highly versatile feature in a variety of ways — playing along on the keyboard with the recorded song. You can also
display the music notation (PSR-2000 only) and lyrics in the LCD.
If you connect a microphone to the PSR-2000, you can sing along with the song or auto accompaniment and have
vocal harmony parts added automatically (page 128).

BACK NEXT
(STYLE) (L) (R)
DIGITAL
VOICE ORGAN &
SOUND CREATOR MAIN

STYLE
SWING & MARCH & B G
C H

PART D I
USER ORGAN FLUTES
MENU UPPER OCTAVE
DEMO E J
MUSIC
TAP TEMPO FINDER
HELP
RESET RESET OVER
STOP FUNCTION

FADE ACCESS EXIT
IN/OUT
CHANNEL ON/OFF 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
SONG
MIN MAX
STYLE CONTROL EXTRA

MAIN
TRACK ENDING
TRACK
SYNC. SYNC. PART
METRO- REGISTRATION MEMORY
STANDBY
ACMP BREAK INTRO
TRACKS 2 / rit.
AUTO
FILL IN
OTS
LINK
1
REPEAT NOME DATA ENTRY
FREEZE MEMORY
ON
(STYLE) (L) (R)
Compatible Song Types

Disks having this logo mark feature song data compatible with GM (General
MIDI). Commercially available
music data is subject to
Disks having this logo mark feature song data compatible with Yamaha’s XG copyright restrictions, and is
intended only for your own
format. XG is a significant enhancement of the “GM system level 1” standard, personal use.
providing more voices, greater editing control, and support for multiple effect
sections and effect types.
For more information on the
Disks having this logo mark feature song data compatible with Yamaha’s DOC song file types compatible
(Disk Orchestra Collection) format. with the PSR-2000/1000,
see page 159.
Disks having this logo mark feature song data compatible with Yamaha’s
original MIDI file format.
PSR-2000/1000 75
Song Playback
Song Playback
Playing the Internal Songs
1 BACK NEXT
If the MAIN screen (at left) is
not displayed, press the
[DIRECT ACCESS] button
followed by the [EXIT] button.
A F n
B G
You can also make a variety
of other settings (such as
C H tempo, voice selection, etc.)
and have them automati-
D I
cally called up when you
E J play back the song
(page 104).
You can enable the Synchro

Start for the song by simul-
taneously pressing the
[TOP] button and the
2 2-1 Select the PRESET tab with the

[BACK] button.
BACK NEXT SONG [START/STOP] but-
ton. The song starts as
soon as you play the key-
board. You can also use this
function along with the
Style’s Synchro Start func-
A F
tion (page 60).
B G
n
C H You can have the volume
D I
automatically fade in and
fade out at the beginning
E J and end of the song. Simply
press the [FADEIN/OUT]
2-2 Open a folder and button at the start of song
select a song to be playback to fade in the song,
played back. and press it again at the end
of the song to fade out.
3 The song starts.

END
TRACKS 2 1 REPEAT NOME START/STOP
(STYLE) (L) (R) To stop the song immediately, press the

button again.
EXIT
Press the button in order to go back to the

Adjust the tempo by using the TEMPO [ ][ ] buttons previous screen.
(page 50) or the [TAP TEMPO] button.
You can even change the playback speed by tapping out
the tempo — simply tap the [TAP TEMPO] button twice.
Songs can also be played Make sure that the Language

back continuously. Set setting for the instrument
SONG CHAIN PLAY to ON (page 151) is the same as that
from the SONG SETTING of the file name of the song that
display (page 137). you are playing back.
76 PSR-2000/1000
Song Playback
The accompaniment stops

Simultaneously Playing a Song and an Accompaniment Style when you stop the song. If
When playing back a song and an accompaniment style at the same time, channels 9 - the accompaniment style is
playing and you start the
16 of the song data are replaced with accompaniment style channels — allowing you song, the accompaniment
to use the auto accompaniment styles and features in place of the accompaniment parts automatically stops. How-
of the song. Make the settings below and play your own chord substitutions in place of ever, for internal songs that
use accompaniment styles,
the song’s chord data. the accompaniment style is
not stopped.
• [ACMP] button .................. ...ON
• [AUTO FILL IN] button ..... ...ON
1 Select the song and start playback by pressing the SONG [START/STOP] button.
2 Select the desired accompaniment style.
3 Start the style by pressing the STYLE [START/STOP] button.
4 While the song is playing, insert a break or change sections (with the STYLE
section buttons.)
Fill-in patterns play when you switch sections.
END
The style automatically stops when the song finishes or is stopped.
Some of the internal songs have been created using the accompaniment styles. For these songs, the
accompaniment styles are automatically started when starting song playback.
PSR-2000/1000 77
Song Playback
Playing Back Songs on Disk

Before proceeding, make
Insert the disk into the drive. sure to read the section
“Handling the Floppy Disk
Drive (FDD) and Floppy
Disk” (page 7).
n
Insert the disk shutter side You can set whether or not
first and label face up. the PSR-2000/1000 auto-
matically calls up the first
disk song when a disk is
inserted (page 150).
The method for playing back is the same as in the “Playing the Internal Songs” instructions
n
(page 76), except that you should select FLOPPY DISK page in the SONG display. Some song data for the
PSR-2000/1000 has been
recorded with special “free
tempo” settings. During play-
back of such song data, the
Other Playback-related Operations measure numbers shown in
the display will not corre-
■ Repeat / Rewind / Fast forward spond to the actual measure;
this only serves as a refer-
During playback, you can have the song return to the top and play back again ence as to how much of the
from the beginning by pressing this button. When playback is stopped, song has been played back.
pressing this button returns the song to the beginning.
n
Songs containing a large
amount of data may not be
able to be read properly by
the instrument, and as such
you may not be able to
Press this button to call up the SONG POSITION display (see select them. The maximum
below). To return to the SONG display, press the [EXIT] button. capacity is about 200–
300KB, however this may
SONG POSITION display differ depending on the data
contents of each song.
When “BAR” is selected, you can specify a measure number (counted from the
beginning of the song) by using the [REW] and [FF] buttons.
When “PHRASE MARK” is selected, specify the phrase mark number by using the
[REW] and [FF] buttons.
Phrase Mark
This data specifies a certain
location in the song data.
“PHRASE MARK” is shown only when the song contains phrase marks. Press the
[J] button to toggle between “BAR” and “PHRASE MARK,” then use the [REW]
and [FF] buttons to select the desired measure or phrase mark.
■ Adjusting the Volume Balance / Muting Specific Channels

BALANCE
Press this button to call up the BALANCE display (page 61).

CHANNEL ON/OFF
Press this button to call up the CHANNEL ON/OFF display (see below).
PART
CHANNEL ON/OFF display

Channel
in the song data. The chan-
nels are assigned as shown
below for the PSR-2000/
Select the [SONG] tab with the [CHANNEL ON/OFF] button, and mute the desired channel 1000.
by setting it to [OFF]. To solo a channel (only that channel will sound), hold down the Song
appropriate button corresponding to the channel. To release the solo for the channel, press 1 - 16
Accompaniment Style
that channel’s button again. 9 - 16
78 PSR-2000/1000
Song Playback
Muting Specific Parts — Track1/Track2/Extra Tracks

This feature lets you mute certain parts of the song (Track1, Track2, Extra Tracks), and play back only those parts you
want to hear. For example, if you want to practice the melody of a song, you can mute just the right-hand part and play
that part yourself.
1 Select the song to be played back (page 75).

You can change the channel
assignments for Track 1 and
Track 2 (page 137), letting
you specify which parts are
muted when pressing the
Use this button to turn on/off the additional performance parts [TRACK 1]/[TRACK 2]/
2 (all but the right hand/left hand). [EXTRA TRACKS] buttons.

Use this button to turn on/off

(STYLE) (L) (R) the right-hand part.
All tracks are automatically
Use this button to turn on/off the left-hand part. set to on when selecting a
different song.
Start the song.

3 Adjust the tempo by using the TEMPO [ ][ ] buttons (page 50).
END START/STOP
To stop the song, press the

button again.
Repeat Playback of a Specific Range

This feature allows you to specify a certain range of the song (between Point A and Point B), and play it back repeatedly.
1 Play back the song (page 76, 78). You can also specify Points A and B when the song is stopped. Set Point A by
pressing the [REPEAT] button, then use the [FF] button to move to the desired
end location, then set Point B by pressing the [REPEAT] button again.
SONG
2 EXTRA
TRACKS
TRACK
2
TRACK
1 REPEAT
METRO-
NOME
Press this button at the point you want
the repeating phrase to start (Point A).
Press this button at the point you want
(STYLE) (L) (R)
the repeating phrase to end (Point B). Point B cannot be selected
unless Point A has been
selected first.
n
Specifying only Point A
3 After an automatic lead-in (to help guide you into the phrase), the range from
point A to point B is played back repeatedly.
results in repeat playback
between Point A and the
Regardless of whether the song is playing back or is stopped, pressing the [TOP] end of the song.
button returns to point A. n

The specified A and B
points will be erased when
selecting a different song
number, cancelling the
4 Stop the song.

START/STOP
END
Repeat function, or select-
ing a different repeat mode
— such as Phrase Repeat
REPEAT
or repeat in Song Chain
To cancel the Repeat function, press the Play (page 133).
button again.
PSR-2000/1000 79
Song Playback
Displaying Music Notation — Score (PSR-2000 only)

With this feature, you can have the notation automatically shown on the display as the song plays. This can be used
with your own recordings as well as the internal Demo songs.
1 Select the
desired song 2 If the MAIN screen (at left)
is not displayed, press the
A
(page 76, 78). [DIRECT ACCESS] button
B followed by the [EXIT] but-
ton.
C
The displayed notation is

generated by the PSR-
2000/1000 based on the
song data. As a result, it
may not be exactly the
same as commercially
available sheet music of the
same song — especially
when displaying notation of
3 complicated passages or
many short notes.
n
Some song data for the
PSR-2000/1000 has been
recorded with special "free
Enables/disables display of the left-hand key range. tempo" settings. For such
Depending on other settings, this parameter may be song data, the tempo, beat,
unavailable and may appear grayed out. If this is the measure and music
case, go to the detailed setting display (shown notation will not displayed
below; use the [8▲▼] buttons) and set the LEFT correctly.
CH. parameter to any channel except “AUTO.” Or,
go to the SONG SETTING display in the Function n
menu (page 133) and set the TRACK 2 parameter [RIGHT] and [LEFT] cannot
to any channel except “OFF.” be turned off at the same
time.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
n
The note name is indicated
Enables/disables display of the right-hand key range. at the left of the note. When
Channel 1 is automatically selected when the space between the
[TRACK1] is set to [OFF] from the SONG SETTING notes is too small, the indi-
display (page 137). cation may be moved to the
Enables/disables display of the lyrics. top left of the note.
If the selected song does not contain lyric data, lyrics are
not displayed. n
You can increase the num-
ber of measures that will be
Enables/disables display of the chords.
displayed by decreasing the
If the selected song does not contain chord data, chords
other items to be displayed
are not displayed.
(parts, lyrics, chords, etc.).
Enables/disables display of the note name (pitch).
n
Determines the display resolution (or zoom level) of the notation. When accidentals (sharp
SMALL...... Notation is shown in small size. and flats) and notes cannot
LARGE ..... Notation is shown in large size. be displayed on one line,
they are displayed in the
This calls up the detailed setting display for notation. next line from the middle of
For details, see the next page. the measure.
n
The notation functions can-
not be used to create song
data by inputting notes. For
information on creating
song data, see page 96.
80 PSR-2000/1000
Song Playback
Detailed Settings for Notation
When “LEFT” and “RIGHT”

are set to the same channel,
the notation of the right-hand
notes and left-hand notes
are displayed in piano format
(two connected staves).
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
■ [1▲▼] LEFT CH/[2▲▼] RIGHT CH

This determines the Left channel (channel for the left-hand part) and Right channel (channel for the right-hand part).
This setting returns to AUTO when a different song is selected.
AUTO .........................The channels for the right- and left-hand parts are assigned automatically — setting the parts
to the same channel as the channel which is specified in the SONG SETTING display of the
Function menu (page 137).
1-16 ............................Assigns the part to the specified channel, 1- 16.
OFF (LEFT CH only)....No channel assignment.
■ [3▲▼], [4▲▼] KEY SIGNATURE

This lets you enter key signature changes in the middle of a song, at the stopped position, allowing you to transpose
key at any point within a song. For a list of the key signatures, with their relative minor keys and accidentals, see the
chart below.
Key Signatures and Accidentals

C Maj (A min) G Maj (E min) D Maj (B min) A Maj (F min) E Maj (C min) B Maj (G min) F Maj (D min) C Maj (A min)
C Maj (A min) G Maj (E min) D Maj (B min) A Maj (F min) E Maj (C min) B Maj (G min) F Maj (D min)
The note indicates the root note of the major key, and the note indicates the root of the relative minor.
■ [5▲▼] QUANTIZE
This gives you control over the note resolution in the notation, letting you shift or correct Short notes and ornamented
notes (such as trills and
the timing of all displayed notes so that they line up to a particular note value. Make sure grace notes) which are
to select the smallest note value which is used in the song. shorter than the Note resolu-
tion will not be displayed in
Note resolution: the notation.
1/4 note, 1/8 note, 1/16 note, 1/32 note, 1/4 note triplet, 1/8 note triplet, 1/16 note
triplet, 1/32 note triplet
PSR-2000/1000 81
Song Playback
■ [6▲▼] NOTE NAME

When [NOTE NAME] is set to ON, the note name and solfeggio name (do, re, mi, etc.) are indicated.
ABC ................. Note names are indicated as letters (C, D, E, F, G, A, B).
Fixed Do .......... Note names are indicated in solfeggio and differ depending on the selected language (page 49).
English.............. Do Re Mi Fa Sol La Ti
French .............. Ut Re Mi Fa Sol La Si
Italian............... Do Re Mi Fa Sol La Si
German............ Do Re Mi Fa Sol La Si
Spanish............. Do re Mi Fa Sol La Si
Japanese...........
Movable Do..... Note names are indicated in solfeggio according to the scale intervals, and as such are relative to
the key. The root note is indicated as Do. For example, in the key of G major the root note of Sol
would be indicated as Do.
As with “Fixed Do,” the indication differs depending on the selected language.
■ [8▲] OK
This closes the detailed setting display and starts generating the notation. You can also You can select the display
execute this by pressing the [ENTER] button on the panel. pages (one before and after)
by the using the [BACK]/
[NEXT] buttons or the pedal
■ [8▼] CANCEL (page 139).
This closes the detailed setting display without changing the settings. You can also
execute this by pressing the [EXIT] button or [RECORD] button on the panel.
82 PSR-2000/1000
Song Playback
Displaying the Lyrics

This function lets you display the lyrics while the song is playing back — making it easy to sing along with your
performance or song playback.
* Microphone input is available only on the PSR-2000.
1 Select the
desired song 2 The language used for lyr-
ics display depends on the
(page 76, 78). A particular lyric data. If the
lyrics are garbled or
B
unreadable, you can rem-
C edy this by changing the
“LYRICS LANGUAGE” set-
D
ting from the SONG SET-
E
TING display (page 137).
3 If the selected song does

not contain lyric data, lyrics
are not displayed.
In this example, select

“Lyrics” in the Function
folder of the PRESET
(SONG) page.
If the selected song

contains chord data, chord
names are displayed with
the lyrics.
4 Start the song. SONG EXTRA

TRACKS
TRACK
2
TRACK
1 REPEAT
METRO-
NOME
(STYLE) (L) (R)
5 The lyrics are

in reverse END
SONG EXTRA
TRACKS
TRACK
2
TRACK
1 REPEAT
METRO-
NOME
The lyrics can be changed
(page 107).
display along (STYLE) (L) (R)
with song REC TOP START/STOP REW FF
playback.
EXIT
Stop the song.
To return to the previous page, press the
button.
PSR-2000/1000 83
Saving and Recalling Custom Panel Setups — Registration Memory
Registration Memory is a powerful feature that lets you set up the PSR-2000/1000 just as you want — selecting specific
voices, styles, effect settings etc. — and save your custom panel setup for future recall. Then, when you need those
settings, simply press the appropriate REGISTRATION MEMORY button.
BACK NEXT
(STYLE) (L) (R)
DIGITAL
VOICE ORGAN &
SOUND CREATOR MAIN

STYLE
SWING & MARCH & B G
C H

PART D I
USER ORGAN FLUTES
MENU UPPER OCTAVE
DEMO E J
MUSIC
TAP TEMPO FINDER
HELP
RESET RESET OVER
STOP FUNCTION

FADE ACCESS EXIT
IN/OUT
REGISTRATION MEMORY STYLE CONTROL

FREEZE STANDBY
AUTO
FILL IN
OTS
LINK
MEMORY DATA ENTRY
FREEZE MEMORY
ON
Registering Panel Setups — Registration Memory

This shows you how to register your custom panel settings to the REGISTRATION MEMORY buttons. Make all the
settings you want with the panel controls, and Registration Memory will “remember” them for you.
1 Set up the panel controls as desired.

For a list of the settings that can be registered, refer to the separate Data List
Keep in mind that songs or
styles on disk cannot
(Parameter Chart). registered to Registration
Memory. If you want to
register a disk-based song
or style, copy the relevant
REGISTRATION MEMORY data to “USER” in the
2 FREEZE MEMORY
SONG/STYLE display
(page 38) and register the
data separately.
3
F Cancels the registration
Select the desired parameter groups and returns to the MAIN
G
for the settings you want to register. display. You can also use
You can also use the [DATA ENTRY] H the [EXIT] button.
dial to navigate in this display. To I
register a parameter group, checkmark
the corresponding box. Groups left J
without checkmarks will not be included

in the Registration Memory setting.
This allows you to maintain certain Enters a checkmark to the
settings, even when switching among selected box. You can also
Registration Memory presets. You can use the [ENTER] button.
also use the Freeze function (page 86)
to override the Registration Memory
changes — letting you prevent certain
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
panel settings from being changed. Removes the checkmark from
the selected box. You can also
use the [ENTER] button.
Press the desired REGISTRATION MEMORY

Any data that was previ-
E
FREEZE MEMORY
ND number button for ously registered to the

registering the settings. selected REGISTRATION
MEMORY button (indica-
tor is green or red) will be
Indicator is green .....The panel setting is registered, but not selected. erased and replaced by
Indicator is red .........The panel setting is registered and is currently selected. the new settings.
Indicator is off..........The panel setting is not registered.
The registrations registered here will be lost when the power is turned off, unless you perform the
Save operation explained on the next page.
84 PSR-2000/1000
Saving Your Registration Memory Setups

The settings registered to the REGISTRATION MEMORY [1]-[8] buttons are saved as a single file.
Keep in mind that the size of

All settings registered to buttons [1]- the Registration bank files
[8] are referred to as a “bank.” The and the memory space they
banks can be saved to “USER” or occupy depends on the
BANK 01 “FLOPPY DISK” as Registration amount of functions set in
bank files. each.
Press the [DIRECT

1 F
ACCESS] button and [EXIT]
button to call up the MAIN
display.
G
2 Save the settings you’ve

made to the
Registration Memory
buttons as a single
Registration bank file
(page 44).
The REGISTRATION EDIT display

appears. For details on this display,
see below.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
REGISTRATION EDIT display

The contents of the current Registration Memory bank (REGIST.) are listed in the REGISTRATION EDIT screen. The
names of the stored Registration Memory presets are shown in the display and the indicators of the relevant
REGISTRATION MEMORY buttons are lit in green.
From this screen, you can select, name, or delete the Registration Memory presets.
Select ..........Press the [A] - [J] buttons. The REGIST. display is linked to the REGISTRATION MEMORY [1] - [8]
buttons. When you select the Registration Memory preset in the display, the related button turns on
(indicator is red).
Name ..........This operation is the same as that in “Naming Files and Folders” (page 41) in “Basic Operations —
Organizing Your Data.”
Delete .........This operation is the same as that in “Deleting Files/Folders” (page 43) in “Basic Operations —
Organizing Your Data.”
The result of the Name/Delete operation will be lost when the power is turned off unless you return to the REGISTRATION
BANK display by pressing the [8▼] (UP) button and save the data (page 44).
PSR-2000/1000 85
Recalling a Registration Memory Setup

You can recall all of the panel settings you’ve made — or only those you specifically want or need. For example, if you
de-select “STYLE” in the REGISTRATION MEMORY display, you can keep the currently selected style even when you
change the Registration Memory preset.
Recalling the Registered Settings

Select the desired bank in the REGISTRATION BANK display (page 85).
Press the appropriate REGISTRATION MEMORY button (any whose indicators are
green) to recall the desired settings. You can program your
Registration Memory
REGISTRATION MEMORY presets to be called up in
FREEZE MEMORY
sequence, in any order you
desire. Once programmed,
the presets 1 - 8 can be
selected in sequence with
the [BACK][NEXT] buttons
or the pedal (page 142).
Selecting the Freeze Settings
1 MENU
DEMO 2
HELP
FUNCTION
Call up the “FREEZE”

page from the
REGIST.SEQUENCE/ Enters a checkmark
FREEZE/VOICE SET to the selected box.
screen (page 142).
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Removes the
Select the Freeze settings. checkmark from the
selected box.
3 Press the [FREEZE] button. When Freeze is active (lamp is lit), the settings you specified in the Freeze
page will be maintained or left unchanged, even when changing Registration Memory presets.
REGISTRATION MEMORY
FREEZE MEMORY
4 Press the appropriate REGISTRATION MEMORY button (any whose indicators are green) to recall the
desired settings.
REGISTRATION MEMORY
FREEZE MEMORY
86 PSR-2000/1000
Editing Voices — Sound Creator
The PSR-2000/1000 has a Sound Creator feature that allows you to create your own voices
by editing some parameters of the existing voices. Once you’ve created a voice, you can • The Voice can be edited in
save it as a USER voice for future recall. realtime while playing
back a song/style.
SONG EXTRA
TRACKS
TRACK
2
TRACK
1 REPEAT
METRO-
NOME
BACK NEXT
LEFT
HOLD
VOICE EFFECT
TOUCH SUSTAIN
HARMONY/
ECHO MONO
DSP
VARIATION • Keep in mind that adjust-
ments made to the param-
(STYLE) (L) (R)
DIGITAL
VOICE ORGAN &
SOUND CREATOR MAIN
STYLE
NEW SONG
POP & ROCK

SYNC. START
SWING &
JAZZ BALLROOM
MARCH &
WALTZ
DIGITAL RECORDING
A
B
F
G
LAYER
eters may not make much

change in the actual

C H

PART D I
USER ORGAN FLUTES
MENU UPPER OCTAVE
E J
sound depending on the

DEMO
MUSIC
TAP TEMPO FINDER
HELP
RESET RESET OVER
MASTER VOLUME
MULTI PAD
STOP FUNCTION
DIRECT
BALANCE
SIGNAL
ENTER
ONE TOUCH SETTING
original settings of the
ACCESS EXIT
voice.
FADE
IN/OUT
STYLE CONTROL
DIGITAL
ACMP BREAK INTRO
MAIN ENDING
/ rit.
AUTO OTS
STUDIO
SYNC.
STOP
SYNC.
START START/STOP
PART
DATA ENTRY
REGISTRATION MEMORY
FREEZE MEMORY

ON
SOUND CREATOR
Operation
1 Press the [F], [G] or [H] button to select the

Part (MAIN, LAYER or LEFT) containing the 2 Press the
[SOUND
The voice can also be
selected in the SOUND
voice you wish to edit. CREATOR] CREATOR display.
button.
DIGITAL
CAUTION
F STUDIO
SOUND CREATOR The settings are lost if the
G
edited part's voice is
H
DIGITAL RECORDING
switched to another voice.
I Important data should be
J
saved to User Drive or floppy
MIXING CONSOLE
disk.
PART
3 Edit the voice parameters.

The operations for each function selected in this step are covered in detail, starting on page 89 (Regular
Voice), and page 91 (Organ Flutes).
Select the desired menu by
pressing the [NEXT]/
REGULAR VOICE [BACK] button. ORGAN FLUTES (PSR-2000 only)
Indicates the A F
parameters available B G
for editing in this C H

display. These
D I
correspond to the
parameters/values E J
shown at the bottom

of the display.
Can be used during editing to compare

the sound of the original voice with the Select or adjust the parameters.
edited voice.
Select the desired menu. Opens the Save (Voice) display for saving
The selected menu is highlighted. the edited voice as a User voice (page 44).
4 Save the edited voice to the USER drive

(Flash ROM) as a USER voice (page 44). 5 Press the [USER] button to select the
edited voice, and play the keyboard.
PSR-2000/1000 87
Editing the voice -SOUND CREATOR-
Regular Voice Parameters

COMMON Determines the common settings such as voice volume or octave. Keep in mind that there are
SOUND Determines the timbre/EG (Envelope Generator)/vibrato of the voice. certain parameters whose
Sound Creator settings
EFFECT/EQ (PSR-2000) affect only the Main part’s
Determines the effect depth/type and equalizer settings.
EFFECT (PSR-1000) voice.
HARMONY Determines the Harmony/Echo settings.
The following parameters are linked to the ones in each display.
Common parameter Other location

MONO VOICE EFFECT (TOP PANEL) page 58
PORTAMENTO TIME MIXING CONSOLE page 123
FILTER BRIGHTNESS MIXING CONSOLE page 123
FILTER HARMONIC CONTENT MIXING CONSOLE page 123
REVERB DEPTH MIXING CONSOLE page 124
CHORUS DEPTH MIXING CONSOLE page 124
DSP ON/OFF VOICE EFFECT (TOP PANEL) page 57
DSP DEPTH MIXING CONSOLE page 124
DSP TYPE/VARIATION MIXING CONSOLE/VOICE EFFECT (TOP PANEL) page 58,124
EQ LOW/GAIN MIXING CONSOLE page 121
EQ HIGH/GAIN MIXING CONSOLE page 121
HARMONY/ECHO TYPE HARMONY/ECHO (FUNCTION) page 143
HARMONY/ECHO VOLUME HARMONY/ECHO (FUNCTION) page 143
HARMONY/ECHO SPEED HARMONY/ECHO (FUNCTION) page 143
HARMONY/ECHO ASSIGN HARMONY/ECHO (FUNCTION) page 143
HARMONY/ECHO CHORD NOTE ONLY HARMONY/ECHO (FUNCTION) page 143
HARMONY/ECHO TOUCH LIMIT HARMONY/ECHO (FUNCTION) page 143
COMMON
The explanations here apply to step #3 on page 87.
Set the volume of the current edited Set the portamento time of each
voice. part (MAIN/LAYER/VOICE)
(page 123).
Determines the touch sensitivity, or

how greatly the volume responds to This determines whether the voice
your playing strength. is played monophonically (page 58).
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
0 —–– Produces more dramatic
level drops, the more softly
you play. Shift the octave range of the
64 —– Normal response. selected voice up or down in
127 — Produces high volume for octaves. When the Main or Layer
any playing strength (fixed) part’s voice is used, the M/LYR
parameter is available; when the
Left part’s voice is used, the LEFT
parameter is available.
88 PSR-2000/1000
SOUND
Determines the filter, EG, and

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 vibrato settings (see below).
■ FILTER
FILTER settings determine the overall timbre of the sound by boosting or cutting a
certain frequency range. In addition to making the
sound either brighter or
more mellow, Filter can be
• BRIGHTNESS Volume Cutoff frequency used to produce electronic,
Determines the cutoff frequency or synthesizer-like effects.
effective frequency (resonance) range of
the filter (see diagram). Higher values
result in a brighter sound.
Frequency
(pitch)
These frequencies are Cutoff range
“passed” by the filter.
• Harmonic Content Volume

Determines the emphasis given to the Resonance
Resonance
cutoff frequency, set in BRIGHTNESS
above (see diagram). Higher values result
in a more pronounced effect.
Frequency
(pitch)
■ EG
The EG (Envelope Generator) settings determine how the level of the sound changes in time. This lets you reproduce
many sound characteristics of natural acoustic instruments — such as the quick attack and decay of percussion
sounds, or the long release of a sustained piano tone.
Level
• ATTACK ...... Determines how quickly the sound reaches its maximum
level after the key is played. The higher the value, the
slower the attack.
• DECAY........ Determines how quickly the sound reaches its sustain
level (a slightly lower level than maximum). The higher ATTACK DECAY RELEASE Time
the value, the slower the decay.
Key on Key off
• RELEASE ..... Determines how quickly the sound decays to silence after
the key is released. The higher the value, the slower the release. If RELEASE is set to a large
value, the sustain becomes
long.
PSR-2000/1000 89
■ VIBRATO
• DEPTH........ Determines the intensity of the Vibrato effect (see diagram). Higher
VIBRATO
settings result in a more pronounced Vibrato. Creates a wavering in the
sound by periodically chang-
• SPEED......... Determines the speed of the Vibrato effect (see diagram). ing the pitch.
• DELAY ........ Determines the amount of time that elapses between the SPEED
Level
playing of a key and the start of the Vibrato effect (see
diagram). Higher settings increase the delay of the Vibrato DEPTH
onset.
DELAY
Time
EFFECT/EQ
Determines the DSP type.

For information on the effect
structure, see page 126; for a list of
available effect types, refer to the
separate Data List.
Determines the Frequency and

Gain of the Low and High EQ
bands (PSR-2000 only).
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
The same as the “Mixing Console”

on page 124.
Determines the Sustain depth
of each voice when the
[SUSTAIN] button is set to on.
HARMONY
The parameters are the same as for HARMONY/ECHO display of FUNCTION. For details, see page 144.
90 PSR-2000/1000
Organ Flutes (PSR-2000 only)

In addition to the many organ voices in the ORGAN voice category, the PSR-2000/1000 has an ORGAN FLUTES voice.
Adjust the Footage.
■ Parameters
Organ Type This parameter specifies the type of organ tone generation to be simulated: Sine or Vintage.
Rotary SP Speed The Rotary SP Speed ([C]) button alternately switches between the slow and fast rotary speaker
speeds when a rotary speaker effect is selected for the Organ Flutes (see “DSP Type” below), and the
VOICE EFFECT [DSP] button is turned on (the Rotary SP Speed button has the same effect as the
VOICE EFFECT [VARIATION] button).
Vibrato On/Off This ([G]) button alternately turns the vibrato effect for the Organ Flutes voice ON or OFF.
Vibrato Depth Can be set to any of three levels via the Vibrato Depth ([H]) button. The button sequentially selects a
depth of “1”, “2”, or “3”.
Footage The footage settings determine the basic sound of the organ flutes.
The term “footage” is a reference to the sound generation of traditional pipe organs, in which the sound
is produced by pipes of different lengths (in feet). The longer the pipe, the lower the pitch of the sound.
Hence, the 16’ setting determines the lowest pitched component of the voice, while the 1’ setting
determines the highest pitched component. The higher the value of the setting, the greater the volume
of the corresponding footage. Mixing various volumes of the footages lets you create your own
distinctive organ sounds.
Volume (VOL) Adjusts the overall volume of the Organ Flutes. The longer the graphic bar, the greater the volume.
Response (RESP) The Response control affects both the attack and sustain portion of the sound, increasing or
decreasing the response time of the initial swell and release, based on the FOOTAGE controls. The
higher the value the slower the swell and release.
Vibrato Speed (VIB. SPEED) Determines the speed of the vibrato effect controlled by the Vibrato On/Off and Vibrato Depth above.
Mode The MODE control selects between two modes: FIRST and EACH. In the FIRST mode, attack is
applied only to the first notes played and held simultaneously; while the first notes are held, any
subsequently played notes have no attack applied. In the EACH mode, attack is applied equally to all
notes.
Attack (4’, 2 2/3’, 2’) The ATTACK controls adjust the attack sound of the ORGAN FLUTE voice. The 4’, 2 2/3 ‘and 2’
controls increase or reduce the amount of attack sound at the corresponding footages. The longer the
graphic bar the greater the attack sound.
Length (LENG) The LENGTH control affects the attack portion of the sound producing a longer or shorter decay
immediately after the initial attack. The longer the graphic bar the longer the decay.
Reverb Depth For details about the digital effects, see pages 57, 124.
Chorus Depth
DSP on/off
DSP Depth
DSP Type Determines the DSP effect type to be applied to the Organ Flutes voice. Normally this will be one of the
seven available Rotary Speaker effects. If any other type of effect is selected the Rotary SP Speed
([C]) button in the FOOTAGE/VOL/ATTACK display will not control rotary speaker speed. Instead, it will
have the same effect as the VOICE EFFECT [VARIATION] button.
Variation Variation Determines whether the DSP variation will be set to Slow or Fast when the Organ Flutes voice is
selected (when the Voice Set function is ON — page 143).
Value Sets the DSP variation parameter value (e.g., “LFO Freq” for a Rotary Speaker effect) when the DSP
variation is turned on.
EQ Low The EQ parameters determine the Frequency and Gain of the Low and High EQ bands.
EQ High
PSR-2000/1000 91
Recording Your Performances and Creating Songs
— Song Creator
With these powerful yet easy-to-use song creating features, you can record your own keyboard performances and store
them for future recall. Several different recording methods are available: Quick Recording (page 93), which lets you
record easily and quickly; Multi Recording (page 94), which lets you record several different parts; and Step Recording
(page 96), which lets you enter notes one by one. Songs can include not only the voice settings for the keyboard
performance (Main, Layer, Left), but also the effects, vocal harmony and auto accompaniment parts. The recorded song
can be stored to internal memory or floppy disk (page 38, 44).

BACK NEXT
(STYLE) (L) (R)
DIGITAL
VOICE ORGAN &
SOUND CREATOR MAIN

STYLE
SWING & MARCH & B G
C H

PART D I
USER ORGAN FLUTES
MENU UPPER OCTAVE
DEMO E J
MUSIC
TAP TEMPO FINDER
HELP
RESET RESET OVER
STOP FUNCTION

FADE ACCESS EXIT
IN/OUT
STYLE CONTROL
AUTO OTS DATA ENTRY
ON
SONG DIGITAL RECORDING

EXTRA TRACK TRACK METRO-
(STYLE) (L) (R)
About Song Recording

■ Quick Recording (page 93)
This is the easiest recording method, and lets you quickly record the piano • The internal memory capacity of
song you are practicing. You can select from four parts: right hand, left hand the PSR-2000/1000 is about
and auto accompaniment/multi pad. For example, you can record only your 580KB (PSR-2000) / 260KB (PSR-
1000) . Memory capacity for 2DD
right hand performance, or you can simultaneously record both your right and 2HD floppy disks is about
hand and the auto accompaniment. 720KB and 1.44MB, respectively.
When you store data to these loca-
■ Multi Recording (page 94) tions, all file types of the PSR-2000/
1000 (Voice, Style, Song, Registra-
This lets you record a song with several different instrument sounds, and create tion, etc.) are stored together.
the sound of a full band or orchestra. Record the performance of each • The microphone input signal (PSR-
instrument individually and create fully orchestrated compositions. You can 2000 only) cannot be recorded.
• Songs recorded on the PSR-2000/
also record over an existing part on an internal song or a song on disk with
1000 are automatically recorded as
your own performance. SMF (Standard MIDI File format 0)
data. For details on SMF, see
■ Step Recording (page 96) page 159.
This method is like writing music notation on paper. It lets you enter each note • Playback of the recorded song data
can be transmitted from MIDI OUT,
individually, by specifying the pitch and length. This is ideal for making precise letting you play the sounds of a
recordings, or for recording parts that are difficult to play. connected external tone generator
(page 146).
■ Song Editing (page 102) • The volume level of each channel
of the song can be adjusted from
The PSR-2000/1000 also lets you edit the songs you’ve recorded by the Quick
the Mixing Console and the set-
Recording, Multi Recording and Step Recording methods. tings can be saved. Moreover, even
after you’ve set a voice for your
keyboard play during recording,
you can record voice selections, so
that the voice changes automati-
cally during playback (page 104).
92 PSR-2000/1000
Recording Your Performances and Creating Songs — Song Creator
Quick Recording
This is the easiest recording method — perfect for quickly recording and playing back a piano song you’re practicing, so
you can check your progress.
■ When creating a new song: ■ When recording over the part of an internal
song or a song on disk with your own
performance:
1 REC TOP START/STOP REW FF

1 Select the desired song (page 76, 78).
2 Select the voice and accompaniment style you want to use in the song.
If you want to record to the MAIN/Layer/Left voices, make sure to set the [MAIN]/[LAYER]/[LEFT] buttons to ON.
Make any other desired settings (Reverb, Chorus, etc.) as well.
If the "LAYER" or "LEFT" but-
3 Simultaneously hold down the [REC] button and press the button
corresponding to the track you want to record.
ton is on before pressing the
REC button, the correspond-
ing Layer and Left parts are
You can select TRACK 1 or TRACK 2 and the EXTRA TRACKS for recording at the automatically recorded to dif-
same time. ferent channels.
To record your keyboard performance:

Press either the [TRACK 1] or [TRACK 2] button. The performance of track 1/2
is recorded to the channel
To record the auto accompaniment and specified in the SONG SET-
REC EXTRA TRACK TRACK
multi pad performance: TRACKS 2 1 TING display (page 137).
Press the [EXTRA TRACKS] button.
(STYLE) (L) (R)
To stop recording, press You can overdub a second

the [REC] button again. right-hand performance onto
Track 2 after recording the
first right-hand performance
(including the layer voices)
on Track 1. To do this, set the
[LEFT] button to OFF and
4 Recording starts as soon as you play the keyboard.
You can also start recording by pressing the SONG/STYLE
repeat steps 2 and 3.
[START/STOP] button. Recording can also be started by

To pause, press the SONG
pressing down the foot pedal, if the song start/stop [START/STOP] button. To
function is properly assigned to the pedal (page 139). resume recording, press the
SONG [START/STOP] but-
ton again.
To stop recording, press the [RECORD] button again. You can also use the metro-
END Recording can also be stopped by pressing down the foot pedal, if the song
start/stop function is properly assigned to the pedal (page 139).
nome click as a guide while
recording.
The sound of the metronome
is not recorded.
■ Play back your new song CAUTION

To play back the performance you just recorded, return the song to the beginning by Turning off the power
using the [TOP] button and press the SONG [START/STOP] button. automatically deletes your
recorded performance. If
Playback stops automatically at the end of the song, and returns to the beginning of the
you wish to save the
song. recording, make sure to
You can edit the recorded song data from the SONG CREATOR (1 - 16) displays (page 105). store it to internal mem-
Press the [6▼] button from the Open/Save display for Song to store the recorded data ory (USER drive) or floppy
disk (page 38, 44).
(page 38, 44).
PSR-2000/1000 93
Multi Recording
This lets you record a song with several different instrument sounds on up to sixteen channels, and create the sound of
a full band or orchestra.
The structure of the channels and parts are shown in the chart below.
Parts Parts
Channels Available parts Channels Available parts
(default settings) (default settings)
Voice MAIN, LAYER, LEFT Accompaniment style Voice MAIN, LAYER, LEFT
1 Voice MAIN 9
Multi Pad1 RHYTHM 1 Multi Pad1
Multi Pad2 Accompaniment style Multi Pad2
2 Voice MAIN Multi Pad3 10 Multi Pad3
RHYTHM 2
Multi Pad4 Multi Pad4
Accompaniment style
3 Voice MAIN Accompaniment style RHYTHM 1 11 Accompaniment style RHYTHM 1
BASS
Accompaniment style RHYTHM 2 Accompaniment style RHYTHM 2
Accompaniment style BASS Accompaniment style Accompaniment style BASS
4 Voice MAIN 12
Accompaniment style CHORD1 CHORD1 Accompaniment style CHORD1
Accompaniment style CHORD2 Accompaniment style Accompaniment style CHORD2
5 Voice MAIN 13
Accompaniment style PAD CHORD2 Accompaniment style PAD
Accompaniment style PHRASE1 Accompaniment style Accompaniment style PHRASE1
6 Voice MAIN 14
Accompaniment style PHRASE2 PAD Accompaniment style PHRASE2
MIDI Accompaniment style MIDI
7 Voice MAIN 15
PHRASE1
Accompaniment style
8 Voice MAIN 16
PHRASE2
About the accompaniment style parts
Rhythm .....This is the basis for the accompaniment, containing the drum and percussion rhythm patterns. Usually one of the drum kits is used.
Bass..........The Bass part uses various appropriate instrument sounds to match the style, such as acoustic bass, synth bass, and others.
Chord........This is the rhythmic chord backing, commonly used with piano or guitar voices.
Pad ............This part features sustained chords and commonly uses lush sounds such as strings, organ, and choir.
Phrase ......This part is used for various embellishments and riffs that enhance the song, such as brass section accents and chord arpeggios.
■ When creating a new song: ■ When recording over the part of an internal
song or a song on disk with your own
performance:
1 REC TOP START/STOP REW FF

1 Select the desired song (page 76, 78).
2 Select the desired channel for recording (set it to “REC”) simultaneously

holding down the [REC] button and pressing the appropriate button [1▲▼] -
The part is automatically
selected when setting the
[8▲▼]. Several channels can be selected at the same time. several channels to “REC” at
the same time.
REC ......................... Enables recording for the channel
ON ......................... Enables playback of the channel
OFF......................... Mutes the channel
To cancel or disable
recording, press the REC
[REC] button once

again.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
94 PSR-2000/1000
3 Select the part you want to assign to the channel to be recorded.

This determines which of the keyboard-played parts (Main/Layer/Left) and the
When selecting the MIDI
part
accompaniment style parts (RHYTHM 1/2, BASS, etc.) are recorded to the • Setting a single channel
to MIDI
recording channels
All incoming data received
selected in step #2. via any of the MIDI chan-
For a list of the initial nels 1 - 16 is recorded.
default assignments, When using an external
MIDI keyboard or control-
see page 94. ler to record, this lets you
C record without having to
set the MIDI transmit
D
channel on the external
device.
• Setting several channels
to MIDI
When using an external
MIDI keyboard or control-
ler to record, this records
data only over the set
MIDI channel — meaning
the external device must
also be set to the same
channel.
4 Recording starts as soon as you play the keyboard.

You can also start recording by pressing the
SONG/STYLE [START/STOP] button. The A single part (with the
recording can be started/stopped by pressing the exception of MIDI parts) can-
not be assigned to several
foot pedal if the recording punch in/out function is channels.
set to the pedal (page 101).
The settings of the recorded

parts is stored temporarily
until you execute Quick
Recording, select a song, or
5 To stop recording, press the [REC] button again.
You can also use the foot pedal to stop recording by releasing it, if the
turn the power off.
recording punch in/out function has been assigned to the pedal (page 101).
To pause, press the SONG
[START/STOP] button. To
resume recording, press the
ton again.
6 Play back your new song.

To play back the performance you just recorded, return the song to the
beginning by using the [TOP] button and press the SONG [START/STOP] You can also use the metro-
button. nome click as a guide while
Playback stops automatically at the end of the song, and returns to the recording.
The sound of the metronome
beginning of the song. is not recorded.
CAUTION
Turning off the power
To record a new part, repeat steps 2 - 6 above. automatically deletes your
END You can set previously recorded parts to play back, and monitor them
while you record a new part. Continue in this way until you have a
recorded performance. If
you wish to save the
recording, make sure to
finished song. store it to internal mem-
You can edit the recorded song data from the SONG CREATOR (1 - 16) ory (USER drive) or floppy
displays (page 105). disk (page 38, 44).
Press the [6▼] button from the Open/Save display for Song to store
the recorded data (page 38, 44).
PSR-2000/1000 95
Recording Individual Notes — Step Record

This method lets you create a song by entering notes one by one, without having to perform them in real time. This is
also convenient for recording the chords and the melody separately.
Operation
1 Select an existing song (page 76, 78) to which

you want to add parts or re-record. If you want 3 Press the [A] button to call up the Song
Creator display.
to create a new song, simultaneously press the
[RECORD] button and the [TOP] button.
2 Press the [DIGITAL RECORDING] button.

DIGITAL
STUDIO
C
SOUND CREATOR D
E
DIGITAL RECORDING
MIXING CONSOLE
PART
4 Using the [BACK]/[NEXT]

buttons, select the “1 -16”
BACK NEXT
tab for recording melodies

and other parts, or select
the “CHD” (Chord) tab for F
recording chords, and after G

selecting the “1 - 16” tab,
H
select a record channel
with the [F] (CH) button. I
Any voice, effect and other

settings you make in the
5 Call up the Step Record
display by pressing the
Mixing Console are automat-
ically cancelled when you
call up the CHD (Chord)
[G] button. F
page.
G
I
The voices in the USER and
J FLOPPY DISK pages can-
not be selected for Step
recording. You can select
voices from the PRESET
page; however, these may
sound slightly different from
the original voice.
96 PSR-2000/1000
6 First, select the desired voice. To enter the note, first specify the length and loudness in this display,
then enter the pitch by actually playing the note on the keyboard.
Moves the cursor position A F

up and down.
B G Determines the velocity
(loudness) of the note to be
Returns the cursor to the C H entered (only when recording
beginning of the song (the D I
the melody). For information
first note of the first on velocity settings, see below.
measure). E J
Determines the length of the
note (as a percentage) from
the position at which it is to be
entered. (This is available only
when recording the melody.)
For information on gate time
settings, see below.
Use these to move the Each press of this button toggles
selected event, in units of 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 among the three basic note
measures (BAR), beat, and selectors at the bottom of the
clocks. For information on display: normal, dotted, and triplet.
measure/beat/clock settings, (This is available only when
see below. Specifies the type of note to be input next. (Sixteenth recording the melody.)
notes are available only when recording the melody.) Deletes the event at the cursor.
This also determines the position to which the pointer
will advance after a note has been entered.
To close the STEP RECORD display, press the [EXIT] button. Make sure to store the recorded
END data by pressing the [I] (SAVE) button (page 44).
■ Measure/Beat/Clock
Measure 1 2
Beat 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4
Clock 000- 000- 000- 000- 000- 000- 000- 000-
1919 1919 1919 1919 1919 1919 1919 1919
■ Velocity
The table below shows the available settings and the corresponding velocity values.
Kbd. Vel fff ff f mf mp p pp ppp
Actual
playing 127 111 95 79 63 47 31 15
strength
■ Gate Time
The following settings are available:
Normal ....................... 80%
Tenuto ........................ 99%
Staccato...................... 40%
Staccatissimo .............. 20%
Manual ....................... The gate time (note length) can be specified as a percentage by using the [DATA ENTRY] dial.
PSR-2000/1000 97
Recording Melodies — Step Record (Note)

In this section, we’ll show you how to use Step Recording
by guiding you through this actual music example,
shown at right.
The operations here apply to step 6 on page 97.
1 1-2 While holding down this note...
The notation display on the instrument (PSR-2000) may not be accu-

rate, especially for tied notes or longer notes. To have the notation
1-1 Select this note. 1-3 ...press this (to input a tie). displayed accurately, set the gate time to tenuto by using the [H] but-
ton, and input the notes as desired.
2 2-2
2-3
2-4
2-1 Select this note.
3 3-1 Press this button to

display the dotted notes.
3-3
4 4-1 Call up the normal notes

by pressing this button.
4-3
To input rests, simply move the measure/beat/clock location for the desired rest time, then input the next note.
■ Play back the newly created melody

Use the [C] ( ▲ ) button to move the cursor to the beginning of the song, and press the SONG [START/STOP] button
to hear the newly entered notes. To actually enter the recorded data, press the [EXIT] button. The entered data can be
edited from the SONG CREATOR (1 - 16) display (page 105).
98 PSR-2000/1000
Recording Chord Changes for the Auto Accompaniment — Step

Record (Chord)
The Chord Step recording feature makes it possible to record auto accompaniment chord changes one at a time with
precise timing. Since the changes don’t have to be played in real time, you can easily create complex, tight chord
changes — over which you can record the melody in normal fashion.
Entering Chords and Sections (Chord Step)

For example, you can input the following chord progression by the procedure described below.
MAIN A BREAK MAIN B
Enter the chords by using the currently

selected chord fingering method in the Auto
Accompaniment section of the keyboard.
C F G F G7 C
1 Press the MAIN [A] button to specify the section, and enter the chords as shown at right.
MAIN A
MAIN C F G
C
001:1:000
F
001:3:000
Select this note value and play

G
002:1:000
the chords indicated at right.
2 Press the [BREAK] button to specify the Break section, and enter the chords as shown at right.
MAIN A BREAK
C F G F G7
F
BREAK INTRO 002:3:000
G7
002:4:000

PSR-2000/1000 99
3 Press the MAIN [B] button to specify the section and enter the chord indicated at right.
MAIN A BREAK MAIN B
MAIN
C F G F G7 C
C
003:1:000

■ Play back the newly created chord progression

Use the [C] ( ▲ ) button to move the cursor to the beginning of the song, and press the To enter a fill-in, press the
SONG [START/STOP] button to hear the newly entered notes. To actually enter the [AUTO FILL IN] button and
recorded data, press the [EXIT] button. The entered data can be edited from the SONG press one of the MAIN [A]–
[D] buttons.
CREATOR (CHD) display (page 106). Finally, press the [F] (EXPAND) button from the
SONG CREATOR (CHD) display in order to convert the input data into song data.
END Mark
An “END” mark is shown in
the display, indicating the
end of the song data.
The actual position of the
End mark differs depending
on the section that is input at
the end of the song. When
an Ending section is input,
the End mark automatically
follows the Ending data.
When a section other than
Ending is input, the End
mark is set two measures
after the final section.
The End mark can be freely
set to any position desired.
100 PSR-2000/1000
Select the Recording Options: Starting, Stopping,

Punching In/Out — Rec Mode
From this display you can set up how recording is started and stopped for either Quick Recording or Multi Recording.
To call up these settings, select the REC MODE display by using the [BACK][NEXT] button, after performing operation
steps 1 - 3 on page 96.
These settings determine how recording will
start.
Normal F
Pressing the SONG [START/STOP] button
G
enables Synchro standby and overwrite
recording starts as soon as you start playing Calls up the SONG display,
H
the keyboard. from which you can save the
I edited data.
First Key On
J
Overwrite recording starts as soon as you
start playing the keyboard. This setting also Determines the Punch Out
preserves the previous lead-in data, letting measure — the measure at
you record over the original lead-in without which Punch In overwrite
erasing it. recording stops (when
“PUNCH OUT AT” is
Punch In At selected).
The song plays back normally up to the
indicated Punch In measure (set by the When this is set to ON, you
[3▲▼] buttons), then starts overwrite 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 can use the foot pedal 2 to
recording at that Punch In measure. control the punch-in and
punch-out points. (The current
Determines the measure at which Punch function assignment of the
In overwrite recording starts (when foot pedal is cancelled.) Press
These settings determine how recording will stop as well
“PUNCH IN AT” is selected). and hold down the foot pedal
as what happens to previously recorded data.
to record. Recording stops
Replace All when you release the pedal.
This deletes all data following the point at which recording is stopped.
Punch Out
This maintains all data following the point at which recording is stopped.
Punch Out At
Overwrite recording continues until the indicated Punch Out measure (set by the [6▲▼] buttons),
then stops at that Punch Out measure, after which song playback continues normally.
About Punch In/Out

This feature is useful primarily for re-recording or replacing a specific section of an already recorded channel. The
illustrations below indicate a variety of situations in which selected measures in an eight-measure phrase are re-recorded.
Original data
REC START setting 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 *1 When measures 1 - 2 are not
REC END setting overwritten, recording starts
Stop recording *2
from measure 3.
Start/start overwrite recording *1
NORMAL
REPLACE ALL 1 2 3 4 5 Deleted
*2 You’ll have to press the [REC]
button at the end of 5 measures.
Start/start overwrite recording *1 Stop recording *2
NORMAL
PUNCH OUT 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Stop overwrite recording/
Start/start overwrite recording *1 play original data
NORMAL
PUNCH OUT AT=006 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Start/ Start playing the keys/
play back original data start overwrite recording Stop recording *2
FIRST KEY ON
Start/ Start playing the keys/

play back original data start overwrite recording Stop recording *2
FIRST KEY ON
PUNCH OUT 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Start/ Start playing the keys/ Stop overwrite recording/
play back original data start overwrite recording play original data
FIRST KEY ON
PUNCH OUT AT=006 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Start/
play back original data Start overwrite recording Stop recording *2
PUNCH IN AT=003
Start/ Stop recording *2

play back original data Start overwrite recording
PUNCH IN AT=003
PUNCH OUT 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Start/ Stop overwrite recording/ Previously recorded data
play back original data Start overwrite recording play original data
PUNCH IN AT=003 Newly recorded data
PUNCH OUT AT=006 1 2 3 4 5 7 Deleted data
PSR-2000/1000 101
Editing a Recorded Song

Whether you’ve recorded a song using Quick Recording, Multi Recording, or Step Recording, you can use the editing
features to change the song data.
Editing Channel-related Parameters — Channel

Calling up the operations here apply to step 4 on page 96. To call up the display shown below, use the [BACK]/[NEXT]
buttons.
Quantize
Quantize lets you “clean up” or tighten the timing of a previously recorded channel. For example, the following
musical passage has been written with exact quarter-note and eighth-note values.
Even though you think you may have recorded the passage accurately, your actual performance may be slightly ahead
of or behind the beat. Quantize allows you to align all the notes in a channel so that the timing is absolutely accurate to
the specified note value (see below).
Calls up the SONG display,

from which you can save
A F the edited data.
Use this to select the
desired edit operation. B G
C H
Determines how strongly the
notes will be quantized. If a
Executes the Quantize D I value less than 100% is
operation. After the selected, notes will be
E J
operation is completed, this moved toward the specified
button changes to [UNDO], quantization beats only by
letting you restore the the specified amount.
original data if you’re not Applying less than 100%
satisfied with the Quantize quantization lets you
results. The Undo function preserve some of the
only has one level; only the “human” feel in the
previous operation can be recording.
undone.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Selects the quantize size (resolution).
Selects the desired channel See the below for the details.
to be quantized.
■ About Quantize Size

Set the Quantize size to correspond to the smallest notes in the channel you are working with. For example, if the
data was recorded with both quarter notes and eighth notes, use 1/8 note for the Quantize size. If you apply a 1/4
note Quantize size, the eighth notes would be moved on top of the quarter notes.
One measure of eighth notes before quantization After 1/8 note quantization
Quantize Size
1/4 note 1/8 note 1/16 note 1/32 note 1/16 note +
1/8 note triplet *
1/4 note triplet 1/8 note triplet 1/16 note triplet 1/8 note + 1/16 note +
1/8 note triplet * 1/16 note triplet *
The three Quantize settings marked with asterisks (*) are exceptionally convenient, since they allow you to quantize two different
note values at the same time, without compromising the quantization of either one. For example, if you have both straight 1/8 notes
and 1/8 note triplets recorded to the same channel, and you quantize to straight 1/8 notes, all notes in the channel are quantized to
straight 1/8 notes — completely eliminating any triplet feel in the rhythm. However, if you use the 1/8 note + 1/8 note triplet setting,
both the straight and triplet notes will be quantized correctly.
102 PSR-2000/1000
Delete
This lets you delete recorded data in the specified channel.
A F
Use these to select the
C H
Deletes all data in the D I Calls up the SONG display,

selected channel. After the from which you can save
E J
operation is completed, this the edited data.
button changes to [UNDO],
letting you restore the
original data. The Undo
function only has one level;
only the previous operation
can be undone.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 These select the channel

to be deleted.
Mix
This function lets you mix the data of two channels and place the results in a different channel. It also lets you copy the
data from one channel to another.
All data other than the mixed

note data is derived from the
A F
Use these to select the Source 1 channel.
C H
Executes the Mix operation. D I Calls up the SONG display,

After the operation is from which you can save
E J
completed, this button the edited data.
changes to [UNDO], letting
you restore the original data
if you’re not satisfied with
the Mix results. The Undo
function only has one level;
only the previous operation
can be undone.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
These let you specify the two Determines the channel into which the
source channels to be mixed. mix or copy results will be placed.
If “COPY” is selected here, the data

from Source 1 is copied to the
Destination channel.
PSR-2000/1000 103
Channel Transpose
This allows you to transpose the recorded data of individual channels up or down by a maximum of two octaves in
semitone increments.
Toggles between the two

channel displays: Channels
A F 1 - 8, and Channels 9 - 16.
desired edit operation. B G To simultaneously set all
channels to the same value,
C H
adjust the Channel
Executes the Channel D I Transpose for one of the
Transpose operation. After channels while holding
E J
the operation is completed, down this button.
this button changes to
[UNDO], letting you restore
the original data if you’re not Calls up the SONG display,
satisfied with the Channel from which you can save
Transpose results. The the edited data.
Undo function only has one
level; only the previous
operation can be undone. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Determines the amount of Channel Transpose for each channel.
Set Up
You can change the initial settings of the song — such as voice, level, and tempo — to the current settings of the mixing
console or panel controls.
A F
C H
Executes the SET D I Calls up the SONG display,

UP operation. Once from which you can save
E J
SET UP has been the edited data.
executed, the
operation cannot be
cancelled or undone.
Use this to checkmark the

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
selected item.
Checkmarked items are
stored with the song.
Determines which playback features and functions will be automatically called up along with the selected song. All events, with the exception
of “KEYBOARD VOICE,” can be recorded only at the beginning of the song.
Before you select or checkmark any of these items (other than Keyboard Voice), make sure to return the song to the beginning by using the
[TOP] button, and stop playback.
Song ............................ Stores the tempo setting and all settings made from the Mixing Console.
Keyboard Voice........... This lets you automatically set the voice of the keyboard-played parts (Main/Layer/Left) when playing back the song.
Stores the keyboard-played voice and the part ON/OFF settings. To record a voice change for the keyboard-played
part in the middle of a song, stop the song at the desired point, make the voice change, and press the [D] (EXECUTE)
button.
Lyrics language.......... Stores the settings of the Lyrics display.
Score Setting.............. Stores the settings of the Score display (PSR-2000 only).
Mic. Settings ............... Stores the microphone settings in the mixing console (PSR-2000 only).
104 PSR-2000/1000
Editing Note Events — 1 - 16

From this display, you can edit individual note events (see below). Calling up operations here apply to step 4 on
page 96. Use the [BACK]/[NEXT] buttons to call up the display below.
Determines the channel to

Use these to move the be edited.
cursor up/down and select Calls up the Step Recording
A F
the desired event. display (page 97).
B G
Returns to the beginning Calls up the Filter display
position of the current song C H (page 107), letting you select
(the first note of the first only the events you wish to
D I
measure). shown in the Event List.
Use these to move the E J
Calls up the SONG display,
cursor left/right and select
from which you can save
the desired parameter of
the edited data.
the highlighted event. Keep
in mind that moving the Holding this button down
cursor away from the just- while using the [A] and [B]
edited value automatically buttons lets you select
enters that value. multiple events.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Pastes all cut or copied events to

Determines the current the selected location.
position of the event being
edited. If the value at the cursor has been
changed, pressing this restores the
For coarse adjustment of the event value. original value.
Copies all selected events. The
copied events can be pasted to
For fine adjustment of the event value. another location.
Cuts (deletes) all selected events. The cut events

Deletes the
are copied and can be pasted to another location. To actually enter an edited
event at the
cursor position. value, move the cursor away
Adds a new event to the Event List. from the value or press the
ton.
Note Events
Parameter Description
Note Determines the pitch, velocity (volume) and length of the note.
Determines the control change number and value. For details on control change messages, refer to the separate
Ctrl (Control change)
Data List booklet (MIDI Data Format).
Determines the voice (program) number. For details on program change messages and how to set them, refer to
Prog (Program change)
the separate Data List booklet (Voice List).
P.Bnd (Pitch bend) Determines the pitch bend value.
A.T. (After touch) Determines the after touch value.
The sound of the voices

recorded with Step recording
may sound slightly different
from the original.
PSR-2000/1000 105
Editing Chord Events — CHD

From this display, you can edit the chord events you’ve recorded to the song.
Calling up operations here apply to step 4 on page 96. Use the [BACK]/[NEXT] buttons to call up the display below.
With the exception of the [F] (EXPAND) button, the operations here are the same as those in Editing Note Events
(page 105).
A F
Press this to convert the
recorded chord and section
B G entries into song data.
C H
D I
To actually enter an edited
E J value, move the cursor away
from the value or press the
ton.
Chord Events
Style (Accompaniment Displays the accompaniment style name. To enter an accompaniment style, call up the STYLE display and select
style) the desired style.
Tempo Determines the tempo value.
Chord Specifies the chord — its root note, chord type, and on-bass note.
Sect (Section) Specifies the section — its name and variation.
OnOff (Channel on/off) Determines whether specific channels (rhythm, bass, etc.) are turned on/off.
CH.Vol (Channel volume) Determines the level of specific channels (rhythm, bass, etc.).
S.Vol (Style volume) Determines the level of the entire accompaniment style.
Editing System Events — SYS/EX. (System Exclusive)

From this display, you can edit recorded System events.
Calling up operations here apply to step 4 on page 96. Use the [BACK]/[NEXT] buttons to call up the display below. The
operations here are the same as those in Editing Note Events (page 105).
System Events
ScBar (Score initial measure) This determines the number of the top measure. The measure number is indicated in the MAIN display or in the
music notation (PSR-2000 only). Only one value can be specified at the beginning of the song data.
Tempo Determines the tempo value.
Time (Time signature) Determines the time signature.
Key Determines the key, as well as the major/minor setting.
XG Prm (XG parameters) Allows you to make various detailed changes to the data. For more information on XG parameters, refer to the
separate Data List booklet (MIDI Data Format).
SYS/EX. (System Exclusive) Displays the System Exclusive data in the song. This does not let you change the actual contents of the data;
however, it lets you delete, cut, copy, and paste the data.
Meta (Meta event) Displays the SMF meta events in the song. This does not let you change the actual contents of the data;
however, it lets you delete, cut, copy, and paste the data.
106 PSR-2000/1000
Inputting and Editing Lyrics

This convenient function lets you enter the song name and the lyrics for the song. It also lets you change or correct
already existing lyrics. For more information on lyric events, see the chart below. Calling up operations here apply to
step 4 on page 96. Use the [BACK]/[NEXT] buttons to call up the display below. The operations here are the same as
those in Editing Note Events (page 105).
In the following example, we’ll rewrite a portion of the lyrics to one of the songs, “Twinkle Twinkle Little Star.”
Select the internal song “Twinkle Twinkle Little Star.” The method for selection is the same as described on pages 76 and 83.
1 Move the cursor

to the event A F
containing the B G
lyric “star.”
C
D
H
I
4 Press this button
to save the newly
2 Move the cursor to
the word “star.” E J
changed lyric
data.
3 Use these buttons to call up

the Lyric display, from
which you can input lyrics. To actually enter an edited
From the Lyric display value, move the cursor away
(page 45), enter the new 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
from the value or press the
word, “(your name).”
ton.
Lyrics Events
Name (Song name) Determines the song name. This calls up the NAME display, from which you can enter the name.
Lyrics Allows you to enter lyrics.
Code (Other controls) CR : Enters a line break in the lyrics text.
LF : Deletes the currently displayed lyrics and displays the next set of lyrics.
Customizing the Event List — Filter

This function lets you determine which event types will be shown in the event editing displays. To select an event for
display, checkmark the box corresponding to the event name. To filter out an event so that it is not shown on the list,
remove the checkmark so that the box is empty.
To call up the display below, press the [H] (FILTER) button from any of the following displays: CHD, 1 - 16, SysEX, or
LYRICS (page 105 - page 107).
Calls up the Main Filter

display. For more
information on each event A F
Enters checkmarks for all
type, refer to the separate items.
B G
Data List booklet (MIDI
Data Format). C H
Selects only note data;
Calls up the Control D I checkmarks for all other
Change Filter display. For boxes are removed.
E J
more information on each
event type, refer to the Reverses the checkmark
separate Data List booklet settings for all boxes. In
(MIDI Data Format). other words, this enters
checkmarks to all boxes that
Calls up the Accompaniment Filter display.
were previously un-checked
For more information on each event type,
and vice versa.
refer to the separate Data List booklet
(MIDI Data Format).
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Enters/removes the checkmark
EXIT
for the selected item.
END Selects the item, scrolling up/

down one item at a time.
When “MAIN FILTER” or “ACCOMPANIMENT FILTER” is selected, these select the

Execute the settings by item, scrolling up/down to the top or the bottom. When “CONTROL CHANGE FILTER”
pressing the [EXIT] button. is selected, these select the item, scrolling up/down eight items at a time.
PSR-2000/1000 107
Creating Accompaniment Styles — Style Creator
This powerful feature lets you create your own original styles, which can then be used for auto accompaniment — just
as with the preset styles.

DIGITAL RECORDING LEFT
BACK NEXT
(STYLE) (L) (R)
DIGITAL
VOICE ORGAN &
SOUND CREATOR MAIN

STYLE
SWING & MARCH & B G
C H

PART D I
USER ORGAN FLUTES
MENU UPPER OCTAVE
DEMO E J
MUSIC
TAP TEMPO FINDER
HELP
RESET RESET OVER
MASTER VOLUME
STOP FUNCTION
STYLE CONTROL SIGNAL
ONE TOUCH SETTING

MULTI PAD DIRECT
ACCESS
BALANCE
EXIT
ENTER MAIN ENDING SYNC. SYNC.
FADE
IN/OUT
ACMP1 2 3 4 5 6
BREAK
7 8
INTRO / rit. STOP START START/STOP
CHANNEL ON/OFF
MIN MAX
AUTO OTS
STYLE CONTROL PART REGISTRATION MEMORY
FILL IN LINK
AUTO OTS DATA ENTRY
ON
About Creating Accompaniment Styles

The chart at right shows the basic parts (or “channels”) that make up each section
Section Channel
of an accompaniment style. To create an accompaniment style, record patterns to
the various channels one by one, for each of the sections you want to create. INTRO A - D
MAIN A - D RHYTHM 1, RHYTHM 2,
■ Realtime Recording (page 110) FILL IN A - D
BASS, CHORD 1,
CHORD 2, PAD,
You can record accompaniment styles by simply playing the parts from the BREAK PHRASE 1, PHRASE 2
keyboard in real time. However, you don’t have to record every part yourself ENDING A - D
— you can choose an existing preset accompaniment style that is close to the
style you want, then add or replace parts in that style as needed to create your
For information on the part
own custom style. structure of accompaniment
styles, see page 94.
Realtime Recording Characteristics
• Loop recording
Since auto accompaniment playback repeats the accompaniment patterns of several measures in a “loop,” you can
also record patterns in a loop. For example, if you start recording with a two-measure Main section, the two
measures are repeatedly recorded. Notes that you record will play back from the next loop (repetition), letting you
record new material while hearing the parts you previously recorded.
• Overdub recording
This feature lets you record new material to a track already containing recorded data, without deleting the original
data. In style recording, the recorded data remains intact, unless you specifically delete it yourself. For example, if
you start recording with a two-measure Main section, the two measures are repeated. As you record notes to each
pass of the loop (repetition), those notes play back from the next loop, letting you overdub new material while
hearing the previous parts.
8Beat 1 60’s 8 Beat
■ Step Recording (page 111) Rhythm 1 Rhythm 1
This method is like writing music notation on paper, since it allows Rhythm 2 Rhythm 2
Bass Bass
you to enter each note or individually, and specify its length. This is Chord 1 Chord 1
Rhythm 1
ideal for making precise recordings, or for recording parts that are Chord 2 Chord 2
Pad Rhythm 2 Pad
difficult to play. Phrase 1 Bass Phrase 1
Phrase 2 Chord 1 Phrase 2
■ Assembling an Accompaniment Style (page 112) Chord 2
8Beat 2
This convenient feature lets you create composite styles by combining Pad
Rhythm 1 Phrase 1
various patterns from the internal preset accompaniment styles. For Rhythm 2 Phrase 2
example, if you want to create your own original 8-beat style, you Bass
Chord 1
could take rhythm patterns from the “8 Beat 1” style, use the bass Chord 2
pattern from “8 Beat 2,” and import the chord patterns from the “60’s 8 Pad
Phrase 1
Beat” style — combining the various elements to create one Phrase 2
accompaniment style. Any voice can be selected for
the RHY1 channel, with the
■ Editing the created Accompaniment Style (page 113) exception of Organ Flutes.
With the editing features, you can custom edit the styles you’ve
created by real time recording, step recording, and assembling from other styles.
108 PSR-2000/1000
Style File Format

Source Pattern These are the patterns
The Style File Format (SFF) combines all of recorded to the
Yamaha’s auto accompaniment know-how into 1 Source Root (root note of basic chord) accompaniment styles
2 Source Chord (type of basic chord)
a single unified format. By using the edit (page 116).
functions, you can take full advantage of the Chord changes (in Auto Accompa-
This data is created by
SFF format and freely create your own styles. niment section of the keyboard)
chords played in the
The chart at right indicates the process by Pitch Conversion Auto Accompaniment
which the accompaniment is played back. section of the
3 NTR (Note Transposition Rule)
keyboard (page 62).
(This does not apply to the rhythm tracks.)The 4 NTT (Note Transposition Table)
basic or “source” pattern in the chart is the
original style data. This source pattern is These settings are
recorded using accompaniment style Other Settings edited from the
PARAMETER display.
recording (see below). 5 High Key (threshold of the pitch
These parameters
As shown in the chart at right, the actual conversion)
determine how the
6 Note Limit (soundable range)
output of the accompaniment is determined by 7 RTR (Retrigger Rule; how the pitches of
pitch of the source
various parameter settings and chord changes pattern is converted
the chord change)
when you play chords
(played in Auto Accompaniment section of the in the Auto
keyboard) entered to this source pattern. Accompaniment
Output section of the
keyboard.
Operation
1 Select the desired accompaniment style

for editing. To record a new 3
accompaniment style from scratch, call A
up the BASIC page in the Style Creator
B
display and select “New Style” by
C
pressing the [C] button.
D
2 DIGITAL
STUDIO
SOUND CREATOR
DIGITAL RECORDING
MIXING CONSOLE
PART
4 Record and edit the accompaniment style. For details on the

operations for each display, refer to the explanations starting
5 Call up the Style display
by pressing the [I]
on the next page. (SAVE) button (in
BACK NEXT Assembly page: [J]
button), then save the
recorded / edited data
to the USER or FLOPPY
Use the [BACK]/ DISK page.
F [NEXT] buttons to
G
select the various
pages.
H
I
Press the [EXIT]
J
button to close
END the STYLE
CREATOR
display.
PSR-2000/1000 109
Realtime Recording — Basic

You can use the Realtime Recording features to create your own accompaniment style — either from scratch or based
on the preset accompaniment data. The operations here apply to step 4 on page 109.
1 Select the desired channel for recording by simultaneously holding down the [F] (REC CH) button and
pressing the appropriate [1▲▼] - [8▲▼] button.
Before recording to one of the non-rhythm channels (BASS - PHR 2), make sure to delete the existing data
of the appropriate channel. You can make other settings (see the box “Other Parameters in the BASIC page”
on page 111) after closing the REC CHANNEL display by pressing the [EXIT] button. To call up the REC
CHANNEL display again, press the [F] (REC CH) button.
When this button is pressed, “DELETE” will appear over
channels containing data. To delete data from a specific
channel, simultaneously hold down this button and press
Calls up the display for changing the the appropriate [1▲] - [8▲] button. To release or cancel the
tempo or beat (time signature). selection, press the [1▼] -
[8▼] button corresponding
to the channel you wish to
cancel. As long as you
Selects an empty style, continue to hold down the
A F
allowing you to create a [J] button, you can toggle
new style from scratch. B G
between deleting and
C H
restoring the selected data.
Releasing the [J] button
D I permanently deletes the
E J
data. Before recording to
one of the non-rhythm
Available only when the channel is set to channels (BASS - PHR 2),
[RHY1] or [RHY2], this lets you delete make sure to delete the
specific percussion sounds during existing data of the
recording. Simultaneously hold down this appropriate channel.
button and press the key corresponding to
the instrument you want to delete. REC.... Channel is enabled for recording.
ON ...... Channel is enabled for playback.
OFF .... Channel is muted.
2 First, select the desired voice. Start recording by pressing the STYLE [START/
STOP] button.
If you’ve enabled Sync Start
(by pressing the SYNC.
START button), you can
The selected section of the style starts playing back. Since the rhythm pattern start recording by simply
loops repeatedly, you can record new sounds and notes on each pass while pressing a key on the key-
listening to the pattern. Icons above the keys conveniently indicate the board.
percussion instruments assigned to the keys.
3 Stop recording by pressing the STYLE [START/STOP] button again.
• Only Drum Kit/SFX Kit can

be selected for the RHY 2
channel.
With the REC CHANNEL • For the non-rhythm chan-
END display shown, close the

nels (BASS - PHR 2), all-
voices with the exception
of the Organ Fultes voice/
[EXIT] button. Drum Kit/SFX Kit can be
selected.
110 PSR-2000/1000
Other Parameters in the Basic Display You can also select the
[I] (SAVE) button desired section for recording
by pressing appropriate
Calls up the Style display for saving the accompaniment style data. panel button. Pressing one
[3▲▼][4▲▼] (Section) buttons of the Section buttons calls
Determines the section to be recorded. up the SECTION display,
from which you can change
[5▲▼][6▲▼] (Pattern Length) buttons sections by using the [6▲▼]/
Determines the length of the selected section’s pattern in measures (1 - 32). The Fill [7▲▼] buttons. To actually
In/Break section is fixed at a length of one measure. enter the change, press the
[8▲] button.To select the Fill
[D] (Execute) button In section, press the [AUTO
Executes the Pattern Length change. FILL IN] button.
Recording — Precautions
• The basic chord used for the accompaniment style is called the source chord.
All chords that play and the pitches that sound are derived from the source
chord. When recording the Main and Fill In sections (for a source chord of C R C C R C
CM7), keep the following points in mind: C = chord note
C, R = recommended note
* When recording to the Bass or Phrase channels, try to use only the
recommended notes; this will ensure that you can play various chords with the accompaniment style and get
optimum results. (Other notes may work, providing you use them as short passing tones.)
* When recording to the Chord or Pad channels, use only the notes of the CM7 chord; this will ensure that
you can play various chords with the accompaniment style and get optimum results. (Other notes may work,
providing you use them as short passing tones.)
The source chord is set by default to CM7; however, you can change this to any chord you prefer. Refer to the
section “Making Style File Format Settings – Parameter” on page 116.
• When recording Intro and Ending sections, you can ignore the source chord and use any notes or chord
progressions you like. In this case, if you set the NTR parameter to “ROOT TRANSPOSE” and NTT to
“HARMONIC MINOR” or “MELODIC MINOR” (in the PARAMETER page), the normal pitch conversions that
would result from playing different chords are cancelled (for playback) — meaning that the accompaniment
pitch conversion will only occur for changes in the root note or major/minor shifts.
Step Recording
With this method, you can create a style pattern by entering notes and other data individually, without having to
perform them in real time. The operations here apply to step 4 on page 109.
The actual recording process is the same as in Step Recording of songs (page 96), with the exception of the points
described below. You can also edit each event from the Edit page, and the editing process the same as in editing songs
(page 105).
• In song recording, the end mark position can be changed freely. However, it cannot be changed when creating
accompaniment styles. This is because the length of the accompaniment style is automatically fixed according to the
selected section. For example, when creating an accompaniment style based on a four-measure section, the end mark
position is automatically set to the end of the fourth measure, and cannot be changed from the Step Record screen.
• When editing the data recorded on the Edit page, you can switch between the type of data you want to edit (event
data or control data). Press the [F] (TRACK EVT) button to switch between the Event display (Note, Control Change,
etc.) and the Control display (System Exclusive, etc.).
Make sure to set the record channel from another display (e.g., BASIC display; page 109) beforehand.
PSR-2000/1000 111
Assembling an Accompaniment Style —Assembly

This convenient function lets you combine accompaniment elements — such as rhythm, bass, and chord patterns —
from existing styles, and use them to create your own original accompaniment styles. The operations here apply to step
4 on page 109.
1 These let you select the accompaniment style that

will be used for each channel of your original 3 After repeating steps 1 and 2
as desired, press the [J] (SAVE)
style. Select the desired channel by pressing the
button to save the assembled
[A] – [D], [F] – [I] buttons and press the same
style data. From here, you can
button to call up the Style screen, from which you
store the settings of all
can select the accompaniment style.
channels (RHYTHM 1,
RHYTHM 2, BASS, etc.) to a
single accompaniment style.
A F
B G
C H
D I
E J
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 If you change the section

and channel in steps #1 and
#2, the currently specified
section and channel are also
changed. The channels
being recorded are also
2 Selects the style section and

channel that will be copied to
changed and recording is
stopped automatically.
the corresponding channels,
selected with the [A]-[D] and
[F]-[I] buttons above.
The PLAY TYPE parameter
affects only the playback,
and does not change the
actual accompaniment style
Determines the playback settings for each channel. You can data.
assemble the accompaniment style while the style section and
channel that will be copied are playing.
SOLO ............Mutes all but the selected channel. RHYTHM
channels set to REC in the REC CHANNEL display
(page 111) are played back simultaneously.
ON ................Plays back the selected channels. Any channels set
to ON in the REC CHANNEL display (page 110)
are played back simultaneously.
OFF ...............If the selected channel is set to ON in the REC
CHANNEL display (page 110), OFF does not
appear and is not available.
112 PSR-2000/1000
Edit the Created Accompaniment Style

Change the Rhythmic Feel — Groove and Dynamics
These versatile features give you a wide variety of tools for changing the rhythmic feel of your created accompaniment
style. The operations here apply to step 4 on page 109.
■ Groove

desired edit operation. A F
Calls up the Style display and
B G lets you store the edited
accompaniment style data.
C H
D I
E J
Executes the Groove operation. After

the operation is completed, this button
changes to [UNDO], letting you
restore the original data if you’re not
satisfied with the Groove results. The Determines the settings for each of the
Undo function only has one level; only Groove parameters (see the list below).
the previous operation can be undone.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Groove parameters
Original Beat Specifies the beats to which Groove timing is to be applied. In other words, if “8 Beat” is selected, Groove timing is
applied to the 8th notes; if “12 Beat” is selected, Groove timing is applied to 8th-note triplets.
Beat Converter Actually changes the timing of the beats (specified in the ORIGINAL BEAT parameter above) to the selected value. For
example, when ORIGINAL BEAT is set to “8 Beat” and BEAT CONVERTER is set to “12,” all 8th notes in the section are
shifted to 8th-note triplet timing. The “16A” and “16B” Beat Converter which appear when ORIGINAL BEAT is set to “12
Beat” are variations on a basic 16th-note setting.
Swing Produces a “swing” feel by shifting the timing of the back beats, depending on the ORIGINAL BEAT parameter above.
For example, if the specified ORIGINAL BEAT value is 8th notes, the Swing parameter will selectively delay the 2nd, 4th,
6th, and 8th beats of each measure to create a swing feel. The settings “A” through “E” produce different degrees of
swing, with “A” being the most subtle and “E” being the most pronounced.
Fine Selects a variety of Groove “templates” to be applied to the selected section. The “PUSH” settings cause certain beats to
be played early, while “HEAVY” settings delay the timing of certain beats. The numbered settings (2, 3, 4, 5) determine
which beats are to be affected. All beats up to the specified beat —but not including the first beat — will be played early
or delayed (for example, the 2nd and 3rd beats, if “3” is selected). In all cases, “A” types produce minimum effect, “B”
types produce medium effect, and “C” types produce maximum effect.
PSR-2000/1000 113
■ Dynamics

desired edit operation.
Calls up the Style display
A F
and lets you store the
B G
edited accompaniment
style data.
C H
D I
E J
Executes the Dynamics operation. After the

operation is completed, this button changes
to [UNDO], letting you restore the original
data if you’re not satisfied with the
Dynamics results. The Undo function only
has one level; only the previous operation
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
can be undone.
Determines the settings for each of the

Select the desired channel to which
Dynamics parameters (see the list
Dynamics is to be applied.
below).
Dynamics parameters
Velocity is determined by
Accent Type Selects the type of accent.
how strongly you play the
Strength keyboard.
Determines how strongly the selected Accent Type (above) will be applied. The
The more strongly you play
higher the value, the stronger the effect. the keyboard, the higher the
velocity value and, hence,
Expand/Compress Expands or compresses the range of velocity values, around a central velocity the louder the sound.
value “64.” Values higher than 100% expand the dynamic range, while values lower
than 100% compress it.
Boost/Cut Boosts or cuts all velocity values in the selected section/channel. Values above
100% boost the overall velocity, while values below 100% reduce it.
114 PSR-2000/1000
Editing the Channel Data

In this display, there are five different channel-related edit functions, including Quantize, for editing the recorded
accompaniment style data. The operations here apply to step 4 on page 109.
Preset channel BASS-

See the explanations below. PHRASE 2 can not be
edited.
■ Quantize
Refer to page 102.
■ Velocity Change
Boosts or cuts the velocity of all notes in the specified channel (selected with the [1▲▼]/[2▲▼] (CHANNEL)
buttons), according to the specified percentage (selected with the [4▲▼]/[5▲▼] (BOOST/CUT) buttons).
■ Bar Copy
This function allows data to be copied from one measure or group of measures to another location within the
specified channel. Use the [4▲▼] (TOP) and [5▲▼] (LAST) buttons to specify the first and last measures in the
region to be copied. Use the [6▲▼] (DEST) button to specify the first measure of the destination location, to which
the data is to be copied.
■ Bar Clear
This function clears all data from the specified range of measures within the selected channel. Use the [4▲▼] (TOP)
and [5▲▼] (LAST) buttons to specify the first and last measures in the region to be cleared.
■ Remove Event
This function lets you remove specific events from the selected channel. Use the [4▲▼] - [6▲▼] (EVENT) buttons
to select the desired event type to be removed.
PSR-2000/1000 115
Making Style File Format Settings —Parameter

This display provides a variety of style controls— such as determining how the pitch and sound of the recorded style
change when playing the chords in the left-hand range of the keyboard. For details about the relationship between the
parameters, refer to “Style File Format” on page 109. The operations here are the same as described in step 4 on page 109.
When NTR is set to “Root

Fixed” and NTT is set to
See the explanations below. “Bypass,” the “Source
Root” and “Source Chord”
parameters are changed to
“Play Root” and “Play
Chord,” respectively. In this
case, you can change
chords and hear the result-
ing sound for all channels.
■ Source Root/Chord
These settings determine the original key of the source pattern (i.e., the key used when recording the pattern). The default
setting of CM7 (with a Source Root of “C” and a Source Type of“M7”), is automatically selected whenever the preset data
is deleted prior to recording a new style, regardless of the Source Root and Chord included in the preset data. When you
change Source Root / Chord from the default CM7 to another chord, the chord notes and recommended notes will also
change, depending on the newly selected chord type. For details on chord notes and recommended notes, see page 111.
When the Source Root is C:
CMaj C6 CM7 CM711 C9 CM79 C69
C R C C R C R C C C R C R C C R C C R C C R C C C C C R C C C C R C C C C C C R
Caug Cm Cm6 Cm7 Cm75 Cm9 Cm79
R C R C C C C R C C R C C C C
C R C C R R C C R R C C C R C C R C C R C C C R C
Cm711 CmM7 CmM79 Cdim Cdim7 C7 C7sus4
C C C C C C R C C R C C
C R C C C R R C C C C R C C C R C R R C R C C C C C C
C7 5 C79 C711 C713 C79 C713 C79
C C C C C C C C R C C C R C
C R C C C C C C R C C R C R C C C C C C C C R C C C C
CM7aug C7aug C1+8 C1+5 Csus4 Csus2

C= chord note
C, R = recommended
C R C C
note
C R C R R C C R C C C C C C R C C C C R C R
■ NTR (Note Transposition Rule) and NTT (Note Transposition Table)

• NTR (Note Transposition Rule)
This determines the system for pitch conversion of the source pattern. Two settings are available.
Root Trans (Root Transpose)
When the root note is transposed, the pitch relationship between notes is maintained. For example, the notes C3,
E3 and G3 in the key of C become F3, A3 and C4 when they are transposed to F. Use this setting for channels that
contain melody lines.
Root Fixed
The note is kept as close as possible to the previous note range. For example, the notes C3, E3 and G3 in the key
of C become C3, F3 and A3 when they are transposed to F. Use this setting for channels that contain chord parts.
116 PSR-2000/1000
• NTT (Note Transposition Table)

This sets the note transposition table for the source pattern. Six transposition types are available.
Bypass
No transposition.
Melody
Suitable for melody line transposition. Use this for melody channels such as Phrase 1 and Phrase 2.
Chord
Suitable for chord transposition. Use for the Chord 1 and Chord 2 channels, especially when they contain piano
or guitar-like chordal parts.
Bass
Suitable for bass line transposition. This table is basically similar to the Melody table above, but recognizes on-
bass chords allowed in the FINGERED ON BASS fingering mode. Use this primarily for bass lines.
Melodic Minor
When the played chord changes from a major to a minor chord, this table lowers the third interval in the scale by
a semitone. When the chord changes from a minor to a major chord, the minor third interval is raised by a
semitone. Other notes are not changed.
Harmonic Minor
When the played chord changes from a major to a minor chord, this table lowers the third and sixth intervals in
the scale by a semitone. When the chord changes from a minor to a major chord, the minor third and flatted sixth
intervals are raised by a semitone. Other notes are not changed.
■ High Key/Note Limit

• High Key
This sets the highest key (upper octave limit) Example — When the highest key is F
of the note transposition for the chord root Root changes
CM CM FM FM
change. Any notes calculated to be higher Notes played C3-E3-G3

C 3-F3-G 3 F3-A3-C4

F 2-A 2-C 3
than the highest key are transposed down to
the octave just below the highest key. This
setting is effective only when the NTR
parameter (page 116) is set to “Root Trans.”
• Note Limit
This sets the note range (highest and lowest Example — When the lowest note is C3 and the highest is D4
notes) for voices recorded to the style
Root changes CM CM FM
channels. By judicious setting of this range, 3-C4
Notes played E3-G3-C4 F3-G F3-A3-C4
you can ensure that the voices sound as
realistic as possible — in other words, that no High Limit
notes outside the natural range are sounded Low Limit

(e.g., high bass sounds or low piccolo
sound). The actual notes that sound are
automatically shifted to the set range.
■ RTR (Retrigger Rule)

These settings determine whether notes stop sounding or not and how they change pitch in response to chord
changes.
Stop
The notes stop sounding.
Pitch Shift
The pitch of the note will bend without a new attack to match the type of the new chord.
Pitch Shift to Root
The pitch of the note will bend without a new attack to match the root of the new chord.
Retrigger
The note is retriggered with a new attack at a new pitch corresponding to the next chord.
Retrigger To Root
The note is retriggered with a new attack at the root note of the next chord. However, the octave of the new note
remains the same.
PSR-2000/1000 117
Creating Multi Pad — Multi Pad Creator
The PSR-2000/1000 lets you create your own original Multi Pad phrases — which you can use in your performances in
the same way as the preset Multi Pads.

BACK NEXT
(STYLE) (L) (R)
DIGITAL
VOICE ORGAN &
SOUND CREATOR MAIN

STYLE
SWING & MARCH & B G
C H

PART D I
USER ORGAN FLUTES
MENU UPPER OCTAVE
DEMO E J
MUSIC
TAP TEMPO FINDER
HELP
RESET RESET OVER
STOP FUNCTION

FADE ACCESS EXIT
IN/OUT
STYLE CONTROL
AUTO OTS DATA ENTRY
ON
STOP
MULTI PAD
Operation
1 Select the desired Multi Pad Bank for

editing. To record a new Multi Pad from
3
scratch, call up the RECORD page in
the Multi Pad Creator display and
select “New Bank” by pressing the [C] A
(NEW BANK) button. B
D
DIGITAL
2 STUDIO
SOUND CREATOR E
DIGITAL RECORDING
MIXING CONSOLE
PART
4 Record and Edit the Multi Pad. For details on the operations for
each display, refer to the explanations starting on the next page. 5 Call up the Multi Pad
BACK NEXT
[I] (SAVE) button, then
save the recorded /
edited data to the USER
or FLOPPY DISK page.
Use the [BACK]/
F
[NEXT] buttons
to select the
G RECORD or
EDIT page.
H
J
Press the [EXIT]
button to close the
END MULTI PAD
display.
118 PSR-2000/1000
Multi Pad Realtime Recording — Record

A F
Select the desired Multi
Pad for recording or editing. B G
You can also select it by Select this to engage

C H
pressing the MULTI PAD the Record standby
[1] to [4] button. D I
mode (synchronized
E J
standby).
Select this to save the
Selects an empty Multi Pad recorded pad data to
bank, allowing you to create a USER or FLOPPY DISK
new Multi Pad from scratch. drive.
Calls up the NAME display to

Turn Repeat/Chord Match of each pad
input the new name.
on or off (see below).
Start recording
First, select the desired voice. Press the [H] (REC) button to set the Record standby mode.
Recording begins automatically as soon as you play on the keyboard. You can also start • Other notes besides those
recording by pressing the STYLE [START] button. If Chord Match (see below) is set to on of the C major seventh
scale can be recorded;
for the Multi Pad to be recorded, you should record using the notes of the C major however, this may result in
seventh scale (C, D, E, G, A and B). the recorded phrase not
matching the chord when
being played back.
C = chord note • The rhythm part of the
C, R = recommended note currently selected style is
C R C C R C
Others: non-recommended note used as a rhythmic guide
(in place of a metronome),
playing back during
recording. However, it is
not recorded to the Multi
Pad.
Stop recording
Press the [H] (STOP) button or the panel STYLE/MULTI PAD [STOP] button to stop recording when you've finished
playing the phrase.
Turning Chord Match and Repeat On/Off

■ Repeat
Unless the Repeat function is on for the selected pad, playback will end automatically as soon as the end of the
phrase is reached. A phrase can be stopped while it is playing by pressing the MULTI PAD [STOP] button.
■ Chord Match
If a Multi Pad is played while Style is playing and the Chord Match function for that pad is ON, the phrase will be
automatically re-harmonized to match the accompaniment chords.
PSR-2000/1000 119
Step Recording or Editing Multi Pads — Edit

With this method, you can create a Multi Pad by entering notes and other data individually, without having to perform
them in real time. The operations here apply to step 4 on page 118.
F F
G G
H H
I I
J J
The actual recording process is the same as in Step Recording of songs (page 96), with the exception of the points
described below. You can also edit each event from the Edit page, and the editing process the same as in editing songs
(page 105).
• Just as with Song Recording, the End Mark position can be changed freely in the Multi Pad Creator. This allows you
to finely adjust the phrase length for the Pad. This would be convenient, for example, in synchronizing repeat
playback of a Pad (set to Repeat On) with the keyboard and auto accompaniment playback.
• Since the Multi Pads have only one track (channel), the track (channel) cannot be changed.
120 PSR-2000/1000
Adjust the Volume Balance and Changing Voices
— Mixing Console
Set up just like a real mixing console, this display gives you comprehensive control over the sound.
Mixing Console
This set of controls
BACK NEXT
(STYLE) (L) (R)
lets you adjust the

DIGITAL
VOICE ORGAN &
SOUND CREATOR MAIN
balance of the
STYLE
SWING & MARCH & B G
C H
voices and their ste-

PART D I
USER ORGAN FLUTES
MENU UPPER OCTAVE
DEMO E J
MUSIC
TAP TEMPO FINDER
TRANSPOSE TEMPO
reo position, as well

RESET
HELP
RESET RESET OVER
STOP FUNCTION
FADE
MULTI PAD DIRECT
ACCESS
BALANCE
EXIT
ENTER
ONE TOUCH SETTING
as the amount of
MIXING CONSOLE
IN/OUT
effect that is applied

STYLE CONTROL
STANDBY
ON
AUTO
FILL IN
OTS
LINK
PART
DATA ENTRY
to each voice.
You can call up additional basic mixing controls by using the [BALANCE] button and the [CHANNEL ON/OFF] button
(page 61).
Operation
MIXING CONSOLE
1 PART
From the MIXING CONSOLE display, press the button
repeatedly until the desired display is called up. Each press of the
You can quickly and easily
set all parts to the same
value for the same parame-
button switches among the displays listed below. ter (except for the VOICE
parameter). Simulta-
PANEL PART neously hold down the [A] -
Includes the keyboard-played parts (Main/ [J] button that corresponds
Layer, Left), accompaniment parts, song, to the parameter you want
to change and use the [1] -
microphone input (PSR-2000 only)
[8] buttons or the [DATA
STYLE PART ENTRY] dial to change the
Accompaniment parts value.
SONG CH 1 - 8
n
Channels 1 - 8 of song playback For details on parameters
SONG CH 9 -16 related to the Sound Cre-
Channels 9 - 16 of song playback ator, see page 88.
2 Select the other Mixing Console pages by using the [BACK]/

[NEXT] buttons and set the desired parameters. END
Close the Mixing
Console display by
For information on the various parameters and settings and how pressing the [EXIT]
to use them, refer to the explanations starting on page 122. button.
■ About the parameters

• VOL/VOICE (Volume/Voice) (page 122)
This contains settings related to the volume and voice of each part/channel. Here you can also enable the Auto
Revoice feature — which automatically plays XG-compatible songs (page 159) with the rich and dynamic voices
that are exclusive to the PSR-2000/1000. This gives you much more authentic and realistic instrument sounds for
your song playback.
• FILTER (page 123)
These controls affect the tone quality of the voice, letting you add power, punch, or brightness to the sound.
• TUNE (page 123)
These give you various tuning controls.
• EFFECT (page 124)
These control the amount of effect applied to the sound.
• EQ (Equalizer) (PSR-2000 only) (page 127)
Determines the overall tone quality of the instrument, letting you adjust the sound to match the particular
performance space. Also you can adjust the volume or tone quality for each part.
PSR-2000/1000 121
Adjust the Volume Balance and Changing Voices — Mixing Console
Setting the Level Balance and Voice — Volume/Voice

The operations for this page apply to step 2 of the procedure on page 121.
1 Use these to select the VOICE,

PANPOT, or VOLUME
parameter rows.
Set this to ON to enable automatic replacement of
the XG voices (in XG song data) with the special
voices of the PSR-2000/1000. To use the normal
The [RHY2] categories in
the STYLE PART display are
XG voice set, turn this off. only for the Drum Kit/SFX Kit
(percussion) voice.
DIGITAL
STUDIO
SOUND CREATOR
n
The [RHY1] channel in the
A F STYLE PART display can be
DIGITAL RECORDING
assigned to any voice except
B G
for the Organ Flutes voice.
MIXING CONSOLE
C H
n
PART D I
When playing GM song data,
E J channel 10 (in the SONG
CH 9 - 16 page) can only be
Each press of this used for a Drum Kit voice.
button switches Allows you to select
among the various the specific voice to
parts/channels. be replaced.
When changing the rhythm/

These let you select percussion voices (drum
the voice of each 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
kits, etc.) of the accompani-
part, and adjust the ment style and song from
panpot and volume. the VOICE parameter, the
VOICE detailed settings related to
Calls up the VOICE display, from which you can select the desired voice (page 54). When the the drum voice are reset,
Style part is selected, neither Organ Flutes voices nor User voices can be selected. When the and in some cases you may
Song part is selected, User voices cannot be selected. be unable to restore the
PANPOT original sound. In the case
Determines the stereo position of the selected voice or track. A setting of 0 pans the sound hard of song playback, you can
left, while 64 is at center, and 127 is at hard right. restore the original sound
VOLUME by returning to the begin-
Determines the level of each channel, giving you fine control over the balance of all the parts. ning of the song and playing
back from that point. In the
case of accompaniment
style play, you can restore
the original sound by select-
ing the same style again.
2 ALL REVOICE
Replaces all of the replaceable
XG voices with the rich and Keep in mind that using the
authentic voices of the PSR- Revoice function may result
F
2000/1000. in unnatural or unexpected
sound, depending on the
G
particular song data.
H
I BASIC REVOICE
Replaces only the recommended
J
voices that are suitable for playing
back the song.
ALL NO REVOICE
All the voices are returned to the
original XG voices.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Executes the settings and closes the Auto

Revoice Setup display.
Closes the Auto Revoice Setup screen without

Selects the XG voices to executing the settings.
be replaced (voices
usually used when Selects the voices used to replace the XG voices
playing back) (when SONG AUTO REVOICE is set to ON).
122 PSR-2000/1000
Changing the Tone of the Voice — Filter

Switches between the HARMONIC and BRIGHTNESS parameters.
DIGITAL For details about the Filter,

STUDIO
SOUND CREATOR
see page 89.
DIGITAL RECORDING
A F n
Be careful with these con-
B G
trols. Depending on the
MIXING CONSOLE
C H selected voice, extreme set-
tings may result in noise or
PART D I
distortion.
E J
Each press of this

button switches among
the various parts/
channels.
HARMONIC .........Allows you to adjust the resonance effect

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
(see “Harmonic Content” on page 89).
BRIGHTNESS .....Determines the brightness of the sound by
adjusting the cutoff frequency (page 89).
Changing Pitch-related Settings — Tune

Switches among the available parameters: PORTAMENTO Portamento is used to cre-
TIME, PITCH BEND RANGE, OCTAVE, and TUNING. ate a smooth transition in
pitch from one note to the
next.
A F
B G
C H
D I
E J
Refer to the explanation below.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
These increase/decrease (transpose) the pitch in semitone units.

MASTER ... Transposes both the pitch of the keyboard and that of the song playback.
SONG........ Transposes the pitch of the song playback.
KBD .......... Transposes the pitch of the keyboard.
PORTAMENTO TIME ............When the part is set to Mono (page 58, 88), this determines the Portamento time. The
higher the value, the longer the time it takes for the pitch to change. Portamento is only
applied when you play legato (playing the next note before releasing the previous one).
PITCH BEND RANGE ...........Determines the range of the PITCH BEND wheel for the corresponding part. The range is
from “0” to ”12” with each step corresponding to one semitone.
OCTAVE................................Determines the range of the pitch change in octaves, over two octaves up or down. The
value of this parameter is added to the value set via the [UPPER OCTAVE] button.
TUNING...............................Determines the pitch of the instrument.
PSR-2000/1000 123
Adjusting the Effects

There are three effect sec-
tions: Reverb, Chorus, and
1 Indicates the type name for each effect block.
Press this to edit and store
DSP (which contains a vari-
ety of effect types). For
DIGITAL
STUDIO the effect (page 124, 125). details, refer to the Effect
SOUND CREATOR Block list (page 125).
A F
DIGITAL RECORDING
B G
MIXING CONSOLE
C H
PART D I
E J
Each press of
this button
switches among
the various
parts/channels.
Switches among the
effect sections:
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 REVERB, CHORUS,
and DSP.
Determines the amount of effect that is applied to each part. For more information
about the characteristics of each effect, see the Effect Block list on page 125.
2
F
When the BLOCK

parameter is set to
REVERB, CHORUS, or
DSP1-4/DSP, press this
to call up the display
from which you can
change the detailed
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 settings for the effects.
These determine the effect block and let you assign the effect.
BLOCK............ Determines the effect block (group of similar or related effects).
PART ............... Determines the part to which the Insertion effect is applied. It is effective only
when BLOCK is set to “DSP1/DSP,” PARAMETER is set to “CONNECTION,” and
VALUE is set to “Insertion” — or when BLOCK is set to “DSP2–4” (PSR-2000).
CATEGORY..... The various effect programs (in Type below) are grouped into categories. This
parameter may not be available depending on the selected block.
TYPE ............... Determines the type of effect that is assigned to the selected effect block. The
actual effect types that are available may differ depending on the selected block.
124 PSR-2000/1000
3 Calls up the
A F
display for storing
the effect.
B G
C H
D I
E J
Switches between Determines the level of the

the upper/lower effect (return level). This is not
parameters. For the available when BLOCK is set
lower parameter, to “DSP1/DSP,” PARAMETER
the depth can be is set to “CONNECTION,” and
changed when the VALUE is set to “Insertion” or
[VARIATION] when BLOCK is set to “DSP2–
button is on. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 4” (PSR-2000).
Determines the
effect block.
Determines the value of the
Determines the effect category. selected parameter.
Determines the effect type. Determines the effect parameter to be adjusted.
4 Calls up the display

Keep in mind that in some
cases noise may result if
for naming the User you adjust the effect param-
F
Effect (page 45). eters while playing the
G instrument.
J
Select the
destination to Stores the effect settings you
which the effect made above to a User Effect
is to be stored. location (SYSTEM) for future
The number of recall. To call up the effect, select
memory spaces USER from the CATEGORY
available for the parameter and select the desired
destination differs effect from the TYPE parameter.
for each block 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
(refer to the chart
below).
Effect Block
Block Parts Characteristics Number of User Effect
REVERB Reproduces the warm ambience of playing in
All parts 3
a concert hall or jazz club.
CHORUS Produces a rich “fat” sound as if several parts
All parts 3
are being played simultaneously.
DSP 1 (PSR-2000) In addition to reverb and chorus effects, this
Main, Layer, Left, Song (Ch. 1 - 16),
DSP(PSR-1000) section features a variety of special effects, 3
MIC (PSR-2000 only), Style
including distortion.
DSP2 - 4 (PSR-2000 only) Main, Layer, Left, Song (Ch. 1 - 16), Any unused DSP blocks are automatically
10
MIC (automatically assigned) assigned to the remaining active parts.
PSR-2000/1000 125
Effect Structure
The PSR-2000/1000 features the following digital effect systems. The effect type, depth, and various parameters can be
set with the panel controls.
About the Effect Connections – System and Insertion
All the effect blocks are connected or routed in one of two ways: System or Insertion. System applies the selected effect
to all parts, while Insertion applies the selected effect to one specific part. Reverb and Chorus are System effects, and
DSP 2 - DSP 4 (PSR-2000 only) are Insertion effects. The DSP1/DSP effect, on the other hand, can be configured for
either System or Insertion routing.
The illustration below shows how the various effect blocks are set up and traces the signal flow for the send/return
controls set on the PSR-2000/1000.
PSR-2000 Unused DSP blocks are automatically

DRY LINE
assigned to the active parts.
Dry
REVERB
MAIN VOICE DSP2 Rev Send Reverb Return
Cho Send
DSP Send
Dry
LAYER VOICE DSP3 Rev Send
Cho Send
Dry
LEFT VOICE DSP4 Rev Send

CHORUS Master EQ OUT
Cho Send Chorus Return
Dry
MIC Vocal
MIC Effect Harmony Rev Send
Cho Send
DSP Send
SONG Dry
(each channel) Rev Send
Cho Send
DSP Send
STYLE Dry
(each channel) DSP1 Rev Send
When DSP is set as a System effect,
When DSP is set as an Insertion effect Cho Send it is put here in the signal flow.
(here PART is set to one of the STYLE channels), DSP Send
it is put here in the signal flow. DSP1
DSP Return
DRY LINE
PSR-1000
Dry
REVERB
MAIN VOICE DSP Rev Send Reverb Return
Cho Send
When DSP is set as an Insertion effect
(here PART is set to MAIN), DSP Send
it is put here in the signal flow.
Dry
LAYER VOICE Rev Send
Cho Send
DSP Send
CHORUS OUT
Dry Chorus Return
LEFT VOICE Rev Send
Cho Send
DSP Send
Dry
MIC Rev Send
Cho Send
DSP Send
Dry
STYLE/SONG Rev Send

(each channel) When DSP is set as a System effect,
Cho Send it is put here in the signal flow.
DSP Send
DSP
DSP Return
126 PSR-2000/1000
Setting the Equalizer—EQ (PSR-2000 only)

Usually an equalizer is used to correct the sound output from amps or speakers to match the special character of the
room. The sound is divided into several frequency bands, allowing you to correct the sound by raising or lowering the
level for each band. The equalizer allows you to adjust the tone or timbre of the sound to match the performance
space, or to compensate for certain acoustic characteristics in your room. For example, you can cut some of the low
range frequencies when playing on stages or in large studio spaces where the sound is too “boomy,” or boost the high
frequencies in rooms and close spaces where the sound is relatively “dead” and free of echoes.The PSR-2000 possesses
a high grade five-band digital equalizer function. With this function, a final effect —tone control— can be added to the
output of your instrument.
1
Call up the MASTER EQ
EDIT display
Select the A F
desired Master
B G
EQ type.
C H Select the EQ type to adjust
D I
the EQ HIGH using the [1▲▼]
- [8▲▼] buttons.
E J
Select the EQ type to adjust

the EQ LOW using the
[1▲▼] - [8▲▼] buttons.
2
A F
Select the
desired Master B G
EQ type.
C H
An edited PRESET or USER
D I
curve can be stored to
E J USER 1 or 2.
The PRESET and USER curves can be edited

as required via the corresponding LCD buttons
— EQ1 through EQ5.Each of the 5 bands can
be boosted (“+” values) or cut (“–”values) by up
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 to 12 dB.
Adjusts the overall gain of all EQ bands

Q simultaneously.
Gain
Whenever an EQ band is edited the corresponding EQ value is highlighted and the number of the
edited band appears above the Q and FREQ controls. The Q and FREQ controls can then be
used to adjust the Q (bandwidth) and the FREQ (center frequency) of the selected band. The
FREQ higher the “Q,” the narrower the bandwidth. The available FREQ range is different for each band.
PSR-2000/1000 127
Using a Microphone — MIC. (PSR-2000)
This extraordinarily powerful feature uses advanced voice-processing technology to automatically produce vocal
harmony based on a single lead vocal. Four distinct harmony modes as well as an extensive selection of preset harmony
types are provided. In addition to straightforward harmony, the PSR-2000 also lets you change the apparent gender of
the harmony and/or lead vocal sound. For example, if you are a male singer, you can have the PSR-2000 automatically
generate a two-part female backup. A comprehensive set of parameters gives you exceptionally precise and flexible
control over the vocal harmony sound.
MIC. For details about connecting

VH TYPE MIC. VOCAL
SELECT SETTING HARMONY TALK EFFECT a microphone, see
OVER
SIGNAL
page 152.

BACK NEXT
(STYLE) (L) (R)
DIGITAL
VOICE ORGAN &
SOUND CREATOR MAIN

STYLE
SWING & MARCH & B G
C H

PART D I
USER ORGAN FLUTES
MENU UPPER OCTAVE
DEMO E J
MUSIC
TAP TEMPO FINDER
HELP
RESET RESET OVER
STOP FUNCTION

FADE ACCESS EXIT
IN/OUT
STYLE CONTROL
AUTO OTS DATA ENTRY
ON
Use the SIGNAL and OVER indicators to determine the appropriate setting (page 152).

OVER
SIGNAL
Determines the on/off setting of the effect

applied to the microphone, set in the
This calls up the VOCAL HARMONY TYPE MIXING CONSOLE display (page 124).
display (page 129) and lets you set the
desired harmony type. This convenient function lets you temporarily cancel the
vocal harmony or other microphone effects when using
a connected microphone. This is especially useful when
This calls up the MICROPHONE SETTING you talk between songs during a performance.
display (page 130) and lets you adjust the
level of the microphone and vocal harmony
If you connect a microphone to the PSR-2000, you can
effect.
sing along with the song or auto accompaniment and have
vocal harmony parts added automatically.
128 PSR-2000
Selecting a Vocal Harmony Type
1 Press the [VH TYPE SELECT] button.
2 Select a Vocal Harmony type.
A F
B G
C H
D I
E J
This lets you adjust the amount of

harmony effect that is applied.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
3
A F
B G
C H
D I Save the changed

data (page 38, 44).
E J
Select a Vocal Harmony type. Return to the VOCAL HARMONY

TYPE display.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Select a Vocal Harmony parameter. Adjust the parameter value.
The saved settings can be

named (page 41) or deleted
Press the [EXIT] button to return to the previous (page 43) in the USER page.
END display.
For details about the Vocal Har-

mony parameter, refer to the
separate Data List.
PSR-2000 129
Making Settings for the Vocal Harmony and Microphone

— MICROPHONE SETTING
Operation
1 Press the [MIC.

SETTING] 2 Select the MICROPHONE SETTING page by using the [BACK]/[NEXT]
button and set the parameters.
button. For information on the various parameters and settings and BACK NEXT
how to use them, refer to the explanations

below.
END A
B
F
Press the [EXIT] C H

button to return to the
D I
previous display.
E J
Adjusting the Vocal Harmony Settings and Microphone Effects —

OVERALL SETTING
The explanations here apply to step 2 above.
A F
Select the 3BAND EQ
B G
C H Select the NOISE GATE/

COMPRESSOR.
D I
E J
Select the VOCAL HARMONY
CONTROL/MIC.
Use these to change the value for each

function or setting. For details, see below.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
■ 3BAND EQ (3-BAND EQUALIZER)

Usually an equalizer is used to correct the sound output from amps or speakers to match the special character of the
room. The sound is divided into several frequency bands, allowing you to correct the sound by raising or lowering
the level for each band. The PSR-2000 features a high grade three-band digital equalizer function for the
microphone sound.
Hz .............. Adjusts the center frequency of the corresponding band.
dB ............... Boosts or cuts the level of the corresponding band by up to 12 dB.
■ NOISE GATE
This effect mutes the input signal when the input from the microphone falls below a specified level. This effectively
cuts off extraneous noise, allowing the desired signal (vocal, etc.) to pass.
SW.............. “SW” is the abbreviation of Switch. This turns Noise Gate on or off.
TH. ............. “TH.” is the abbreviation of Threshold. This adjusts the input level at which the gate begins to open.
130 PSR-2000
■ COMPRESSOR
This effect holds down the output when the input signal from the microphone exceeds a specified level. This is
useful when recording a signal with widely varying dynamics. It effectively “compresses” the signal, making soft
parts louder and loud parts softer.
SW.............. “SW” is the abbreviation of Switch. This turns Compressor on or off.
TH. ............. “TH.” is the abbreviation of Threshold. This adjusts the input level at which compression begins to be
applied.
RATIO ........ This adjusts the compression ratio.
OUT ........... Adjusts the final output level.
■ VOCAL HARMONY CONTROL

The following parameters determine how the harmony is controlled.
VOCODER CONTROL
The Vocal Harmony effect is controlled by note data — the notes you play on the keyboard and/or the notes of the
song data. This parameter lets you determine which notes are used to control the harmony.
• SONG CHANNEL
MUTE/PLAY:
When set to “MUTE,” the channel selected below is muted (turned off) during keyboard performance or song
playback.
OFF:
Song data control over harmony is turned off.
1-16:
When playing back a song from disk or external MIDI sequencer, the note data recorded to the assigned song
channel controls the harmony.
• KEYBOARD
OFF: Keyboard control over harmony is turned off.
UPPER: Notes played to the right of the split point control the harmony.
LOWER: Notes played to the left of the split point control the harmony.
BALANCE
This lets you set the balance between the lead vocal (your own voice) and Vocal Harmony. Raising this value
increases the volume of the Vocal Harmony and decreases that of the lead vocal. When this is set to L<H63 (L: Lead
Vocal, H: Vocal Harmony), only the Vocal Harmony is output; when it is set to L63>H, only the lead vocal is output.
MODE
All of the Vocal Harmony types fall into one of three modes which produce harmony in different ways. The harmony
effect is dependent on the selected Vocal Harmony Mode and Track, and this parameter determines how the
harmony is applied to your voice. The three modes are described below.
VOCODER:
The harmony notes are determined by the notes you play on the keyboard (Main, Layer and Left) and/ or song
data which includes Vocal Harmony tracks.
CHORDAL:
During accompaniment playback, chords played in the auto accompaniment section of the keyboard control the
harmony. During song playback, chords contained in song data control the harmony. (Not available if the song
does not contain any chord data.)
AUTO:
When the auto accompaniment or Left part is set to ON and if chord data exists in the song, the mode is
automatically set to CHORDAL. In all other cases, the mode is set to VOCODER.
CHORD
The following parameters specify the song data which will be used for chord detection.
OFF: Chords are not detected.
XF: Chords of XF format are detected.
1-16: Chords are detected from note data in the specified song channel.
■ MIC (MICROPHONE)
The following parameters determine how the microphone sound is controlled.
MUTE .............. When set to OFF, the microphone sound is turned off.
VOLUME ......... Adjusts the volume of the microphone sound.
PSR-2000 131
Setting the Microphone Volume and Related Effects — TALK

SETTING
Determines the settings when the [TALK] button is on.
The explanations here apply to step 2 on page 130.
VOLUME/PAN/REVERB DEPTH/CHORUS DEPTH/TOTAL VOLUME ATTENUATOR
A F
B G
C H
D I
E J
This determines the volume of This determines the amount of

the microphone sound. attenuation to be applied to the overall
sound (excepting the microphone input)
— allowing you to effectively adjust the
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
balance between your voice and the
overall instrument sound.
This sets the stereo pan position These set the depth of the reverb and chorus effects
of the microphone sound. applied to the microphone sound.
DSP/TYPE/DEPTH
A F
B G
C H
D I
E J
This sets the depth of the DSP effect

applied to the microphone sound.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
This turns the DSP effect applied to the This selects the type of DSP effect to be applied
microphone sound ON or OFF. to the microphone sound.
132 PSR-2000
Making Global and Other Important Settings — Function
The Function mode gives you access to various advanced functions related to the instrument as a whole. These
sophisticated functions let you customize the PSR-2000/1000 to your own musical needs and preferences.
BACK NEXT
(STYLE) (L) (R)
DIGITAL
VOICE ORGAN &
SOUND CREATOR MAIN

STYLE
SWING & MARCH & B G
C H

PART D I
USER ORGAN FLUTES
MENU UPPER OCTAVE
DEMO E J
MUSIC
TAP TEMPO FINDER
HELP
RESET RESET OVER
STOP FUNCTION

FADE ACCESS EXIT
IN/OUT
STYLE CONTROL
STANDBY
AUTO
FILL IN
OTS
LINK
STOP START
FUNCTION
START/STOP
DATA ENTRY
FREEZE MEMORY
ON
Operation
1 MENU
DEMO
2 Select the desired function.
HELP
FUNCTION
3 Set the parameters of the selected

function.
The operations for each function are
covered in the following explanations.
To return to the previous display, press the

END [EXIT] button.
Adjusting the Pitch and Tuning — Master Tune and Scale Tune
■ Master Tune (page 135)
This allows you to make fine adjustments to the overall pitch of the instrument — letting you accurately match the
tuning with that of other instruments.
■ Scale Tune (page 135)

This determines the particular tuning system (or temperament) for the instrument. This is especially useful for playing
period pieces, to match the tuning system used during specific musical eras.
Setting Song-related Parameters — Song Settings (page 137)

These allow you to set parameters related to song playback.
Setting Auto Accompaniment-related Parameters — Style Setting, Split Point, and Chord
Fingering
■ Style Setting / Split Point (page 138)
These determine the auto accompaniment-related settings, and let you set the split point.
■ Chord Fingering (page 139)
PSR-2000/1000 133
This determines the method for playing/indicating Making MIDI Settings

chords when using the auto accompaniment features.
You can even check how to play the chord, since the
■ System (page 145)
individual notes are indicated in the display. These determine various system messages settings
(such as Clock, Start/Stop, System Exclusive), as well
Making Settings for the Pedals and
as Local Control on/off.
Keyboard — Controller
■ Transmit (page 146)
■ Pedal (page 139)
This determines how playback data is sent to
These settings determine how the connected foot
connected MIDI devices — i.e., which parts are
pedals (including foot controllers and footswitches)
assigned to which MIDI Transmit channels. This also
are used. They can be assigned to a variety of
lets you specify the type of data to be transmitted over
functions, letting you control operations with your
each channel.
feet — such as turning the accompaniment style on/
off, or triggering Fill In patterns. ■ Receive (page 147)
■ Keyboard / Panel (page 141) This determines how the parts of the PSR-2000/1000
respond to data from connected MIDI devices — i.e.,
These settings determine the touch sensitivity of the
which parts are assigned to which MIDI Receive
keyboard (how touch affects volume), the on/off
channels. This also lets you specify the type of data to
status of the Modulation wheel (PSR-2000 only), and
be received over each channel.
the pitch transpose settings (for the keyboard, song
data, and entire instrument). ■ Root (page 147)
This determines the channel(s) recognized for the root
notes, for use with the auto accompaniment.
Setting the Registration Sequence, Freeze,
and Voice Set ■ Chord Detect (page 147)
This determines the channel(s) recognized for the
■ Registration Sequence (page 142) chords, for use with the auto accompaniment.
This determines the order in which the Registration
Memory presets (1 - 8) are called up — by using the Other Settings — Utility
[BACK][NEXT] buttons or the pedal.
■ Config 1 (page 148)
■ Freeze (page 142) This page contains settings for Fade In/Out,
This lets you specify the settings you want to be Metronome, Parameter Lock, and the Tap sound.
maintained or left unchanged, even when changing
Registration Memory presets. ■ Config 2 (page 149)
From this page, you can adjust the display, and
■ Voice Set (page 143) change the voice number indication.
This lets you determine whether certain voice-related
settings (such as Effects, EQ, Harmony, etc.) are ■ Disk (page 150)
automatically called up or not when you select a From this page, you can format disks, and copy from
voice. disk to disk.
■ Owner (page 151)

From this page, you can set the language of the
Setting Harmony and Echo (page 143) instrument, and input your own name — which is
These let you set the type of Harmony or Echo effect shown automatically every time the power is turned
applied to the keyboard-played voices, as well as the on.
amount of effect.
■ System Reset (page 151)
This function restores the PSR-2000/1000 to its
original factory settings. You can also specify which
types of settings are to be restored, as well as store
your own original settings for future recall.
134 PSR-2000/1000
Fine Tuning the Pitch/Selecting a Scale — Master Tune/Scale Tune

The explanations here apply to step #3 of the procedure on page 133.
Tuning the Overall Pitch — Master Tune

Hz (Hertz)
This unit of measurement
refers to the frequency of a
sound, and represents the
number of times a sound
wave vibrates in a second.
n
The Tune function does not
affect the Drum Kit or SFX
Kit voices.
Determines the overall

pitch of the PSR-2000/
1000, from 414.8 -
466.8 Hz. Press the 4
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
or 5 [▲▼] buttons
simultaneously to
instantly reset the value
to the factory setting of
440.0 Hz.
Selecting a Scale — Scale Tune

The current tuning is shown above or below
the corresponding key. Cent
A unit of pitch equal to 1/100
of a semitone (100 cents = 1
semitone).
n
You can register your origi-
nal scale tunings to a REG-
ISTRATION MEMORY
button. To do this, check-
mark “SCALE” in the REG-
ISTRATION MEMORY
display (page 84).
Determines the base note for each

scale.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 When the base note is changed, the
pitch of the keyboard is transposed, yet
maintains the original pitch relationship
between the notes.
Determines the Scale (page 136).

Determines the fine tuning of the selected note in 1-
cent steps. Press the 5 or 6 [▲▼] buttons
simultaneously to instantly reset the value to the
factory setting.
Determines the note to be tuned and the amount of tuning.

The tuning range is from “-64” through “0” to “+63.” Each increment
equals one cent (one “cent” is one hundredth of a semitone).
PSR-2000/1000 135
Scale
■ Equal Temperament
The pitch range of each octave is divided equally into twelve parts, with each half-step evenly spaced in pitch. This
is the most commonly used tuning in music today.
■ Pure Major/Pure Minor

These tunings preserve the pure mathematical intervals of each scale, especially for triad chords (root, third, fifth).
You can hear this best in actual vocal harmonies — such as choirs and acapella singing.
■ Pythagorean
This scale was devised by the famous Greek philosopher and is created from a series of perfect fifths, which are
collapsed into a single octave. The 3rd in this tuning are slightly unstable, but the 4th and 5th are beautiful and
suitable for some leads.
■ Mean-Tone
This scale was created as an improvement on the Pythagorean scale, by making the major third interval more “in
tune.” It was especially popular from the 16th century to the 18th century. Handel, among others, used this scale.
■ Werckmeister/Kirnberger
This composite scale combines the Werckmeister and Kirnberger systems, which were themselves improvements on
the mean-tone and Pythagorean scales. The main feature of this scale is that each key has its own unique character.
The scale was used extensively during the time of Bach and Beethoven, and even now it is often used when
performing period music on the harpsichord.
■ Arabic
Use these tunings when playing Arabic music.
Pitch settings for each scale (in cents; example scale of C)

The values shown in this chart are actually rounded off to the nearest whole number for use on the instrument.

C C D E E F F G A A B B
Equal Temperament 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0
Pure Major 0.0 -29.7 3.9 15.6 -14.1 -2.3 -9.4 2.3 -27.3 -15.6 18.0 -11.7
Pure Minor 0.0 33.6 3.9 15.6 -14.1 -2.3 31.3 2.3 14.1 -15.6 18.0 -11.7
Pythagorean 0.0 14.1 3.9 -6.3 7.8 -2.3 11.7 2.3 15.6 6.3 -3.9 10.2
Mean-Tone 0.0 -24.2 -7.0 10.2 -14.1 3.1 -20.3 -3.1 -27.3 -10.2 7.0 -17.2
Werckmeister 0.0 -10.2 -7.8 -6.3 -10.2 -2.3 -11.7 -3.9 -7.8 -11.7 -3.9 -7.8
Kirnberger 0.0 -10.2 -7.0 -6.3 -14.1 -2.3 -10.2 -3.1 -7.8 -10.2 -3.9 -11.7
Arabic1 0.0 0 -50.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 -50.0 0.0 0.0
Arabic2 0.0 0 0.0 0.0 -50.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 -50.0
136 PSR-2000/1000
Setting Song-related Parameters — Song Settings

Quick Start
Allows you to play back all songs On some commercially avail-
from the same folder continuously. able song data, certain set-
tings related to the song
Turns Quick Start on/off (see note). (such as voice selection, vol-
ume, etc.) are recorded to
the first measure, before the
actual note data. When
Quick Start is set to “ON,”
the PSR-2000/1000 reads
A F
all initial non-note data of the
B G song at the highest possible
speed, then automatically
C H
slows down to the appropri-
D I ate tempo at the first note.
This allows you to start play-
E J
back as quickly as possible,
with a minimum pause for
reading of data.
n
Channel
(page 157). The channels
are assigned as follows:
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Song
1 - 16
Accompaniment Style
9 - 16
Determines whether the Phrase n

Mark Repeat function for the song Phrase Mark
is on or off. When this is on, you This data specifies a certain
can repeatedly play back a location in the song data.
specified phrase (selection of
measures) of the song. The
Determines the MIDI channel assigned method for setting a phrase mark
to the [TRACK2] button. is the same as that in the SONG
POSITION display (page 78).
Determines the MIDI channel assigned
to the [TRACK1] button.
Determines the language of the
displayed lyrics.
When this is set to “AUTO,” the
Determines the harmony channel for language defaults to that of the
Vocoder (page 132). song data. When not set to
“AUTO,” the language defaults to
Japanese, when the internal
setting (page 151) is
JAPANESE; for all other
languages, this is set to
“INTERNATIONAL.”
When set to “ON,” this

automatically sets the proper
Track 1 and Track 2 channels.
Normally, this should be set to
“ON.”
PSR-2000/1000 137
Setting Auto Accompaniment-related Parameters —

Style Setting, Split Point, and Chord Fingering
Setting Auto Accompaniment-related Parameters — Style Setting

and Split Point
These select the part to which the split point
setting is applied: accompaniment, left-hand About Section Set
range, or both. Press the desired key for the split When any of the Main A-D
F
point while holding down one of these buttons. sections is not included in
G The pressed key is included in the range for the the accompaniment style
Auto Accompaniment section of the keyboard data, the nearest section is
H
(ACMP) or the left-hand range (LEFT). automatically selected. For
I A+L (ACMP + LEFT) example, when Main D is not
Allows you to simultaneously set the split contained in the selected
J
point for both the left-hand range and the accompaniment style, Main
Auto Accompaniment section of the C will be called up.
keyboard.
L (LEFT)
Allows you to set the split point for the left-hand range of the keyboard.
A (ACMP)
Allows you to set the split point for the Auto Accompaniment section of the
keyboard.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Determines the split points for the auto accompaniment (ACMP) and the left-
hand range (LEFT). The same value can be set for both or for each
independently, using buttons [F], [G], and [H] (see above). You can use these
buttons by themselves to set the split point value.
Determines the default section that is automatically called up when selecting
different accompaniment styles (when accompaniment is stopped).
Turns touch response for the accompaniment on/off. When this is set to “ON,”
the accompaniment volume changes in response to your playing strength (in
the Auto Accompaniment section of the keyboard).
The PSR-2000/1000 lets you automatically enable Sync Stop (page 65) simply
by quickly pressing/releasing keys in the Auto Accompaniment section of the
keyboard. This parameter lets you set the length of the key-hold time.
This applies to the OTS Link function, in which One Touch Settings are automatically called up
with changes in the section. This determines the timing in which the One Touch Settings change
with the section. (The [OTS LINK] button must be on.)
Real Time
One Touch Setting is immediately called up when you press a section button.
Next Bar
One Touch Setting is called up at the next measure, after you press a section button.
Turns the Stop Accompaniment (ACMP) function on/off. When this is set to “ON,”
you can play the chord and bass sounds of the accompaniment by playing chords
— even when the accompaniment style is not playing back.
About Split Point Split point (A) Split point (L)
Split point is the position on keyboard that separates the Auto

Accompaniment section (ACMP) and left-hand section (LEFT) from the
right-hand section (MAIN). The LEFT split point cannot be set lower than
the ACMP split point, and the ACMP split point cannot be set higher than Auto Left-hand Right-hand
section
section
the LEFT split point. Accompaniment
section Split point (A) + (L)
Auto Accompaniment section Right-hand

+ Left-hand section section
138 PSR-2000/1000
Setting the Fingering Method — Chord Fingering

This determines how the notes you play on the keyboard indicate or play the chords of the accompaniment. To learn
how to play certain chords, use the convenient Chord Tutor function (see note below).
The chord indication in the

display applies to the Fin-
gered method, regardless if
Indicates the note that
another method is actually
belongs to a chord. Some
selected.
notes can be omitted. The
chord name is indicated
next to “CHORD NAME.”
...Required Chord Tutor

...Can be omitted The Chord Tutor feature is
...Either note can be essentially an electronic
omitted “chord book” that shows you
...Can be omitted when appropriate fingerings for
the note indicated by chords; it is useful when you
is omitted want to play certain chords.
Simply specify the desired
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 chord via the [6▲▼] - [8▲▼]
buttons, and the fingerings
for the Fingered method are
Determines the fingering This lets you change the
indicated in the display.
type (page 62). chord type.
Indicates the note that belongs to a This lets you change the root
chord in the music. note from the chord.
Making Settings for the Pedals and Keyboard — Controller

Making Settings for the Pedals
A F
Determines the particular
pedal to which a function is B G
to be assigned.
C H Pedal on/off operation may
differ depending on the
D I
particular pedal you’ve
E J connected to the [FOOT
PEDAL 1/2] jack. For
example, pressing down on
one pedal may turn the
selected function on, while
pressing a different make/
brand of pedal may turn the
function off. If necessary,
use this setting to reverse
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 the operation.
Determines the function to be assigned to the If necessary, you can turn

selected pedal. Any one of the available functions the corresponding part ON/
can be assigned to each pedal. OFF or set the control depth
For information on the assignable functions, see (see the next page).
“Pedal-controllable Functions” on the next page.
PSR-2000/1000 139
Pedal-controllable Functions
VOLUME* Allows you to use a foot controller (FOOT PEDAL 2 only) to control the volume.
SUSTAIN When the pedal is pressed notes played have a long sustain. Releasing the pedal immediately stops (damps) any
sustained notes.
SOSTENUTO If you press and hold the pedal here, only the first note will be sustained (the note that you played and held when
pressing the pedal). This makes it possible to sustain a chord, for example, while other notes are played staccato.
SOFT Pressing the pedal subtly reduces the volume and slightly changes the timbre of notes played. It only applies to
certain voices — PIANO, for example.
GLIDE When the pedal is pressed the pitch changes, and then back to normal pitch when the pedal is released.
PORTAMENTO The portamento effect (a smooth slide between notes) can be produced while the pedal is pressed. Portamento is
produced when notes are played legato style (i.e., a note is played while the preceding note is still held). The
portamento time can be set via the Mixing Console display (page 123).
PITCHBEND* Bend notes up or down while pedal is pressed (FOOT PEDAL 2 only). Same as the PITCH BEND wheel.
MODULATION* Applies a vibrato effect to notes played on the keyboard. The depth of the effect increases while pedal is pressed
(FOOT PEDAL 2 only). Same as the MODULATION wheel.
DSP VARIATION Same as the [VARIATION] button.
HARMONY/ECHO Same as the [HARMONY/ECHO] button.
VOCAL HARMONY (PSR-2000 only) Same as the [VOCAL HARMONY] button
TALK (PSR-2000 only) Same as the [TALK] button.
SCORE PAGE+ (PSR-2000 only) While the song is stopped, you can turn to the previous score page (one page only).
SCORE PAGE- (PSR-2000 only) While the song is stopped, you can turn to the next score page (one page only).
SONG START/STOP Same as the SONG [START/STOP] button.
STYLE START/STOP Same as the STYLE [START/STOP] button.
TAP TEMPO Same as the [TAP TEMPO] button.
SYNCRO START Same as the [SYNC. START] button.
SYNCRO STOP Same as the [SYNC. STOP] button.
INTRO Same as the [INTRO] button.
MAIN A Same as the [MAIN A] button.
MAIN B Same as the [MAIN B] button.
MAIN C Same as the [MAIN C] button.
MAIN D Same as the [MAIN D] button.
FILL DOWN A fill-in plays, automatically followed by the Main section of the button on the immediate left.
FILL SELF Fill-in starts playing.
BREAK Break starts playing.
FILL UP A fill-in plays, automatically followed by the Main section of the button on the immediate right.
ENDING Same as the [ENDING/rit.] button.
FADE IN/OUT Same as the [FADE IN/OUT] button.
FING/ON BASS The pedal alternately switches between the Fingered and On Bass modes (page 62).
BASS HOLD While the pedal is pressed, the Accompaniment Style bass note will be held even if the chord is changed. If the
fingering is set to “FULL KEYBOARD,” the function does not work.
PERCUSSION The pedal plays a percussion instrument selected by the [4▲▼] - [8▲▼] buttons. You can use the keyboard to
select the desired percussion instrument.
MAIN ON/OFF Same as the [MAIN] button.
LAYER ON/OFF Same as the [LAYER] button.
LEFT ON/OFF Same as the [LEFT] button.
OTS+ Calls up the next One Touch Setting.
OTS- Calls up the previous One Touch Setting.
* For best results, use the optional Yamaha FC7 Foot Controller.
The parameters below correspond to buttons [2▲▼] - [8▲▼], and their availability depends on the selected control Type. For example, if
SUSTAIN is selected as the Type, the parameters “HALF PEDAL POINT”, “MAIN”, “LAYER” and “LEFT” automatically appear in the display.
SONG, STYLE, MIC (PSR-2000 These specify the part(s) that will be affected by the pedal.
only), LEFT, LAYER, MAIN
HALF PEDAL POINT* You can specify how far down you should press on the foot pedal until the damper effect starts working. This can be set
for certain kinds of pedals, such as the foot pedal (YAMAHA FC7) (FOOT PEDAL 2 only).
UP/DOWN When GLIDE or PITCH BEND is selected, this determines whether the pitch change goes up (is raised) or down (is lowered).
RANGE When GLIDE or PITCH BEND is selected, this determines the range of the pitch change, in semitones.
ON SPEED When GLIDE is selected, this determines the speed of the pitch change, when the pedal is pressed.
OFF SPEED When GLIDE is selected, this determines the speed of the pitch change, when the pedal is released.
KIT When PERCUSSION is assigned to the pedal, all available drum kits are shown here, letting you select the particular
drum kit used for the pedal.
PERCUSSION When PERCUSSION is assigned to the pedal, all sounds of the selected drum kit (in KIT above) are shown here. This
determines the particular instrument sound assigned to the pedal.
* For best results, use the optional Yamaha FC7 Foot Controller.
140 PSR-2000/1000
Changing the Touch Sensitivity Modulation and Transpose — Keyboard/Panel

Keyboard Touch/Modulation Wheel
The Touch feature lets you control the volume of the voices by your playing strength. These settings allow you to
customize the keyboard’s touch response (sensitivity) to your personal playing preferences. You can also set whether the
Modulation wheel is effective or not — for each individual keyboard part.
HARD 2 Requires strong playing to produce
Selects the desired high volume. Best for players with a
parameter: Keyboard A
heavy touch.
Touch, Modulation HARD 1 Requires moderately strong playing for
B
Wheel (PSR-2000) or higher volume.
Transpose Assign. C NORMAL Standard touch response.
D SOFT 1 Produces high volume with moderate
playing strength.
E
Determines the SOFT 2 Produces relatively high volume even
Touch sensitivity with light playing strength. Best for
setting (Keyboard players with a light touch.
Touch only; refer to
the table at right).
The TOUCH setting affects all voices globally. Keep
in mind that you can set each voice to a different
touch sensitivity (TOUCH SENSE). For example, to
Determines the 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 play a pipe organ voice most authentically, you can
fixed volume level set this so that the voice is not affected by touch
when touch is set (page 88).
to “off” (Keyboard
Touch only).
Determines whether Touch and Modulation Wheel controls are on or not for the corresponding parts.
Transpose Assign
This determines which aspect of the instrument is affected by the [TRANSPOSE] button.
Transpose
Allows you to shift the pitch of the keyboard-played voices,
accompaniment style playback, and song data in semitone units.
1 Press one of the [TRANSPOSE] buttons.

TRANSPOSE
RESET
2 A TRANSPOSE pop-up window, selected via TRANSPOSE

ASSIGN, appears.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
KEYBOARD
3 Adjust the value by using the [TRANSPOSE] buttons.
For this setting, Transpose affects the pitch of the Close the TRANSPOSE windows by pressing the
keyboard-played voices (Main, Layer, and Left) and
the accompaniment styles.
END [EXIT] button.
SONG • Selectively Transposing Keyboard/Song

For this setting, Transpose affects only the pitch of These settings can be used to match both the song and your
the songs.
keyboard performance to a certain key. For example, let’s say
MASTER you wish to play and sing along with a certain recorded song.
For this setting, Transpose affects the pitch of the
The song data is in F, but you feel most comfortable singing in D,
entire instrument (keyboard voices,
accompaniment styles, and songs). and you are accustomed to playing the keyboard part in C. To
match up the keys, keep the Master Transpose setting at “0,” set
the Keyboard Transpose to “2,” and set Song Transpose to “-3.”
The transpose function
does not affect the Drum
This brings the keyboard part up in pitch and the song data
Kit or SFX Kit voices. down to your comfortable singing key.
PSR-2000/1000 141
Setting the Registration Sequence, Freeze, and Voice Set

Specifying the Order for Calling Up Registration Memory Presets —

Registration Sequence
You can save your custom panel settings to the Registration Memory presets, and call them up by pressing the
appropriate REGISTRATION MEMORY buttons [1] - [8]. The convenient Registration Sequence function lets you call up
the presets in any order you specify, by simply using the [BACK]/[NEXT] buttons or the pedal as you play.
Indicates the file name of the selected

Registration Memory bank. Setting Registration
Determines which pedal is used to advance
Sequence Enable to “ON”
(increment) through the sequence.
overrides any other Pedal
settings (for pedals assigned
Determines which to “Regist (+) Pedal” and
pedal is used to A F “Regist (-) Pedal” here).
reverse (decrement) These include the pedal set-
B G
through the sequence. tings on page 139, and in
C H Voice Set on page 143.
D I
n
E J When both “Regist (+)
Pedal” and “Regist (-) Pedal”
Determines how Registration are set to “OFF,” the pedals
Sequence behaves when Turns the Registration cannot be used to step
reaching the end of the Sequence function through the Registration
sequence. on/off. When this is Sequence; only the [BACK]/
Stop set to “ON,” the [NEXT] buttons can be used
Pressing the [NEXT] button or programmed in the MAIN display.
the “advance” pedal has no Registration
effect. The sequence is 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Sequence is shown at n
“stopped.” the top right of the When both “Regist (+)
Top Main display, and you Pedal” and “Regist (-) Pedal”
The sequence starts again at can step through the are set to the same pedal,
the beginning. sequence in this “Regist (+) Pedal” takes
Next Bank display by using the priority.
The sequence automatically [BACK]/[NEXT]
moves to the beginning of the buttons or the pedals.
next Registration Memory bank
in the same folder.
Deletes all Registration

Memory numbers in the
Indicates the Registration Memory preset sequence.
numbers, in the order of the current
Registration Sequence. Deletes the number at the
cursor position.
Registration Sequence data
is included as part of the
Inserts the number of the currently Registration Memory bank
These move the cursor position in the sequence. selected Registration Memory preset file. To save your newly pro-
immediately before the cursor position. grammed Registration
Replaces the number at the cursor position with the Sequence, store the current
currently selected Registration Memory number. Registration Memory bank
file (page 38, 44). Any Regis-
tration Sequence data is lost
when changing Registration
END Execute the settings by pressing the [EXIT] button. Memory banks, unless
you’ve stored it with the Reg-
istration Memory bank file.
Maintaining Panel Settings — Freeze

This lets you specify the settings you want to be maintained or left unchanged, even when changing Registration
Memory presets. For details, see page 86.
142 PSR-2000/1000
Changing the Automatically Selected Voice Settings — Voice Set

When changing voices (selecting a voice file), the settings best matching the voice — the same as those set in the Sound
Creator — are always and automatically called up. From this page, you can set the on/off status for each part. For
example, each of the preset voices has its own LEFT PEDAL setting; however, even changing voices will not change the
LEFT PEDAL setting, if it is set to “OFF” in this page.
Normally, these should all be

A set to “ON.”
desired part. B
Harmony/echo cannot be set

D
for the Layer and Left parts.
E
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
These determine whether the corresponding voice-related settings

(Voice selection, Effects, EQ (PSR-2000) and Harmony/echo
assignment) are automatically called up or not when you select a voice.
These settings can be turned on or off independently for each part.
Setting Harmony and Echo

Determines the lowest velocity value at

which the harmony note will sound. This
allows you to selectively apply the harmony
by your playing strength, letting you create
harmony accents in the melody. The
harmony effect is applied when you play
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
the key strongly (above the set value).
Determines the Harmony type.
For details, see page 144.
When this is set to “ON,” the Harmony
effect is applied only to the note that
belongs to a chord played in the Auto
Determines the level of the Harmony effect. Accompaniment section of the keyboard.
This parameter is not available when Multi
Assign, Echo, Tremolo, or Trill is selected in
Determines the speed of the Echo, Tremolo, and Trill Type above.
effects. This parameter is only available when Echo,
Tremolo, or Trill is selected in Type above. This lets you assign the Harmony
effect to various parts. For details,
see page 144.
PSR-2000/1000 143
About the Harmony Types
When a normal Harmony type (“Standard Duet” through “Strum”) is selected

Split point
Harmony notes (based on the chord

Chords played to the left of the and the selected type) are automatically
split point control the harmony. added to the melody played to the right
of the split point.
When “Multi Assign” is selected

Multi Assign automatically assigns notes played simultaneously on the right-hand section of the keyboard to
separate parts (voices). For example, if you play two consecutive notes, the first is played by the Main voice and the
second by the Layer voice.
When “Echo” is selected

An echo effect is applied to the note played on the keyboard, in time with the currently set tempo.
When “Tremolo” is selected

A tremolo effect is applied to the note played on the keyboard, in time with the currently set tempo.
When “Trill” is selected

Two notes held on the keyboard are played alternately, in time with the currently set tempo.
About the Harmony Assignments

AUTO
Harmony notes are automatically assigned the MAIN and LAYER parts.
Multi
This automatically assigns the 1st, 2nd, 3rd, and 4th added harmony notes to different parts (voices). For example, if the
Main and Layer parts are turned on and the “Standard Duet” type is selected, the note you play on the keyboard will be
played by the Main voice, and the added harmony note will be played by the Layer voice.
Main
Harmony is applied only to the Main part. When the Main part is turned off, Harmony is not applied.
Layer
Harmony is applied only to the Layer part. When the Layer part is turned off, Harmony is not applied.
144 PSR-2000/1000
Setting the MIDI Parameters

In this section, you can make MIDI-related settings for the instrument. These settings can be stored all together from the
USER display, for future recall.For general information and details about MIDI, see “What is MIDI?” (page 155).
Preset MIDI Templates (Factory Set)

1 Select the desired template.
All Parts Transmit all parts including Main, Layer
and Left.
Master KBD The PSR-2000/1000 functions as a
master keyboard for controlling external
tone generators or other devices.
A F KBD & Style Transmit Upper and Lower keyboard play

instead of the individual parts (Main/
B G Layer/Left).
C H
Song All Transmit channels are set to
correspond to the Song channels 1-16.
D I
Use this to play the PSR-2000/1000
song data with an external tone
E J
generator, or to record your entire
performance to an external sequencer.
Clock Ext. MIDI IN terminal receives MIDI clock and
PSR-2000/1000 synchronizes with a
external MIDI device.
MIDI Accord 1 An ideal setup for controlling the
keyboard voice and accompaniment
style with a MIDI accordion.
MIDI Accord 2 Chord and bass buttons on a MIDI
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 accordion control the accompaniment
style, as well as play the chord and bass
parts.
MIDI Pedal 1 The MIDI pedal connected to MIDI IN
terminal controls the bass note of the
3 Call up the User display

and press this button to
2 Call up the Edit display, then
select and set the desired MIDI Pedal 2
accompaniment.
The MIDI pedal connected to MIDI IN
terminal plays the bass part.
save the newly edited functions/parameters.
MIDI OFF MIDI signals are neither sent nor
MIDI settings. For details about each of the received.
Up to ten setups can MIDI edit displays, see the
be saved. following pages.
The saved settings can be named (page 41)
or deleted (page 43) in the User page.
END Press the [EXIT] button to return to the previous display.
Making Overall System Settings (Local Control, Clock, etc.) — System

Call up the display as described in step 2 above.
For editing the Local Control parameters.

For editing the Clock, Transmit Clock,
Receive Transpose, and Start/Stop
parameters. For editing the Message Switch
parameters.
Local Control
Turns the Local Control for each part on or off. When Local Control is set to “ON,” the keyboard of the PSR-2000/1000
controls its own (local) internal tone generator, allowing the internal voices to be played directly from the keyboard. If
you set Local to “OFF,” the keyboard and controllers are internally disconnected from the PSR-2000/1000’s tone
generator section so that no sound is output when you play the keyboard or use the controllers. For example, this allows
you to use an external MIDI sequencer to play the PSR-2000/1000’s internal voices, and use the PSR-2000/1000
keyboard to record notes to the external sequencer and/or play an external tone generator.
PSR-2000/1000 145
Clock, Transmit Clock, Receive Transpose, Start/Stop

■ Clock
Determines whether the PSR-2000/1000 is controlled by its own internal clock or a MIDI clock signal received from
an external device. “INTERNAL” is the normal Clock setting when the PSR-2000/1000 is being used alone. If you are
using the PSR-2000/1000 with an external sequencer, MIDI computer, or other MIDI device, and you want the PSR-
2000/1000 to be synchronized to the external device, set this function to “EXTERNAL.” In the latter case, the
external device must be connected to the PSR-2000/1000 MIDI IN terminal, and must be transmitting an
appropriate MIDI clock signal.
■ Transmit Clock
Turns MIDI clock transmission on or off. When this is set to “OFF,” no MIDI clock or START/STOP data is
transmitted.
■ Receive Transpose
When this parameter is set to “OFF,” note data received by the PSR-2000/1000 is not transposed, and when it is set
to “ON,” the received note data is transposed according to the current PSR-2000/1000 keyboard transpose
(page 141) setting.
■ Start/Stop
FA, FC
Determines whether incoming FA (start) and FC (stop) messages affect song or MIDI messages for starting/stop-
style playback. ping the song or style. The “FA”
message corresponds to start,
and “FC” corresponds to stop.
Message Switch
SYS/EX. Tx (TRANSMIT)..................... Turns MIDI transmission of MIDI system exclusive message data ON or OFF.
SYS/EX. Rx (RECEIVE) ........................ Turns MIDI reception of MIDI exclusive data generated by external equipment
ON or OFF.
CHORD SYS/EX. Tx (TRANSMIT) ...... Turns MIDI transmission of MIDI chord exclusive data (chord detect — root and
type) ON or OFF.
CHORD SYS/EX. Rx (RECEIVE).......... Turns MIDI reception of MIDI chord exclusive data generated by external
equipment ON or OFF.
Transmitting MIDI Data — Transmit

This determines which parts will send MIDI data and over which MIDI channel the data will be sent.
A
Determines the
channel for changing B
transmit settings.
C
E
The dots corresponding to each
channel (1-16) flash briefly
whenever any data is
transmitted on the channel(s).
Determines the Part for the Turns transmission of the

selected channel. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 specified data type on or off.
See below for details on the
data types.
Data Types in the MIDI TRANSMIT/RECEIVE Display

Note Messages which are generated when the keyboard is played. Each message includes a specific note number which
corresponds to the key which is pressed, plus a velocity value based on how hard the key is played.
Control Change (CC) Control change data includes pedal and any other controller data.
Program Change (PC) Program change data corresponds to voice or “patch” numbers.
Pitch Bend (PB) See page 140.
After Touch (AT)* With this function, the PSR-2000/1000 senses how much pressure you apply to the keys while playing, and uses that
pressure to affect the sound in various ways, depending on the selected voice. This allows you to play with greater
expressiveness and add effects with your playing technique.
* Available in RECEIVE display only (page 147).
146 PSR-2000/1000
Receiving MIDI Data — Receive

This determines which parts will receive MIDI data and over which MIDI channel the data will be received.
The MIDI IN/OUT terminals

A and Port A of the TO HOST
Determines the channel for terminal (Port A of the CBX
changing receive settings. B
driver) correspond to chan-
C nels 1 - 16. Port B of the TO
The dots corresponding to each HOST terminal (Port B of the
channel (1 - 32) flash briefly
D CBX driver) corresponds to
whenever any data is received E
channels 17 - 32.
on the channel(s).
Determines the Part for the Turns reception of the specified

selected channel. See below for data type on or off. See page 146
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
details about the receive parts. for details on the data types.
MIDI Receive Parts

OFF No MIDI data is received.
SONG Normally, the part receiving the MIDI data corresponds to the part/voice used in playing back the song data. Channels 1 - 16
correspond to song channels 1 - 16, respectively.
MAIN The MAIN part is controlled by the MIDI data received on the corresponding channel.
LAYER The LAYER part is controlled by the MIDI data received on the corresponding channel.
LEFT The LEFT part is controlled by the MIDI data received on the corresponding channel.
KEYBOARD MIDI note data received by the PSR-2000/1000 plays the corresponding notes in the same way as if they are played on the keyboard.
ACMP RHYTHM1-2 The received notes are used as the accompaniment RHYTHM 1 and RHYTHM 2.
ACMP BASS The received notes are used as the accompaniment BASS.
ACMP CHORD1-2 The received notes are used as the accompaniment CHORD 1 and CHORD 2.
ACMP PAD The received notes are used as the accompaniment PAD.
ACMP PHRASE1-2 The received notes are used as the accompaniment PHRASE 1 and PHRASE 2.
EXTRA PART1-5 There are five parts specially reserved for receiving and playing MIDI data. Normally, these parts are not used by the instrument
itself. When these five channels are enabled, you can use the instrument as a 32-channel multi-timbral tone generator.
Setting Root Note Channels — Root

The note ON/OFF messages received at the channel(s) set to “ON” are recognized as the root notes in the accompaniment
section. The root notes will be detected regardless of the accompaniment ON/OFF and split point settings.
The MIDI IN/OUT terminals

A and Port A of the TO HOST
Selects the channels in groups of terminal (Port A of the CBX
B
eight: 1 - 8, 9 - 16, 17 - 24, and 25 driver) correspond to chan-
- 32, respectively. C nels 1 - 16. Port B of the TO
HOST terminal (Port B of the
D CBX driver) corresponds to
E
channels 17 - 32.
When several channels are

simultaneously set to “ON,”
the root note is detected
from merged MIDI data
Sets the desired channel to ON or OFF. received over the channels.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Sets all channels to OFF.
Setting Chord Channels — Chord Detect

The note ON/OFF messages received at the channel(s) set to “ON” are recognized as the chord notes in the
accompaniment section. The chords to be detected depend on the fingering type. The root notes will be detected
regardless of the accompaniment ON/OFF and split point settings. The operation procedure is basically the same as that
of the ROOT display above.
PSR-2000/1000 147
Other Settings — Utility

Making Settings for Fade In/Out, Metronome, Parameter Lock, and

Tap — CONFIG 1
Fade In Time, Fade Out Time, Fade Out Hold Time
These determine how long it takes for the accompaniment style and song to fade in or fade out.
Determines the time it takes for the

volume to fade in, or go from minimum to Determines the time the volume is held
maximum (range of 0 - 20.0 seconds). at 0 following the fade out (range of 0 -
5.0 seconds).
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Determines the time it takes for the

volume to fade out, or go from maximum
to minimum (range of 0 - 20.0 seconds).
Metronome
These let you make settings for the metronome-related parameters.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Determines the level of the Determines the time

metronome sound. signature of the metronome
sound.
Determines which sound is used for the metronome.
When you start the song or
Bell Off ........................ Conventional metronome sound, with no bell.
accompaniment style, the
Bell On......................... Conventional metronome sound, with bell.
values matching to them are
automatically set.
148 PSR-2000/1000
Parameter Lock
This function is used to “lock” the specified parameters so that they can only be changed directly via the panel controls
— in other words, instead of via Registration Memory, One Touch Setting, Music Finder, or song and sequence data.
PSR-2000 only
Selects the desired Determines whether the selected

parameter for locking/ 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 parameter is locked (checkmarked)
unlocking. or unlocked (empty).
Tap Count
This lets you change settings of the tap sound, used for the Tap Start function (page 51).
Determines the particular sound

used for the Tap Start function.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Any drum or percussion sound Determines the level of the tap
in the Standard Kit (page 55) sound.
can be selected.
Making Settings for the Display and Voice Number Indication

— CONFIG 2
Determines whether or not the voice bank

and number are shown in the PRESET
Determines the brightness of page of the VOICE display (page 54).
the backlit display. This is useful when you want to check the
proper bank select MSB/LSB values and
program number to specify when
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 selecting the voice from an external MIDI
device.
PSR-2000/1000 149
Copying and Formatting Disks — Disk

• Copying cannot be done
between a 2DD disk and
2HD disk. When copying,
F This function copies all the data make sure both disk are
from one disk to another, letting you the same type.
G back up all your important data • Depending on the amount
H
before editing. For instructions, see of data contained in the
“Copying from Disk to Disk” below. original source disk, you
I may have to swap the two
disks several times until all
J This function formats a of the data is properly
floppy disk (see below). copied.
• Make sure to read the
section “Using the Floppy
Disk Drive (FDD) and
Turns the Song Auto Open function on or off. Floppy Disks” on page 7.
When this is set to “ON,” the PSR-2000/1000
automatically calls up the first disk song when
a disk is inserted.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Copying from Disk to Disk

As shown below, first copy the data of the original (source) disk to the PSR-2000/1000, Internal memory
then copy the data to the backup (destination) disk.
Copy Copy
1 Press the [F] button. A message

appears, prompting you to insert 2 Insert the disk containing the
original data into the drive and
the source disk. press “OK.” Source Destination
disk disk
A “Now copying” message
appears, and the PSR-2000/
Commercially available
1000 begins copying data to music data is subject to
internal memory. To abort the
3 At the “Please insert a destination
disk and press the OK button ” operation, press “CANCEL.”
protection by copyright
laws. Copying commer-
cially available data is
prompt, eject the source disk and strictly prohibited,
replace it with a blank, formatted except for your own per-
disk, then press “OK.” To abort the
operation, press “CANCEL.”
4 When the operation is finished
(or when prompted), eject the
sonal use. Some music
software is purposely
destination disk. copy-protected and
cannot be copied.
Formatting a Disk
When using an unformatted disk for the first time, make sure to properly
format it on the PSR-2000/1000. This includes blank disks as well as disks The Format operation initializes a disk
already initialized in a different format. Formatting erases all data on the with a specific file system, allowing the
disk. corresponding device (in this case, the
PSR-2000/1000) to access it properly.
Since there are several types of for-
mats and disks available, you should
know which ones to use with the PSR-
2000/1000. 2DD disks are formatted to
Disk Lamp a capacity of 720 KB, and 2HD disks
When the power is turned are formatted to a capacity of 1.44 MB.
on, the disk lamp (at the
bottom left of the drive)
lights to indicate the drive
CAUTION
can be used.
Formatting a disk completely erases all
data on the disk. Make sure that the
disk you’re formatting does not contain
Insert the disk with shutter facing away from you and the label side up. To important data!
start the Format operation, press the [H] (DISK FORMAT) button, in the
DISK page above.
150 PSR-2000/1000
Entering Your Name and Language Preference — Owner
F
When “JAPANESE” is selected for the Lan-
G guage parameter, and you change this to
Press this button to one of the western languages, the kanji and
enter an Owner name H kana characters of the file name stored in the
(page 17; for I
disk drive are changed to western charac-
instructions on naming ters. In the opposite case, special Latin char-
see page 45). This J acters and marks are changed into normal
name is automatically characters. Also, in the case of floppy disk
shown when you turn data, text in the files are changed to charac-
the power on. ters that cannot be read by the instrument.
Keep in mind that similar problems may
Determines the language occur when trying to access files originating
used for the display or edited by a computer having a different
messages. Once you language operating system. In general, be
change this setting, all careful when switching languages— you risk
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
messages will be shown in not being able to access the data properly.
the selected language.
Restoring the Factory-programmed Settings of the PSR-2000/1000

— System Reset
This operation lets you restore the PSR-2000/1000 to its original factory settings. These settings include System Setup,
MIDI Setup, User Effect, Music Finder, and Files & Folders.
Restores the System Setup parameters to the

original factory settings. You can also restore
only the System Setup settings by The functions and settings
simultaneously holding down the highest key below do not apply to the
on the keyboard (C6) and turning on the power. Factory Reset operation.
However, you can restore
these to their original set-
tings by calling up the preset
A F System Setup files, using
Restores the MIDI
the Open/Save System Files
templates to the original B G
function.
factory settings.
C H Language
Owner Name
Restores the User Effects D I LCD Brightness
(page 125) to the original
factory settings. E J
Restores the Music Finder

All Music Finder records can
data to the original factory
be stored together as a sin-
settings.
gle file. When calling up a
Deletes all files and folders stored file, a message
stored in the User page. appears prompting you to
replace or append the
records as desired.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Replace:
All Music Finder records cur-
rently in the instrument are
deleted and replaced with
These call up the corresponding Open/ the records of the selected
Executes the Factory Reset operation
Save displays. These let you store the file.
for all items checkmarked above.
corresponding data as files to disk, for Append:
future recall. Pressing each of these The records called up are
buttons calls up the corresponding added to the vacant record
Open/Save display, from which you can numbers.
select the corresponding PRESET
page. From this PRESET page, you
can save the relevant data.
PSR-2000/1000 151
CAUTION
Before connecting the PSR-2000/1000 to other electronic compo-
1 Connect your microphone to the MIC./LINE IN jack
(standard 1/4" phone jack).
nents, turn off the power to all the components. Before turning the
power on or off to all components, set all volume levels to minimum Use an unidirectional microphone for best results.
(0). Otherwise, electrical shock or damage to the components may
occur.
2 Set the [MIC. LINE] switch (located next to the

[MIC./LINE IN] jack) to the MIC. position.
MIC. LINE MIC. LINE
When connecting a microphone When connecting a guitar
You should set the [MIC. LINE] switch to the LINE position when
connecting an audio source with line-level output to the MIC./LINE
IN jack.
1 Using the Headphones
(PHONES jack).
A standard pair of stereo headphones can be plugged in
3 Use the [INPUT VOLUME]
knob (located next to the
here for private practice or late-night playing. The internal MIC./LINE IN jack) to set the
stereo speaker system is automatically shut off when a microphone volume then
pair of headphones is plugged into the PHONES jack trying singing into the
(page 149). microphone.
The volume should be set high enough that the
SIGNAL lamp on the top panel lights steadily when
2 Connecting the Microphone you sing, but not so high that the OVER lamp lights
(page 128).
or Guitar (MIC./LINE IN jack)
P.152 P.153
(PSR-2000 only).
2 3
By connecting a microphone to the PSR-2000, you can
enjoy singing along with your own performance or song
playback. (A dynamic microphone is recommended.) The
PSR-2000 outputs your vocals or guitar sounds through MIC. LINE INPUT
VOLUME
MIC./
LINE IN
R
AUX OUT
L
(LEVEL FIXED)
R L/L+R
OUTPUT
DC IN 16V
the built-in speakers.
P.154 P.153 P.153

6 5 4
TO HOST Mac MIDI IN OUT 2

PC1 PC2
HOST SELECT MIDI FOOT PEDAL
152 PSR-2000/1000
3 Playing the sounds of the 4 Using the Pedal (footswitch)

PSR-2000/1000 through an or Foot Controller (FOOT
external audio system, and PEDAL 1/2 jack)
recording the sounds to an By connecting a Foot Switch (the FC4 or FC5) to one of
the FOOT PEDAL jacks, you can replicate the function of
external recorder (AUX OUT/ some panel buttons, doing things like starting and
OUTPUT jacks) stopping accompaniment.
You can connect the PSR-2000/1000 to a wide range of By connecting an optional Foot Controller (such as the
audio equipment by using the AUX OUT and OUTPUT FC7) to the FOOT PEDAL 2 jack, you can control any one
jacks. of a variety of important functions with your foot — such
Connect as shown in the illustrations below using as dynamically adjusting the volume as you play
standard audio cables. (page 139).
The polarity of the foot switch (normal or reverse) can also be

Use audio cables and adaptor plugs with no resistance. changed (page 139).
CAUTION CAUTION
When the PSR-2000/1000 AUX OUT and OUTPUT jacks are Make sure to connect or disconnect the pedal only when the power
connected to an external audio system, first turn on the power to is turned off.
the PSR-2000/1000, then to the external audio system. Reverse
this order when you turn the power off.
5 Connecting external MIDI

devices (MIDI terminals)
To powered speaker
Using a standard MIDI cable, connect the external MIDI
Audio cable
device to the MIDI terminal(s) of the PSR-2000/1000.
RCA pin RCA pin plug
Phone plug Make sure to set the HOST SELECT switch (page 18) to
plug (standard)
MIDI when you use these connectors. For more
AUX IN information about connections, see “What You Can Do
With MIDI” on page 158.
R
AUX OUT
L
(LEVEL FIXED)
R L/L+R
OUTPUT MIDI IN ...........Receives MIDI messages from an
Cassette tape recorder external MIDI device
stereo system When these are connected
(with standard phone MIDI OUT........Sends out MIDI messages generated by
When these are connected
(with RCA pin plug; LEVEL plugs), you can use the the PSR-2000/1000
FIXED), the sound is output to [MASTER VOLUME]
the external device at a fixed control to adjust the volume For a general overview of MIDI and how you can
level, regardless of the of the sound output to the effectively use it, refer to the following sections:
[MASTER VOLUME] control external device.
• What’s MIDI? (page 155)
setting.
• What You Can Do With MIDI (page 158)
• MIDI functions (page 145)
• If you connect the PSR-2000/1000 to a monaural device, use

only the OUTPUT L/L+R jack. • Never use MIDI cables longer than 15 meters.
PSR-2000/1000 153
6 Connecting to a Computer Using the TO HOST terminal

Connect the serial port of the personal computer (RS-
(MIDI terminals/TO HOST 232C terminal or RS-422 terminal) to the TO HOST
terminal) terminal of the PSR-2000/1000. For the connection cable,
use the appropriate cable below (sold separately) that
Connect your PSR-2000/1000 to computer and take matches the personal computer type.
advantage of the wide range of powerful and versatile
software for creating and editing music. The PSR-2000/
1000 can be connected in three ways. If your system does not work properly with the connections and
settings listed above, your software may require different settings.
■ Using the TO HOST terminal Check your software operation manual and set the HOST SELECT
■ Using the MIDI terminals switch to the proper data transfer rate. (Data transfer rate of “PC-1”
is 31,250 bps.)
■ Connecting to a USB terminal by using an optional
USB interface (UX series)
■ IBM-PC/AT (Windows)
Connect the RS-232C terminal on the computer to the
• You’ll need an appropriate music/MIDI software program (such
as a sequencer), compatible with your computer platform. TO HOST terminal on the PSR-2000/1000 using a
serial cable (D-SUB 9P → MINI DIN 8P cross cable).
• When connecting the PSR-2000/1000 to a personal computer, first
turn off the power to both the PSR-2000/1000 and the computer
Set the PSR-2000/1000 HOST SELECT switch to the
before connecting any cables and setting the HOST SELECT “PC-2.” (Data transfer rate is 38,400 bps.)
switch. After making the proper connections and settings, turn on
the power of the computer first, then that of the PSR-2000/1000.
• If you do not use the TO HOST terminal of the PSR-2000/1000, NEC MultiSync
make sure you disconnect the cable from the terminal. If the cable PC-9821 AS
is left connected, the PSR-2000/1000 may not function properly. MINI DIN D-sub NEC
8-pin 9-pin
• When the HOST SELECT switch is set to “PC-1,” “PC-2,” or

“Mac,” you can use the TO HOST terminal, but the MIDI connec-
tors are disabled since no data transfer occurs via the MIDI con- MINI DIN
8-pin
D-sub
25-pin
D-sub
9-pin
Mac MIDI
nectors. On the other hand, when the HOST SELECT switch is PC-1 PC-2
set to “MIDI,” you can use the MIDI connectors, but not the TO * When using a D-SUB 25P
HOST terminal since no data is transferred via the TO HOST ter- → MINI DIN 8P cross
minal. cable, connect using a D-
SUB9P plug adaptor on
the computer side of the
cable.
Note for Windows users (regarding MIDI ■ Macintosh

driver) Connect RS-422 terminal (modem or printer) on the
To transfer data via the computer’s serial port and the computer to the TO HOST terminal on the PSR-2000/
PSR-2000/1000’s TO HOST terminal, you need to 1000 using a serial cable (system peripheral cable, 8
install a specified MIDI driver (Yamaha CBX driver for bit). Set the PSR-2000/1000 HOST SELECT switch to
Windows). The Floppy Disk that came with your PSR- the “MAC” (Data transfer rate is 31,250 bps).
2000/1000 contains the compressed driver file
“mididrv.zip.” After extracting the file, execute the Set the MIDI interface clock in the sequencer you are
installation by double-clicking on the “Setup.exe” file using to 1 MHz. For details, refer to the owner’s
in the “MidiDrv” folder and follow the on-screen manual for the particular software you are using.
directions. In addition, you can download this driver
from the XG Library on the Yamaha Web site:
http://www.yamaha-xg.com
MINI DIN MINI DIN
8-pin 8-pin
Mac MIDI
PC-1 PC-2
154 PSR-2000/1000
Using the MIDI terminals Using the USB terminal on your computer
When using a MIDI interface device installed in the with a USB/MIDI interface (UX256/UX96,
personal computer, connect the MIDI terminals of the etc.)
personal computer and the PSR-2000/1000 with standard Connect the UX256/UX96 and the computer with a USB
MIDI cables. cable. Install the included UX256/UX96 driver to the
• When the computer has a MIDI interface installed, computer, and connect the UX256/UX96 to the PSR-
connect the MIDI OUT terminal of the personal 2000/1000 with a MIDI cable. Set the HOST SELECT
computer to the MIDI IN terminal. Set the HOST switch on the PSR-2000/1000 to “MIDI.” For details, refer
SELECT switch to “MIDI.” to the owner’s manual of the UX256/UX96.
IN OUT
MIDI IN MIDI OUT

MIDI
NEC MultiSync
MIDI OUT MIDI IN

PC-9821 AS
NEC MultiSync USB UX256 MIDI IN

NEC
cable
PC-9821 AS
NEC
MIDI OUT
Personal computer
Mac MIDI
PC-1 PC-2 Mac
PC-1
MIDI
PC-2
• When using a MIDI interface with a Macintosh series For details about the necessary MIDI settings for computer
computer, connect the RS-422 terminal of the and sequence software you are using, refer to the relevant
computer (modem or printer terminal) to the MIDI owner’s manuals.
interface, then connect the MIDI OUT terminal on the
MIDI interface to the MIDI IN terminal of the PSR-
2000/1000, as shown in the diagram below.
Set the HOST SELECT switch to “MIDI.”
What’s MIDI?
MIDI IN
RS422
Let’s consider an acoustic piano and a classical guitar as
MIDI OUT
representative acoustic instruments. With the piano, you
MINI DIN
8-pin strike a key, and a hammer inside hits some strings and
plays a note. With the guitar, you directly pluck a string
and the note sounds.
Mac
PC-1
MIDI
PC-2
But how does a digital instrument go about playing a
note?
• When the HOST SELECT switch is set to “MIDI,” the Acoustic guitar note Digital instrument note
production production
TO HOST terminal is disabled.
• When using a Macintosh series computer, set the Internal amp Internal amp
Tone generator
L R
MIDI interface clock setting in the application (Electric circuit)
software to match the setting of the MIDI interface

Playing
you are using. For details, refer to the owner’s the keyboard
manual for the particular software you are using.

Based on playing information
from the keyboard, a
sampled note stored in the
Pluck a string and the body
tone generator is played
resonates the sound.
through the speakers.
As shown in the illustration above, in an electronic

instrument, the sampled note (previously recorded note)
stored in the tone generator section (electronic circuit) is
played based on information received from the keyboard,
and output through the speakers.
PSR-2000/1000 155
Now let’s examine what happens when we play back a The “controller” and “tone generator” in the illustration
recording. When you playback a music CD (for example, above are equivalent to the piano in our acoustic
a solo piano recording), you’re hearing the actual sound example. Here, the player’s performance on the keyboard
(vibrations in air) of the acoustic instrument. This is called is captured as MIDI song data (see illustration below). In
audio data, to distinguish it from MIDI data. order to record the audio performance on an acoustic
piano, special recording equipment is needed. However,
Recording and playing back the performance of an acoustic
instrument (audio data)
since the PSR-2000/1000 features a built-in sequencer
that lets you record performance data, this recording
Recording Playback equipment is unnecessary. Instead, your digital instrument
— the PSR-2000/1000 — allows you to both record and
play back the data.
Tone generator
Sequencer
Keyboard performance
(MIDI data)
In the above example, the actual acoustic sounds of the
pianist’s performance are captured in the recording as However, we also need a sound source to produce the
audio data, and this is recorded to CD. When you play audio, which eventually comes from your speakers. The
back that CD on your audio system, you can hear the tone generator of the PSR-2000/1000 fills this function.
actual piano performance. The piano itself is not The recorded performance is reproduced by the
necessary, since the recording contains the actual sounds sequencer, playing back the song data, using a tone
of the piano, and your speakers reproduce them. generator capable of accurately producing various
instrument sounds — including that of a piano. Looked at
Recording and playing back the performance of a digital in another way, the relation of the sequencer and the tone
instrument (MIDI data)
generator is similar to that of the pianist and the piano —
Recording Playback one plays the other. Since digital instruments handle
playback data and the actual sounds independently, we
can hear our piano performance played by another
Tone generator instrument, such as guitar or violin.
Sequencer
FD
Controller (keyboard, etc.) Even though it is a single musical instrument, the PSR-2000/1000
can be thought of as containing several electronic components: a
controller, a tone generator, and a sequencer.
FD
Finally, we’ll take a look at the actual data that gets
recorded and that serves as the basis for playing the
sounds. For example, let’s say you play a “C” quarter note
In the case of digital instruments, the audio signals are sent using the grand piano sound on the PSR-2000/1000
through output jacks (such as AUX OUT) on the instrument. keyboard. Unlike an acoustic instrument that puts out a
resonated note, the electronic instrument puts out
information from the keyboard such as “with what voice,”
“with which key,” “about how strong,” “when was it
pressed” and “when was it released.” Then each piece of
information is changed into a number value and sent to
the tone generator. Using these numbers as a basis, the
tone generator plays the stored sampled note.
156 PSR-2000/1000
■ Example Keyboard Data

MIDI channels
Voice number (with what voice) 01 (grand piano) MIDI performance data is assigned to one of sixteen
Note number (with which key) 60 (C3) MIDI channels. Using these channels, 1 - 16, the
Note on (when was it pressed) Timing expressed numerically
performance data for sixteen different instrument parts
and (quarter note) can be simultaneously sent over one MIDI cable.
note off (when was it released)
Think of the MIDI channels as TV channels. Each TV
Velocity (about how strong) 120 (strong)
station transmits its broadcasts over a specific
channel.Your home TV set receives many different
Panel operations on the PSR-2000/1000, such as playing
programs simultaneously from several TV stations and
the keyboard and selecting voices, are processed and
you select the appropriate channel to watch the desired
stored as MIDI data. The auto accompaniment styles and
program.
songs also consist of MIDI data.
MIDI is an acronym that stands for Musical Instrument
Digital Interface, which allows electronic musical Weather Report
instruments to communicate with each other, by sending News 2

and receiving compatible Note, Control Change, Program 1
News
Change and various other types of MIDI data, or 2
messages.
The PSR-2000/1000 can control a MIDI device by MIDI operates on the same basic principle. The
transmitting note related data and various types of transmitting instrument sends MIDI data on a specific
controller data.The PSR-2000/1000 can be controlled by MIDI channel (MIDI Transmit Channel) via a single
incoming MIDI messages which automatically determine MIDI cable to the receiving instrument. If the receiving
the tone generator mode, select MIDI channels, voices instrument’s MIDI channel (MIDI Receive Channel)
and effects, change parameter values and of course play matches the Transmit Channel, the receiving instrument
the voices specified for the various parts. will sound according to the data sent by the
transmitting instrument.
MIDI data has the following advantages over audio data:

• The amount of data is much less, letting you easily store MIDI
songs to floppy disk. MIDI
• The data can be effectively and easily edited, even to the point of cable
changing voices and transforming the data. MIDI transmit channel 2 MIDI receive channel 2
MIDI messages can be divided into two groups: Channel

messages and System messages. The PSR-2000/1000’s keyboard and internal tone generator are
also connected by MIDI (page 145).
■ Channel Messages For example, several tracks (channels) can be

The PSR-2000/1000 is an electronic instrument that can transmitted simultaneously, including the style data (as
handle 16 channels (or 32 channels, when using the TO shown below).
HOST terminal). This is usually expressed as “it can play Example: Recording the auto accompaniment of the PSR-2000/
16 instruments at the same time.” Channel messages 1000 to an external sequencer
transmit information such as Note ON/OFF, Program
Change, for each of the 16 channels.
Message Name PSR-2000/1000 Operation/Panel Setting MIDI cable or

serial cable
Note ON/OFF Messages which are generated when the PSR-2000/1000 track (channnel) External sequencer
keyboard is played. Each message includes MAIN Channel 1 Track 1
a specific note number which corresponds LAYER Channel 2 Track 2
to the key which is pressed, plus a velocity LEFT Channel 3 Track 3
value based on how hard the key is played. STYLE instrument Channel 4 Track 4
STYLE instrument Channel 5 Track 5
Program Change Voice selecting (control change bank select STYLE instrument Channel 6 Track 6
MSB/LSB setting) STYLE instrument Channel 7 Track 7
Control Change Volume, panpot (Mixing Console), etc.
The performance data of all songs and styles is handled as MIDI

data.
PSR-2000/1000 157
As you can see, it is essential to determine which data Data Compatibility

is to be sent over which MIDI channel when
transmitting MIDI data (page 146). The PSR-2000/1000 This section covers basic information on data
also allows you to determine how the received data is compatibility: whether or not other MIDI devices can
played back. (page 147). playback the data recorded by PSR-2000/1000, and
whether or not the PSR-2000/1000 can playback
commercially available song data or song data created for
■ System Messages other instruments or on a computer. Depending on the
This is data that is used in common by the entire MIDI MIDI device or data characteristics, you may be able to
system. System messages include messages like Exclusive play back the data without any problem, or you may have
Messages that transmit data unique to each instrument to perform some special operations before the data can be
manufacturer and Realtime Messages that control the played back. If you run into problems playing back data,
MIDI device. please refer to the information below.
Message Name PSR-2000/1000 Operation/Panel
Setting
Disk format
System Exclusive Effect type settings (Mixing Console),
Message etc. Floppy disks are the main storage medium for data used
Realtime Messages Clock setting, Start/stop operation with various devices, including computers. Different
devices have different systems of storing data, therefore it
The messages transmitted/received by the PSR-2000/1000 is necessary to first configure the floppy disk to the system
are shown in the MIDI Data Format and MIDI of the device being used.This operation is called
Implementation Chart in the separate Data List. “formatting.”
• There are two types of floppy disks: MF2DD (double
sided, double density) and MF2HD (double sided,
What You Can Do With MIDI high density), and each type has different formatting
systems.
The following MIDI settings can be made on the PSR-
2000/1000: • PSR-2000/1000 can record and playback with both
• MIDI templates (preset MIDI setups for various types of floppy disks.
applications) (page 145)
• Transmit (page 146) • When formatted by the PSR-2000/1000, a 2DD disk
• Receive (page 147) stores up to 720 KB (kilobytes) and a 2HD disk stores
• Local Control (page 145) up to1.44 MB (megabytes). (The figures “720 KB” and
• Clock (page 146) “1.44MB” indicate the data memory capacity. They are
also used to indicate the format type of disk.)
■ Record performance data (1-16 channels) using the • Playback is only possible when the MIDI device to be
PSR-2000/1000 Auto Accompaniment features on a used is compatible with the format of the disk.
external sequencer (such as a personal computer).
After recording, edit the data with the sequencer, then
play it again on the PSR-2000/1000 (playback).
PSR-2000/1000 MIDI receive

MIDI IN MIDI OUT
NEC MultiSync
MIDI OUT MIDI IN PC-9821 AS
NEC
MIDI transmit Personal cumputer,

QY series etc.
When you want to use the PSR-2000/1000 as an XG-

compatible multi-timbral tone generator, set the receive
part for MIDI channels 1 to 16 to “SONG” in MIDI
Receive (page 147).
■ Play and control the PSR-2000/1000 from a separate
keyboard
PSR-2000/1000
MIDI receive
MIDI IN MIDI OUT
158 PSR-2000/1000
Sequence Format Voice Allocation Format

The system which records song data is called “sequence With MIDI, voices are assigned to specific numbers,
format.” called “program numbers.” The numbering standard
Playback is only possible when the sequence format of (order of voice allocation) is referred to as the “voice
the disk matches that of the MIDI device. The PSR-2000/ allocation format.”
1000 is compatible with the following formats.
Voices may not play back as expected unless the voice
■ SMF (Standard MIDI File) allocation format of the song data matches that of the
This is the most common sequence format. compatible MIDI device used for playback.
Standard MIDI Files are generally available as one of two
The PSR-2000/1000 is compatible with the following
types: Format 0 or Format 1. Many MIDI devices are
formats.
compatible with Format 0, and most commercially
available software is recorded as Format 0.
• The PSR-2000/1000 is compatible with both Format 0 Even if the devices and data used satisfy all the conditions above,
and Format 1. the data may still not be completely compatible, depending on the
specifications of the devices and particular data recording
• Song data recorded on the PSR-2000/1000 is methods.
automatically recorded as SMF Format 0.
• Song data loaded to the PSR-2000/1000 is ■ GM System Level 1
automatically saved as SMF Format 0 regardless of the This is one of the most common voice allocation formats.
original format.
• Many MIDI devices are compatible with GM System
■ ESEQ Level1, as is most commercially available software.
This sequence format is compatible with many of
Yamaha’s MIDI devices, including the PSR-2000/1000 ■ XG
series instruments.This is a common format used with XG is a major enhancement of the GM System Level 1
various Yamaha software. format, and was developed by Yamaha specifically to
provide more voices and variations, as well as greater
■ XF expressive control over voices and effects, and to ensure
The Yamaha XF format enhances the SMF (Standard MIDI compatibility of data well into the future.
File) format with greater functionality and open-ended
expandability for the future. • Song data recorded on the PSR-2000/1000 using
voices in the [XG] category is XG-compatible.
• The PSR-2000/1000 is capable of displaying lyrics
when an XF file containing lyric data is played.
■ DOC
This voice allocation format is compatible with many of
■ Style File
Yamaha’s MIDI devices, including the PSR series
The Style File Format – SFF – is Yamaha’s original style file
instruments.This is also a common format used with
format which uses a unique conversion system to provide
various Yamaha software.
high-quality automatic accompaniment based on a wide
range of chord types.
PSR-2000/1000 159
Troubleshooting
Problem Possible Cause and Solution
• The PSR-2000/1000 does not turn on; there Make sure that the PSR-2000/1000 has been plugged in properly (page 16).
is no power.
• A click or pop is heard when the power is This is normal when electrical current is applied to the instrument.
turned on or off.
• Noise is heard from the PSR-2000/1000’s Using a mobile phone in close proximity to the PSR-2000/1000 may produce
speakers. interference. To prevent this, turn off the mobile phone, or use it further away from
the PSR-2000/1000.
• The display is too bright or too dark to read. The brightness of the display may be affected by the surrounding temperature;
try adjusting the contrast (page 17).
• The keyboard volume is low compared to that The overall keyboard volume or the independent volume level of the keyboard
of the Auto Accompaniment or song playback. part may be set too low. Raise the MAIN/LAYER/LEFT volume voices or lower
the STYLE/SONG volume in the BALANCE display (page 61).
• The volume of the Auto Accompaniment or The volume level of one or more accompaniment parts or song channels is set
song playback is low compared to that of the too low. Raise the part or channel level(s) in the appropriate MIXER display
keyboard. (page 122).
• The overall volume is low, or no sound is • The Master Volume is set too low; set it to an appropriate level with the
heard. [MASTER VOLUME] dial.
• The volume of the individual parts may be set too low. Raise the volume of
MAIN, LAYER, LEFT, STYLE, and SONG in the BALANCE display (page 61).
• Make sure the desired channel is set to ON (page 61, 78).
• Headphones are connected, disabling the speaker output. Unplug the
headphones.
• Make sure the Local Control function is set to ON (page 145).
• Not all simultaneously-played notes sound. You may be exceeding the maximum polyphony of the PSR-2000/1000. When
this happens, the earliest played notes will stop sounding, letting the latest
played notes sound. See page 162 for information on the maximum polyphony.
• Accompaniment style or Song playback does • MIDI Clock may be set to “EXTERNAL.” Make sure this is set to “INTERNAL”
not start. (page 146).
• Make sure to press the appropriate [START/STOP] button. To play an
accompaniment style, press the STYLE [START/STOP] button (page 61); to
playback a song, press the SONG [START/STOP] button (page 76).
• “New Song” (a blank song) has been selected. Make sure to select an
appropriate song in the SONG display (page 76).
• The song has been stopped at the end of the song data. Return to the
beginning of the song by pressing the [TOP] button (page 78).
• The Multi Pads do not play back, even when MIDI Clock may be set to “EXTERNAL.” Make sure this is set to “INTERNAL”
one of the MULTI PAD buttons is pressed. (page 146).
• Only the rhythm channel plays. Make sure the Auto Accompaniment function is turned on; press the [ACMP]
button.
• The accompaniment style does not start, You may be trying to start accompaniment by playing a key in the right hand
even when Synchro Start is in standby range of the keyboard. Make sure to play a key in the left-hand (accompaniment)
condition and a key is pressed. range of the keyboard.
• The desired chord is not recognized or output • You may not be playing the correct keys to indicate the chord. Refer to “Chord
by the auto accompaniment. Types Recognized in the Fingered Mode” (page 63).
• You may be playing the keys according to a different fingering mode, and not
the one currently selected. Check the accompaniment mode, and play the
keys according to the selected mode (page 62).
• An unexpected result or malfunction occurred If, during execution of an operation, you simultaneously press three or more
during an operation. buttons that are unrelated to the operation or normal procedure, unexpected or
unusual results may occur.
• Auto accompaniment chords are recognized This is normal if the fingering mode is set to “Full Keyboard” or “AI Full Keyboard.”
regardless of the split point or where chords If either of these is selected, chords are recognized over the entire range of the
are played on the keyboard. keyboard, irrespective of the split point setting. If desired, select a different
fingering mode (page 62).
160 PSR-2000/1000
Troubleshooting
Problem Possible Cause and Solution

• Certain notes sound at the wrong pitch. The Scale parameter has probably been set to something other than “Equal,”
changing the tuning system of the keyboard. Make sure “Equal” is selected as
the Scale in the Scale Tune page (page 135).
• Some channels do not properly play back Make sure that playback of the relevant channel(s) is turned on (page 78).
when playing back song data.
• If you experience distorted or out-of-tune The solution to this problem is to ensure that as little extraneous sound as
sound from the Vocal Harmony feature, your possible is picked up by your vocal microphone:
vocal microphone may be picking up • Sing as closely to the microphone as possible.
extraneous sounds (other than your voice) — • Use a directional microphone.
the Auto Accompaniment sound from the • Turn down the MASTER VOLUME or volume for each part.
PSR-2000/1000, for example. In particular, • Separate the microphone from the instrument's speakers as much as
bass sounds can cause mistracking of the possible.
Vocal Harmony feature (PSR-2000 only). • Cut the Low band via the 3 Band EQ function in the MICROPHONE SETTING
display (page 130).
• Increase the microphone input level (“TH.”) in the Compressor function from
the MICROPHONE SETTING display (page 130).
• Appropriate harmony notes are not produced Make sure you are using the appropriate method to specify the harmony notes
by the Vocal Harmony feature (PSR-2000 for the current Vocal Harmony mode. See page 131.
only).
• The Harmony function does not operate. Harmony cannot be used with the Full Keyboard or AI Full Keyboard fingering
modes. Select an appropriate fingering mode (page 62).
• The microphone input signal and Vocal This is normal; recording the audio input of the microphone is not possible.
Harmony sound (PSR-2000 only) cannot be
recorded.
• MIDI data is not transmitted or received via Make sure the HOST SELECT switch is set to “MIDI” (page 155). The MIDI
the MIDI terminals, even when MIDI cables terminals cannot be used for the other switch settings.
are connected properly.
• When a voice is changed, the previously Each voice has its own suitable preset values which are automatically recalled
selected effect is changed. when the corresponding Voice Set parameters are turned on (page 143).
• There is a slight difference in sound quality This is normal and is a result of the PSR-2000/1000’s sampling system.
between notes played on the keyboard.
• Some voices have a looping sound.
• Some noise or vibrato is noticeable at higher
pitches, depending upon the voice.
• Some voices will jump an octave in pitch This is normal. Some voices have a pitch limit which, when reached, causes this
when played in the upper or lower registers. type of pitch shift.
• Disk save operations take a long time. This is normal. Keep in mind that it takes approximately 1 minute to save 1
megabyte of data to a floppy disk.
• The voice produces excessive noise. Certain voices may produce noise, depending on the Harmonic Content and/or
Brightness settings in the FILTER page of the Mixing Console display
(page 123).
• The sound is distorted or noisy. • The volume may be turned up too high. Make sure all relevant volume settings
are appropriate.
• This may be caused by the effects. Try canceling all unnecessary effects,
especially distortion-type effects (page 124).
• Some filter resonance settings in the Custom Voice Creator display (page 89)
can result in distorted sound. Adjust these settings if necessary.
• Is the gain of the Low band set too high in the Master Equalizer display
(Mixing Console — page 127) ? (PSR-2000 only)
• A strange “flanging” or “doubling” sound Both the Main and Layer parts are set to “ON,” and both parts are set to play the
occurs. Also, the sound is slightly different same voice. Set the Layer part to “OFF” (page 56) or change the voice for each
each time the keys are played. part (page 54).
PSR-2000/1000 161
Specifications
: available
Model Name PSR-2000 PSR-1000

Sound Source AWM Dynamic Stereo Sampling
Display 320 ✕ 240 dots backlit graphic LCD
Keyboard 61 keys (C1 - C6 with Initial Touch)
Voice Polyphony (max) 64 32
Voice Selection 313 voices + 480 XG voices 233 voices + 480 XG voices
+ 16 Drum Kits + 15 Drum Kits
Regular Voice 303 233
Sweet Voice 8 3
Cool Voice 2 1
Live Voice 3 —
Others 290 229
Organ Flutes 10 (8 Footages) —
Sound creator
Effects Reverb 1
Chorus 1
Effect Blocks
DSP 4 1
Microphone 1 —
REVERB 29 Preset+3 User 23 Preset+3 User
CHORUS 25 Preset+3 User 15 Preset+3 User
DSP1/DSP 164 Preset+3 User 93 Preset+3 User
Effect Types
DSP2, 3, 4 88 Preset +10 User —
Master EQ 5 Preset + 2 User —
Part EQ 27 Parts —
Vocal Harmony 49 Preset +10 User —
Accompaniment Number of Accompaniment Styles 181 169
Style
Number of Session Styles 4
Disk 28 styles (included in the accessory disk)
Fingering Single Finger, Fingered, Fingered On Bass, Multi Finger, AI Fingered,
Full Keyboard, AI Full Keyboard
Style Creator
OTS (One Touch Setting) 4/Accompaniment Style
OTS link
Music Finder 2500 (max.) 1200 (max.)
Edit
Song Format SMF (Format 0,1), ESEQ
Preset Songs
Lyrics
Score —
Recording Quick Recording, Multi Recording, Step Recording, Song Editing
Record Channels 16
Multi Pad Preset 4 Pads ✕ 54 Banks
Memory Floppy Disk (2HD,2DD)
Device
Flash Memory (internal) 580KB 260KB
Flash Availability Song (SMF), Style (SFF), Registration, Voice, etc.
Tempo Tempo Range 5 - 500
Tap Tempo
Metronome
Sound Bell on/off
162 PSR-2000/1000
Specifications
Model Name PSR-2000 PSR-1000

Registration Buttons 8
Memory
Regist Sequence
Freeze
Others Demo Function, Voice, Style
Language 6 languages (English, Japanese, German, French, Spanish, Italian)
Help
Direct Access
Master Volume
Fade In/Out
Transpose Keyboard/Song/Master
Tuning
Scale Equal Temperament, Pure Major/Pure Minor, Pythagorean, Mean-Tone,
Werckmeister/Kirnberger, Arabic 1/2
Touch Response 5 level
Jacks/Connectors DC IN, PHONES, MIDI (OUT, IN), TO HOST,
HOST SELECT SW, FOOT PEDAL1 (SWITCH), FOOT PEDAL2,
AUX OUT (LEVEL FIXED) (L/R), OUTPUT (L/L+R)
MIC (INPUT VOLUME, MIC./ LINE) —
Pedal Functions VOLUME, SUSTAIN, SOSTENUTO, SOFT, GLIDE, PORTAMENTO,
PITCHBEND, MODULATION, DSP VARIATION, SONG START/STOP,
STYLE START/STOP, etc.
Amplifiers/ Amplifiers 12 W ✕ 2
Speakers
Speakers [12 cm + 4 cm (dome)] ✕ 2 (12 cm + 5 cm) ✕ 2
Power Consumption 31 W
Power supply Yamaha AC adaptor PA-300 (included)
*May not be included in your area.Please check with your Yamaha dealer.
Dimensions [W ✕ D ✕ H] 973 ✕ 399 ✕ 161 mm
(without Music Stand) [38-5/16" ✕ 15-11/16" ✕ 6-5/16"]
Weight 10.5 Kg (23 lbs., 2 oz) 10.0 Kg (22 lbs., 1 oz)
Optional Headphones HPE-150
accessories
Foot Switch FC4 / FC5
Foot Controller FC7
Keyboard Stand L-6, L-7
* Specifications and descriptions in this owner's manual are for information purposes only. Yamaha Corp. reserves the right to
change or modify products or specifications at any time without prior notice. Since specifications, equipment or options may not
be the same in every locale, please check with your Yamaha dealer.
PSR-2000/1000 163
Index
Numerics Change the Rhythmic Feel ..................................................113
Changing Pitch-related Settings...........................................123
1 - 16 ........................................................................... 96, 105
Changing the Automatically Selected Voice Settings ...........143
[1▲▼] - [8▲▼] buttons ........................................... 19, 38–45
Changing the Icon.................................................................46
3BAND EQ (3-BAND EQUALIZER) .................................... 130
Changing the Tone of the Voice..........................................123
Changing the Touch Sensitivity Modulation and Transpose .....141
A Channel ..................................................61, 78, 102, 115, 137
A (ACMP) ........................................................................... 138 Channel Messages ..............................................................157
[A] - [J] buttons............................................................... 19, 40 Channel Muting ....................................................................61
Accent Type ....................................................................... 114 CHANNEL ON/OFF........................................................61, 78
Accessories ............................................................................ 6 [CHANNEL ON / OFF] button ..................................19, 61, 78
Accompaniment style parts................................................... 94 Channel Transpose .............................................................104
[ACMP] button ............................................................... 18, 60 CHD ...................................................................................106
ACMP TOUCH .................................................................. 138 Chord ...................................................................................94
ADD TO FAVORITE ............................................................. 69 Chord Detect ......................................................................147
Adjust the Volume Balance and Changing Voices .............. 121 Chord Events.......................................................................106
Adjusting the display contrast ............................................... 17 Chord Fingering ............................................................62, 139
Adjusting the Effects ........................................................... 124 CHORD NOTE ONLY (HARMONY).....................................90
Adjusting the Tempo ............................................................ 50 Chord Tutor ........................................................................139
Adjusting the Vocal Harmony Settings Chord Types Recognized in the Fingered Mode ....................63
and Microphone Effects .................................................. 130 Chorus ................................................................................126
Adjusting the Volume Balance ............................................. 61 CHORUS DEPTH (MIC.) .....................................................132
Adjusting the Volume Balance / Muting Specific Channels ... 78 Chorus Depth (Organ Flutes).................................................91
Adjusting values ................................................................... 46 CHORUS DEPTH (Sound Creator) ........................................90
AI ......................................................................................... 62 Clock ..................................................................................146
AI FINGERED ....................................................................... 62 COMMON ...........................................................................88
AI FULL KEYBOARD ............................................................ 62 COMPARE ............................................................................87
A+L (ACMP + LEFT)............................................................ 138 Compatible Song Types ........................................................75
Append ................................................................................ 71 COMPRESSOR....................................................................131
Applying Voice Effects.......................................................... 57 CONFIG 1 ..........................................................................148
Appropriate Panel Setting for the Selected Style.................... 67 CONFIG 2 ..........................................................................149
Arabic ................................................................................ 136 Connecting external MIDI devices ......................................153
Arranging the Style Pattern ................................................... 64 Connecting the Microphone or Guitar (PSR-2000 only) ......152
Assembling an Accompaniment Style ................................. 112 Connecting to a Computer ..................................................154
ASSIGN (HARMONY) .......................................................... 90 Controller ...........................................................................139
Attack (Organ Flutes) ............................................................ 91 Converting into Kanji (Japanese language) ............................45
ATTACK (Regular Voice) ...................................................... 89 Cool! ....................................................................................55
AUTO .................................................................................. 20 COPY ...................................................................................43
AUTO CH SET ................................................................... 137 Copying and Formatting Disks ............................................150
[AUTO FILL IN] button................................................... 18, 66 Copying Files/Folders............................................................43
Auto Revoice...................................................................... 122 Copying from Disk to Disk..................................................150
Automatically Changing One Touch Settings Creating Accompaniment Styles..........................................108
with the Sections............................................................... 68 Current Memory ...................................................................39
AUX OUT (LEVEL FIXED) [L] [R] jacks.......................... 19, 153 Customizing the Event List — Filter.....................................107
CUT......................................................................................42
B
[BACK] button .......................................................... 19, 40, 46 D
BALANCE............................................................................. 61 Data Compatibility..............................................................158
[BALANCE] button ......................................................... 19, 61 [DATA ENTRY] dial ........................................................19, 46
Bar Clear ............................................................................ 115 Data Types in the MIDI TRANSMIT/RECEIVE Display .........146
Bar Copy ............................................................................ 115 DC IN terminal .............................................................19, 153
Basic Operations — Organizing Your Data .......................... 38 DECAY .................................................................................89
Bass...................................................................................... 94 DELETE (Basic Operations)....................................................43
BEAT .............................................................................. 70, 71 Delete (Song Creator)..........................................................103
Beat Converter.................................................................... 113 DELETE RECORD..................................................................71
Boost/Cut ........................................................................... 114 Deleting Files/Folders............................................................43
[BREAK] button .............................................................. 18, 64 [DEMO] button.........................................................14, 18, 52
BRIGHTNESS ....................................................................... 89 DEPTH..................................................................................90
DESTINATION....................................................................103
C Detailed Settings for Notation ...............................................81
[DIGITAL RECORDING] button........................14, 18, 92, 108
Calling Up Ideal Setups for Your Music ................................ 69
[DIRECT ACCESS] button................................................19, 47
Cent ................................................................................... 135
164 PSR-2000/1000
Index
Direct Access Chart .............................................................. 48 F

Disk ................................................................................... 150
Fade In Time, Fade Out Time, Fade Out Hold Time............148
Disk format......................................................................... 158
[FADE IN / OUT] button .................................................18, 65
Disk Orchestra Collection .................................................... 17
FAVORITE ............................................................................71
DISPLAY VOICE NUMBER ................................................. 149
[FF] button ......................................................................18, 78
Displaying Music Notation ................................................... 80
File .......................................................................................39
Displaying the Lyrics ............................................................ 83
File/Folder-related Operations...............................................41
Displaying Upper Level pages .............................................. 44
Files/folders in a floppy disk..................................................42
DOC .................................................................................. 159
Fill ........................................................................................66
Drum ................................................................................... 55
Filter .....................................................................89, 107, 123
[DSP] button .......................................................... 19, 57, 126
FILTER BRIGHT (Sound Creator) ...........................................89
DSP Depth (Organ Flutes) .................................................... 91
FILTER HARMO. (Sound Creator)..........................................89
DSP DEPTH (Sound Creator) ................................................ 90
Fine ....................................................................................113
DSP on/off (Organ Flutes) ..................................................... 91
FINGERED ............................................................................62
DSP Type (Organ Flutes) ...................................................... 91
FINGERED ON BASS ............................................................62
Dynamics ........................................................................... 114
First Key On........................................................................101
FLOPPY DISK drive...............................................................39
E FLOPPY DISK SONG AUTO OPEN ....................................150
ECHO .......................................................................... 58, 143 Floppy disk drive ..............................................................19, 7
Edit..................................................................................... 111 FOOT PEDAL 1/2 jack ........................................................153
Edit the Created Accompaniment Style ............................... 113 FOOTAGE (Organ Flutes) .....................................................91
Editing a Recorded Song..................................................... 102 Footage (Organ Flutes) ..........................................................91
Editing Channel-related Parameters .................................... 102 [FOOT PEDAL 1 (SWITCH) ] jack .................................19, 153
Editing Chord Events .......................................................... 106 [FOOT PEDAL 2] jack...................................................19, 153
Editing Note Events ............................................................ 105 Formatting a Disk................................................................150
Editing Records .................................................................... 71 [FREEZE] button ..............................................................19, 86
Editing System Events ......................................................... 106 Freeze...........................................................................86, 142
Editing the Channel Data.................................................... 115 FULL KEYBOARD .................................................................62
Editing Voices ...................................................................... 87 [FUNCTION] button .....................................................18, 133
[EFFECT] button ........................................................... 19, 128
Effect Block ........................................................................ 125 G
Effect Connections.............................................................. 126
Gate Time.............................................................................97
Effect Structure ................................................................... 126
GENRE............................................................................70, 72
EFFECT/EQ ........................................................................... 90
GENRE NAME ......................................................................72
EFFECT/EQ (Organ Flutes) .................................................... 91
GM System Level 1 .......................................................17, 159
Effects................................................................................. 124
Groove ...............................................................................113
EG ........................................................................................ 89
Groove parameters .............................................................113
EG ATTACK (Sound Creator) ................................................ 89
GROUP SELECT....................................................................84
EG DECAY (Sound Creator) .................................................. 89
EG RELES. (Sound Creator) ................................................... 89
Embellish and enhance your melodies H
— with the automatic Harmony and Echo effects.............. 29 Handling the Floppy Disk Drive (FDD) and Floppy Disk.........7
END Mark .......................................................................... 100 Harmonic Content ................................................................89
ENDING .............................................................................. 66 HARMONY ............................................................58, 90, 143
[ENDING / rit.] button .............................................. 18, 30, 65 Harmony Assignments ........................................................144
[ENTER] button .............................................................. 19, 46 Harmony Types ..................................................................144
Entering Characters............................................................... 45 [HARMONY / ECHO] button ..........................................19, 58
Entering Chords and Sections (Chord Step) ........................... 99 Headphones .......................................................................152
Entering miscellaneous characters (marks) ............................ 45 Help messages can be displayed in any one of the
Entering numbers ................................................................. 45 following languages...........................................................49
Entering special character marks [HELP] button .................................................................18, 49
(umlaut, accent, Japanese “ ” and “ ”) ......................... 45 High Key.............................................................................117
Entering Your Name and Language Preference ................... 151 [HOST SELECT] switch .................................................19, 153
EQ.............................................................................. 121, 127 Hz ......................................................................................135
EQ High (Organ Flutes) ........................................................ 91
EQ Low (Organ Flutes) ......................................................... 91 I
Equal Temperament............................................................ 136
ICON....................................................................................46
ESEQ .................................................................................. 159
ICON SELECT .......................................................................46
Example Keyboard Data ..................................................... 157
[INPUT VOLUME] knob ...............................................19, 152
[EXIT] button .................................................................. 19, 40
Inputting and Editing Lyrics.................................................107
exit from small pop-up windows .......................................... 40
Instant Selection of Displays .................................................47
Expand/Compress ............................................................... 114
INTRO ..................................................................................66
[EXTRA TRACKS (STYLE)] button .................................... 18, 79
[INTRO] button.........................................................18, 31, 64
PSR-2000/1000 165
Index
K MODULATION ......................................................18, 58, 141

[MONO] button..............................................................19, 58
Kbd.Vel ................................................................................ 97
MONO POLY (Sound Creator)..............................................88
KEY SIGNATURE.................................................................. 81
Moving Files/Folders .............................................................42
Keyboard Percussion ............................................................ 55
MULTI FINGER.....................................................................62
Keyboard Touch ................................................................. 141
MULTI PAD [1] - [4] buttons...........................................18, 73
Keyboard/Panel .................................................................. 141
Multi Pads.............................................................................14
KEYWORD..................................................................... 70, 71
Multi Recording ....................................................................94
Kirnberger .......................................................................... 136
[MUSIC FINDER] button .....................................15, 19, 33, 69
Music Finder Record Edit ......................................................71
L Music Finder Search .............................................................70
L (LEFT) .............................................................................. 138 Music Stand ..........................................................................17
Layer .................................................................................... 56 Muting Specific Parts ............................................................79
Layering Two Different Voices ............................................. 56
LCD ..................................................................................... 15 N
[LCD CONTRAST] knob................................................. 19, 17
NAME.............................................................................41, 44
Left ....................................................................................... 57
Naming Files and Folders......................................................41
LEFT CH ............................................................................... 81
NEW (Folder) ........................................................................44
[LEFT HOLD] button ...................................................... 19, 58
NEW RECORD .....................................................................72
Length (LENG) (Organ Flutes). .............................................. 91
[NEXT] button...........................................................19, 40, 46
Live! ..................................................................................... 55
NOISE GATE.......................................................................130
Local Control ..................................................................... 145
Normal ...............................................................................101
Loop recording ................................................................... 108
Note Events.........................................................................105
Lyrics ........................................................................... 83, 107
Note for Windows users (regarding MIDI driver) .................154
LYRICS LANGUAGE .......................................................... 137
Note Limit...........................................................................117
NOTE NAME ........................................................................82
M Nrm. .....................................................................................97
MAIN A/B/C/D ..................................................................... 64 NTR (Note Transposition Rule)............................................116
MAIN [A] button ............................................................ 18, 64 NTT (Note Transposition Table) ..........................................117
MAIN [B] button ............................................................ 18, 64 NUMBER OF RECORDS .......................................................69
MAIN [C] button ............................................................ 18, 64
MAIN [D] button ............................................................ 18, 64 O
Maintaining Panel Settings ................................................. 142
OCTAVE .............................................................................123
Making Global and Other Important Settings...................... 133
OCTAVE LEFT (Sound Creator) .............................................88
Making Overall System Settings (Local Control, Clock, etc.)145
OCTAVE M/LYR (Sound Creator) ..........................................88
Making Settings for Fade In/Out, Metronome,
One Touch Setting ................................................................32
Parameter Lock, and Tap ................................................ 148
ONE TOUCH SETTING [1] - [4] buttons...................19, 67, 68
Making Settings for the Display and Voice Number
Open/Save displays...............................................................38
Indication ....................................................................... 149
Organ Flutes .............................................................15, 55, 91
Making Settings for the Pedals and Keyboard ..................... 139
Organ Type (Organ Flutes)....................................................91
Making Settings for the Vocal Harmony and Microphone... 130
Organizing Files by Creating a New Folder...........................44
Making Style File Format Settings ....................................... 116
Original Beat ......................................................................113
Master Tune ....................................................................... 135
Other Parameters in the Basic Display ................................111
[MASTER VOLUME] dial ................................................ 18, 17
Other Playback-related Operations .......................................78
Mean-Tone......................................................................... 136
Other Settings .....................................................................148
Measure/Beat/Clock ............................................................. 97
OTS LINK TIMING..............................................................138
[MEMORY] button.......................................................... 19, 84
[OTS LINK] button ..........................................................18, 68
Message Switch .................................................................. 146
OUTPUT [L / L+R] [R] jacks..........................................19, 153
Messages ................................................................................ 8
OVERALL SETTING ............................................................130
Metronome ........................................................................ 148
Overdub recording .............................................................108
[METRONOME] button .................................................. 18, 50
Owner ................................................................................151
MIC. ................................................................................... 128
MIC. buttons (PSR-2000 only) ...................................... 19, 128
[MIC. LINE IN] jack ...................................................... 19, 152
P
MICROPHONE SETTING ................................................... 130 Pad .......................................................................................94
[MIC. SETTING] button ................................................ 19, 128 PAN (MIC.) .........................................................................132
MIDI .................................................................................. 145 PANEL SUSTAIN (Sound Creator) .........................................90
MIDI [OUT] [IN] terminals ........................................... 19, 153 Parameter ...........................................................................116
MIDI channels.................................................................... 157 Parameter Lock ...................................................................149
MIDI IN.............................................................................. 153 PASTE .............................................................................42, 43
MIDI OUT.......................................................................... 153 Pedal ..................................................................................139
MIDI Receive Parts ............................................................. 147 PEDAL 1/2 POLARITY.........................................................139
MIDI SET UP ...................................................................... 151 PEDAL PUNCH IN/OUT.....................................................101
MIDI terminals ........................................................... 153, 154 Pedal-controllable Functions...............................................140
Mix .................................................................................... 103 [PHONES] jack .............................................................18, 152
[MIXING CONSOLE] button......................................... 18, 121 Phrase...................................................................................94
Mode (Organ Flutes)............................................................. 91 Phrase Mark..................................................................78, 137
166 PSR-2000/1000
Index
PHRASE MARK REPEAT ..................................................... 137 REGISTRATION MEMORY CONTENTS................................84

PITCH BEND.................................................................. 18, 58 Registration Sequence.........................................................142
PITCH BEND RANGE......................................................... 123 Regular Voice Parameters .....................................................88
Pitch settings for each scale ................................................ 136 RELEASE ...............................................................................89
Playback of Songs ................................................................ 21 Remove Event .....................................................................115
Playing a style ................................................................ 28, 59 Repeat Playback of a Specific Range.....................................79
Playing a Style’s Rhythm Channels only ............................... 61 [REPEAT] button .............................................................18, 79
Playing Along with the PSR-2000/1000 ................................ 36 Replace.................................................................................71
Playing Back Songs on Disk ................................................. 78 Resonance ............................................................................89
Playing Different Voices with the Left and Right Hands ........ 27 Response (RESP) (Organ Flutes).............................................91
Playing Fill-in patterns automatically when changing Restoring the Factory-programmed Settings
accompaniment sections................................................... 66 of the PSR-2000/1000......................................................151
Playing Several Sounds Simultaneously ................................ 56 Reverb ................................................................................126
Playing Styles ....................................................................... 28 REVERB DEPTH (MIC.) .......................................................132
Playing the Demos ......................................................... 20, 52 Reverb Depth (Organ Flutes).................................................91
Playing the Internal Songs .................................................... 76 REVERB DEPTH (Sound Creator)...........................................90
Playing the sounds of the PSR-2000/1000 through [REW] button ..................................................................18, 78
an external audio system, and recording the sounds Rhythm .................................................................................94
to an external recorder .................................................... 153 RIGHT CH ............................................................................81
Playing Two Voices Simultaneously ..................................... 26 Root....................................................................................147
Playing Voices...................................................................... 25 Rotary SP Speed (Organ Flutes) .............................................91
Playing with the Songs ......................................................... 36 RTR (Retrigger Rule)............................................................117
PORTAMENT TIME (Sound Creator) ..................................... 88
PORTAMENTO TIME (Mixing Console).............................. 123 S
Power Supply ....................................................................... 16
S.STOP WINDOW..............................................................138
Powering Up ........................................................................ 17
SAVE.....................................................................................44
Power-on Procedure............................................................. 16
Save................................................................................38, 44
PRESET drive ........................................................................ 39
Saving Files...........................................................................44
Preset MIDI Templates........................................................ 145
Saving Your Registration Memory Setups ..............................85
Punch In/Out...................................................................... 101
Scale...................................................................................136
Pure Major ......................................................................... 136
Scale Tune ..........................................................................135
Pure Minor ......................................................................... 136
Score (PSR-2000 only) ..........................................................80
Pythagorean ....................................................................... 136
Searching the Ideal Setups ....................................................70
Searching the Music Finder Records .....................................34
Q Section button indications
QUANTIZE .......................................................................... 81 — [BREAK], [INTRO], [MAIN], [ENDING] buttons............64
Quantize .................................................................... 102, 115 SECTION SET......................................................................138
Quantize Size..................................................................... 102 sections.................................................................................30
Quick Recording .................................................................. 93 Select the Recording Options: Starting, Stopping,
QUICK START.................................................................... 137 Punching In/Out ..............................................................101
Quick Start ......................................................................... 137 Selecting a Scale .................................................................135
Selecting a Voice ..................................................................54
R Selecting Files and Folders ....................................................40
Selecting Intro and Ending Types ..........................................66
Realtime Recording ............................................................ 110
Selecting items......................................................................46
Realtime Recording Characteristics..................................... 108
Selecting the Freeze Settings .................................................86
[REC] button................................................................... 18, 92
SEQUENCE END ................................................................142
REC END............................................................................ 101
Sequence Format ................................................................159
Rec Mode........................................................................... 101
sequencer ...........................................................................156
REC START......................................................................... 101
Set Up.................................................................................104
Recalling a Registration Memory Setup................................. 86
Setting Auto Accompaniment-related Parameters................138
Recalling the Registered Settings........................................... 86
Setting Chord Channels.......................................................147
Receive .............................................................................. 147
Setting Harmony and Echo..................................................143
Receive Transpose.............................................................. 146
Setting Root Note Channels ................................................147
Receiving MIDI Data .......................................................... 147
Setting Separate Voices for the Left and Right Sections
record .................................................................................. 69
of the Keyboard .................................................................57
RECORD EDIT...................................................................... 71
Setting Song-related Parameters ..........................................137
Recording............................................................................. 37
Setting the Fingering Method ..............................................139
Recording Chord Changes for the Auto Accompaniment ...... 99
Setting the Level Balance and Voice ...................................122
Recording Individual Notes .................................................. 96
Setting the Microphone Volume and Related Effects ...........132
Recording Melodies ............................................................. 98
Setting the MIDI Parameters................................................145
Recording Your Performances and Creating Songs................ 92
Setting the Registration Sequence, Freeze, and Voice Set ....142
Registering Panel Setups ....................................................... 84
Setting the volume ................................................................17
Registering the Panel Controls in One Touch Setting ............ 68
SFX .......................................................................................55
REGISTRATION EDIT display ............................................... 85
Simultaneously Playing a Song and an Accompaniment Style ...77
Registration Memory ............................................................ 84
SINGLE FINGER....................................................................62
REGISTRATION MEMORY [1] – [8] buttons ................... 19, 84
SMF (Standard MIDI File) ....................................................159
PSR-2000/1000 167
Index
Song ............................................................................... 14, 75 [TOUCH] button.............................................................19, 57

SONG [START / STOP] button........................................ 18, 76 [TRACK 1 (R)] button ......................................................18, 79
SONG AUTO REVOICE ..................................................... 122 [TRACK 2 (L)] button.......................................................18, 79
SONG CHAIN PLAY .......................................................... 137 Transmit..............................................................................146
Song Creator ........................................................................ 92 Transmit Clock....................................................................146
Song Playback .......................................................... 21, 75, 76 Transmitting MIDI Data ......................................................146
E
Song Recording .................................................................... 92 TRANSPOSE [E] [ ] buttons ....................................18, 141
Song Settings ...................................................................... 137 Transpose Assign ................................................................141
SORT BY .............................................................................. 69 Tune ...................................................................................123
SORT ORDER....................................................................... 69 TUNING.............................................................................123
SOUND (SOUND CREATOR) .............................................. 89 Tuning the Overall Pitch .....................................................135
[SOUND CREATOR] button ........................................... 18, 87 TYPE (HARMONY) ...............................................................90
Source Root/Chord ............................................................. 116
SOURCE1 .......................................................................... 103 U
SOURCE2 .......................................................................... 103
[UPPER OCTAVE] button................................................19, 58
Specifying the Order for Calling Up Registration Memory
USER drive............................................................................39
Presets ............................................................................ 142
USER EFFECT (Function) .....................................................151
SPEED .................................................................................. 90
User Effect (Mixing Console) ...............................................125
SPEED (HARMONY)............................................................. 90
Using a Microphone ...........................................................128
Split Point........................................................................... 138
Using the Music Finder .........................................................33
[STANDBY/ON] switch ............................................ 14, 18, 17
Using the USB terminal on your computer
START SEARCH.................................................................... 70
with a USB/MIDI interface (UX256, etc.) .........................155
Step Record .......................................................................... 96
Using Your PSR-2000/1000 with Other Devices .................152
Step Record (Chord) ............................................................. 99
Utility .................................................................................148
Step Record (Note) ............................................................... 98
Step Recording ................................................................... 111
STOP ACMP....................................................................... 138
V
[STOP] button (MULTI PAD) .......................................... 18, 73 [VARIATION] button ......................................................19, 58
Stopping the Style Playback While Releasing Keys ............... 65 Variation (Organ Flutes) ........................................................91
Strength .............................................................................. 114 Velocity ........................................................................97, 114
Style ............................................................................... 14, 59 Velocity Change .................................................................115
STYLE [START / STOP] button ........................................ 18, 60 [VH TYPE SELECT] button.............................................19, 128
STYLE buttons ................................................................ 18, 59 VIBRATO..............................................................................90
Style Creator....................................................................... 108 VIBRATO DELAY (Sound Creator).........................................89
Style File ...................................................................... 17, 159 Vibrato Depth (Organ Flutes) ................................................91
Style File Format................................................................. 109 VIBRATO DEPTH (Sound Creator) ........................................89
Style Sections ....................................................................... 30 Vibrato On/Off (Organ Flutes)...............................................91
Style Setting........................................................................ 138 VIBRATO SPEED (Sound Creator) .........................................89
sustain ............................................................................ 89, 90 Vibrato Speed (VIB. SPEED) (Organ Flutes)............................91
[SUSUTAIN] button........................................................ 19, 57 [VOCAL HARMONY] button ........................................19, 128
Sweet! .................................................................................. 55 Vocal Harmony ....................................................................15
Swing ................................................................................. 113 VOCAL HARMONY CONTROL .........................................131
[SYNC.START] button .................................................... 18, 60 Vocal Harmony Type..........................................................129
[SYNC.STOP] button ...................................................... 18, 65 Voice Allocation Format .....................................................159
SYS/EX. (System Exclusive).................................................. 106 VOICE buttons ..........................................................15, 19, 54
System................................................................................ 145 Voice Characteristics ............................................................55
System and Insertion .......................................................... 126 Voice Effects .........................................................................57
System Events ..................................................................... 106 VOICE PART ON / OFF [LAYER] button..........................19, 56
System Messages ................................................................ 158 VOICE PART ON / OFF [LEFT] button.............................19, 56
System Reset....................................................................... 151 VOICE PART ON / OFF [MAIN] button...........................19, 56
SYSTEM SET UP ................................................................. 151 Voice Set ............................................................................143
VOL/ATTACK (Organ Flutes).................................................91
T VOLUME (HARMONY) ........................................................90
VOLUME (MIC.) .................................................................132
[TALK] button............................................................... 19, 128
VOLUME (Sound Creator).....................................................88
TALK SETTING ................................................................... 132
Volume (VOL) (Organ Flutes)................................................91
Tap Count .......................................................................... 149
Volume/Voice.....................................................................122
[TAP TEMPO] button...................................................... 18, 51
E
TEMPO [E] [ ] buttons ............................................. 18, 50
TEMPO FROM ..................................................................... 70
W
Tempo Indications — MAIN Display .................................... 51 Werckmeister......................................................................136
TEMPO TO .......................................................................... 70 What You Can Do With MIDI.............................................158
[TO HOST] terminal............................................... 15, 19, 154 What’s MIDI?......................................................................155
TO HOST terminal ............................................................. 154
[TOP] button .................................................................. 18, 78 X
TOTAL VOLUME ATTENUATOR (MIC.) ............................ 132 XF .................................................................................17, 159
TOUCH LIMIT (HARMONY) ................................................ 90 XG ................................................................................17, 159
TOUCH SENSE (Sound Creator) ........................................... 88
168 PSR-2000/1000
Limited Warranty
90 DAYS LABOR 1 YEAR PARTS
Yamaha Corporation of America, hereafter referred to as Yamaha, warrants to the original consumer of a product included in the cate-
gories listed below, that the product will be free of defects in materials and/or workmanship for the periods indicated. This warranty is
applicable to all models included in the following series of products:
PSR SERIES OF PORTATONE ELECTRONIC KEYBOARDS
If during the first 90 days that immediately follows the purchase date, your new Yamaha product covered by this warranty is found to
have a defect in material and/or workmanship, Yamaha and/or its authorized representative will repair such defect without charge for
parts or labor.
If parts should be required after this 90 day period but within the one year period that immediately follows the purchase date, Yamaha
will, subject to the terms of this warranty, supply these parts without charge. However, charges for labor, and/or any miscellaneous
expenses incurred are the consumers responsibility. Yamaha reserves the right to utilize reconditioned parts in repairing these products
and/or to use reconditioned units as warranty replacements.
THIS WARRANTY IS THE ONLY EXPRESS WARRANTY WHICH YAMAHA MAKES IN CONNECTION WITH THESE
PRODUCTS. ANY IMPLIED WARRANTY APPLICABLE TO THE PRODUCT, INCLUDING THE WARRANTY OF MER-
CHANT ABILITY IS LIMITED TO THE DURATION OF THE EXPRESS WARRANTY. YAMAHA EXCLUDES AND
SHALL NOT BE LIABLE IN ANY EVENT FOR INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES.
Some states do not allow limitations that relate to implied warranties and/or the exclusion of incidental or consequential damages.
Therefore, these limitations and exclusions may not apply to you.
This warranty gives you specific legal rights. You may also have other rights which vary from state to state.
CONSUMERS RESPONSIBILITIES
If warranty service should be required, it is necessary that the consumer assume certain responsibilities:
1. Contact the Customer Service Department of the retailer selling the product, or any retail outlet authorized by Yamaha to sell the
product for assistance. You may also contact Yamaha directly at the address provided below.
2. Deliver the unit to be serviced under warranty to: the retailer selling the product, an authorized service center, or to Yamaha with an
explanation of the problem. Please be prepared to provide proof purchase date (sales receipt, credit card copy, etc.) when requesting
service and/or parts under warranty.
3. Shipping and/or insurance costs are the consumers responsibility.* Units shipped for service should be packed securely.
*Repaired units will be returned PREPAID if warranty service is required within the first 90 days.
IMPORTANT: Do NOT ship anything to ANY location without prior authorization. A Return Authorization (RA) will be
issued that has a tracking number assigned that will expedite the servicing of your unit and provide a tracking system if
needed.
4. Your owners manual contains important safety and operating instructions. It is your responsibility to be aware of the contents of this
manual and to follow all safety precautions.
EXCLUSIONS
This warranty does not apply to units whose trade name, trademark, and/or ID numbers have been altered, defaced, exchanged
removed, or to failures and/or damages that may occur as a result of:
1. Neglect, abuse, abnormal strain, modification or exposure to extremes in temperature or humidity.
2. Improper repair or maintenance by any person who is not a service representative of a retail outlet authorized by Yamaha to sell the
product, an authorized service center, or an authorized service representative of Yamaha.
3. This warranty is applicable only to units sold by retailers authorized by Yamaha to sell these products in the U.S.A., the District of
Columbia, and Puerto Rico. This warranty is not applicable in other possessions or territories of the U.S.A. or in any other country.
Please record the model and serial number of the product you have purchased in the spaces provided below.
Model________________________ Serial #_____________________________ Sales Slip #_____________________________
Purchased from______________________________________________________ Date__________________________________

(Retailer)
YAMAHA CORPORATION OF AMERICA
Electronic Service Division
6600 Orangethorpe Avenue
Buena Park, CA 90620
KEEP THIS DOCUMENT FOR YOUR RECORDS. DO NOT MAIL!

FCC INFORMATION (U.S.A.)
1. IMPORTANT NOTICE: DO NOT MODIFY THIS UNIT! other electronic devices. Compliance with FCC regula-
This product, when installed as indicated in the instructions does not guarantee that interference will not occur
tions contained in this manual, meets FCC require- in all installations. If this product is found to be the
ments. Modifications not expressly approved by source of interference, which can be determined by
Yamaha may void your authority, granted by the FCC, to turning the unit “OFF” and “ON”, please try to eliminate
use the product. the problem by using one of the following measures:
2. IMPORTANT: When connecting this product to acces- Relocate either this product or the device that is being
sories and/or another product use only high quality affected by the interference.
shielded cables. Cable/s supplied with this product Utilize power outlets that are on different branch (circuit
MUST be used. Follow all installation instructions. Fail- breaker or fuse) circuits or install AC line filter/s.
ure to follow instructions could void your FCC authori- In the case of radio or TV interference, relocate/reorient
zation to use this product in the USA. the antenna. If the antenna lead-in is 300 ohm ribbon
3. NOTE: This product has been tested and found to com- lead, change the lead-in to co-axial type cable.
ply with the requirements listed in FCC Regulations, If these corrective measures do not produce satisfac-
Part 15 for Class “B” digital devices. Compliance with tory results, please contact the local retailer authorized
these requirements provides a reasonable level of to distribute this type of product. If you can not locate
assurance that your use of this product in a residential the appropriate retailer, please contact Yamaha Corpo-
environment will not result in harmful interference with ration of America, Electronic Service Division, 6600
other electronic devices. This equipment generates/ Orangethorpe Ave, Buena Park, CA90620
uses radio frequencies and, if not installed and used The above statements apply ONLY to those products
according to the instructions found in the users manual, distributed by Yamaha Corporation of America or its
may cause interference harmful to the operation of subsidiaries.
* This applies only to products distributed by YAMAHA CORPORATION OF AMERICA. (class B)
OBSERVERA!
Apparaten kopplas inte ur växelströmskällan (nätet) sá länge som
den ar ansluten till vägguttaget, även om själva apparaten har
stängts av.
ADVARSEL: Netspæendingen til dette apparat er IKKE afbrudt,

sálæenge netledningen siddr i en stikkontakt, som er t endt — ogsá
selvom der or slukket pá apparatets afbryder.
VAROITUS: Laitteen toisiopiiriin kytketty käyttökytkin ei irroita koko

laitetta verkosta.
(standby)
For details of products, please contact your nearest Yamaha or the Die Einzelheiten zu Produkten sind bei Ihrer unten aufgeführten
authorized distributor listed below. Niederlassung und bei Yamaha Vertragshändlern in den jeweiligen
Bestimmungsländern erhältlich.
Pour plus de détails sur les produits, veuillez-vous adresser à Yamaha ou
au distributeur le plus proche de vous figurant dans la liste suivante. Para detalles sobre productos, contacte su tienda Yamaha más cercana
o el distribuidor autorizado que se lista debajo.
NORTH AMERICA ITALY ASIA

Yamaha Musica Italia S.P.A.
CANADA Viale Italia 88, 20020 Lainate (Milano), Italy
HONG KONG
Yamaha Canada Music Ltd. Tel: 02-935-771 Tom Lee Music Co., Ltd.
135 Milner Avenue, Scarborough, Ontario, 11/F., Silvercord Tower 1, 30 Canton Road,
M1S 3R1, Canada SPAIN/PORTUGAL Tsimshatsui, Kowloon, Hong Kong
Tel: 416-298-1311 Yamaha-Hazen Electronica Musical, S.A. Tel: 2737-7688
Ctra. de la Coruna km. 17, 200, 28230
U.S.A. Las Rozas (Madrid) Spain
INDONESIA
Yamaha Corporation of America Tel: 91-201-0700 PT. Yamaha Music Indonesia (Distributor)
6600 Orangethorpe Ave., Buena Park, Calif. 90620, PT. Nusantik
U.S.A. GREECE Gedung Yamaha Music Center, Jalan Jend. Gatot
Tel: 714-522-9011 Philippe Nakas S.A. Subroto Kav. 4, Jakarta 12930, Indonesia
Navarinou Street 13, P.Code 10680, Athens, Greece Tel: 21-520-2577
Tel: 01-364-7111
CENTRAL & SOUTH AMERICA KOREA
SWEDEN Yamaha Music Korea Ltd.
MEXICO Yamaha Scandinavia AB Tong-Yang Securities Bldg. 16F 23-8 Yoido-dong,
Yamaha de Mexico S.A. De C.V., J. A. Wettergrens Gata 1 Youngdungpo-ku, Seoul, Korea
Departamento de ventas Box 30053 Tel: 02-3770-0661
Javier Rojo Gomez No.1149, Col. Gpe Del S-400 43 Göteborg, Sweden
Moral, Deleg. Iztapalapa, 09300 Mexico, D.F. Tel: 031 89 34 00
MALAYSIA
Tel: 686-00-33 Yamaha Music Malaysia, Sdn., Bhd.
DENMARK Lot 8, Jalan Perbandaran, 47301 Kelana Jaya,
BRAZIL YS Copenhagen Liaison Office Petaling Jaya, Selangor, Malaysia
Yamaha Musical do Brasil LTDA. Generatorvej 8B Tel: 3-703-0900
Av. Rebouças 2636, São Paulo, Brasil DK-2730 Herlev, Denmark
Tel: 011-853-1377 Tel: 44 92 49 00
PHILIPPINES
Yupangco Music Corporation
ARGENTINA FINLAND 339 Gil J. Puyat Avenue, P.O. Box 885 MCPO,
Yamaha de Panamá S.A. Sucursal de Argentina F-Musiikki Oy Makati, Metro Manila, Philippines
Viamonte 1145 Piso2-B 1053, Kluuvikatu 6, P.O. Box 260, Tel: 819-7551
Buenos Aires, Argentina SF-00101 Helsinki, Finland
Tel: 1-4371-7021 Tel: 09 618511
SINGAPORE
Yamaha Music Asia Pte., Ltd.
PANAMA AND OTHER LATIN NORWAY 11 Ubi Road #06-00, Meiban Industrial Building,
AMERICAN COUNTRIES/ Norsk filial av Yamaha Scandinavia AB Singapore
CARIBBEAN COUNTRIES Grini Næringspark 1 Tel: 65-747-4374
Yamaha de Panamá S.A. N-1345 Østerås, Norway
Tel: 67 16 77 70
TAIWAN
Torre Banco General, Piso 7, Urbanización Marbella,
Yamaha KHS Music Co., Ltd.
Calle 47 y Aquilino de la Guardia, ICELAND 10F, 150, Tun-Hwa Northroad,
Ciudad de Panamá, Panamá Skifan HF Taipei, Taiwan, R.O.C.
Tel: 507-269-5311 Skeifan 17 P.O. Box 8120 Tel: 02-2713-8999
IS-128 Reykjavik, Iceland
Tel: 525 5000
THAILAND
EUROPE Siam Music Yamaha Co., Ltd.
THE UNITED KINGDOM OTHER EUROPEAN COUNTRIES 121/60-61 RS Tower 17th Floor,
Yamaha-Kemble Music (U.K.) Ltd. Yamaha Europa GmbH. Ratchadaphisek RD., Dindaeng,
Sherbourne Drive, Tilbrook, Milton Keynes, Siemensstraße 22-34, 25462 Rellingen, Bangkok 10320, Thailand
MK7 8BL, England F.R. of Germany Tel: 02-641-2951
Tel: 04101-3030
Tel: 01908-366700 THE PEOPLE’S REPUBLIC OF CHINA
IRELAND AND OTHER ASIAN COUNTRIES
Danfay Ltd. AFRICA Yamaha Corporation,
61D, Sallynoggin Road, Dun Laoghaire, Co. Dublin Asia-Pacific Music Marketing Group
Yamaha Corporation,
Tel: 01-2859177 Nakazawa-cho 10-1, Hamamatsu, Japan 430-8650
Asia-Pacific Music Marketing Group
Tel: 053-460-2317
GERMANY/SWITZERLAND Nakazawa-cho 10-1, Hamamatsu, Japan 430-8650
Yamaha Europa GmbH. Tel: 053-460-2312
Siemensstraße 22-34, 25462 Rellingen, OCEANIA
F.R. of Germany MIDDLE EAST AUSTRALIA
Tel: 04101-3030
TURKEY/CYPRUS Yamaha Music Australia Pty. Ltd.
AUSTRIA Level 1, 99 Queensbridge Street, Southbank, Victoria
Yamaha Europa GmbH.
Yamaha Music Austria 3006, Australia
Siemensstraße 22-34, 25462 Rellingen,
Schleiergasse 20, A-1100 Wien Austria Tel: 3-9693-5111
F.R. of Germany
Tel: 01-60203900 NEW ZEALAND
Tel: 04101-3030
THE NETHERLANDS OTHER COUNTRIES Music Houses of N.Z. Ltd.
Yamaha Music Nederland 146/148 Captain Springs Road, Te Papapa,
Yamaha Music Gulf FZE
Kanaalweg 18G, 3526KL, Utrecht, The Netherlands Auckland, New Zealand
LB21-128 Jebel Ali Freezone
Tel: 030-2828411 Tel: 9-634-0099
P.O.Box 17328, Dubai, U.A.E.
BELGIUM Tel: 971-4-881-5868 COUNTRIES AND TRUST
Yamaha Music Belgium TERRITORIES IN PACIFIC OCEAN
Keiberg Imperiastraat 8, 1930 Zaventem, Belgium Yamaha Corporation,
Tel: 02-7258220 Asia-Pacific Music Marketing Group
FRANCE Nakazawa-cho 10-1, Hamamatsu, Japan 430-8650
Tel: 053-460-2312
Yamaha Musique France,
Division Claviers
BP 70-77312 Marne-la-Vallée Cedex 2, France
Tel: 01-64-61-4000
HEAD OFFICE Yamaha Corporation, Pro Audio & Digital Musical Instrument Division
Nakazawa-cho 10-1, Hamamatsu, Japan 430-8650
Tel: 053-460-3273
[PK] 22
Yamaha PK CLUB (Portable Keyboard Home Page, English only)
http://www.yamahaPKclub.com/
Yamaha Manual Library (English versions only)

http://www2.yamaha.co.jp/manual/english/
M.D.G., Pro Audio & Digital Musical Instrument Division, Yamaha Corporation
© 2001 Yamaha Corporation
??????? ???AP???.?-03C0 Printed in Indonesia

Psr2000e1 PDF

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Psr2000e1 PDF

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Psr2000e1 PDF

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

OWNER’S

92-BP (bottom) PLEASE KEEP THIS MANUAL

About this Owner’s Manual and Data List

Introduction (page 2): Please read this section first.

Data List : Voice List, MIDI Data Format, etc.

• Never attempt to remove the disk or turn the power off

Cleaning the Disk Drive Read/Write Head

• Clean the read/write head regularly. This instrument

About the Display Messages

F You can select the desired

For this example, press the

Using Your PSR-2000/1000 Saving and Recalling Custom Panel Setups

Index ................................... 164

Changing the sound

Playing the auto accompaniment

Creating your original settings

Using a microphone (PSR-2000 only)

Connecting the PSR-2000/1000 to other devices

SONG Multi Pads DEMO

SONG EXTRA TRACK TRACK METRO-

(STYLE) (L) (R)

REC TOP START/STOP REW FF DIGITAL

NEW SONG SYNC. START A

BALLAD DANCE LATIN USER

MIN MAX CHANNEL ON/OFF 1 2 3 4

STYLE CONTROL PART

STYLE DIGITAL RECORDING

VOICE ORGAN &

F GUITAR BASS BRASS WOODWIND

LEFT STRINGS CHOIR & PAD SYNTH. XG

MIDI master (transmitting device)

PSR-2000/1000 as MIDI slave (MIDI receiving device)

4 Connect the other end (normal AC plug) to the

Do not attempt to use an AC adaptor other than the Yamaha PA-

SONG EXTRA TRACK TRACK METRO-

BALLAD DANCE LATIN USER

21 MULTI PAD 22 41 BALANCE

PITCH BEND MODULATION

POWER MASTER VOLUME

42 MAIN 63 PIANO & HARPSI. E.PIANO ACCORDION PERCUSSION

I 51 USER ORGAN FLUTES

DISPLAY CONTROL MIC.

VOICE EFFECT Microphone (PSR-2000 only)

The PSR-2000/1000 features an extensive variety of

1 Press the [DEMO] button

back the Demo DEMO

Voice Demos showcase the

Song Playback Reference

Song related buttons Make sure that the Lan-

Floppy disk drive

2 Press the [A] button to call up the Song Open display.

From the MAIN display (the

FLOPPY DISK (commercially available

Press the [BACK]/[NEXT] button to select the drive.

3 Press the [A] - [C] button to select the Voice/Style/Function folder.

5 Press the SONG [START/STOP] button to start playback.

If the STYLE tab is

You can call up a full set of

8 Press the SONG [START/STOP] button to stop playback.